Professional Documents
Culture Documents
FR - BPP - Text 2023
FR - BPP - Text 2023
Applied Skills
Financial
Reporting (FR)
Workbook
HB2022
HB2022
HB2022
Formula to learn
This boxed feature will highlight important formula which you need to learn for
your exam.
PER alert
This feature identifies when something you are reading will also be useful for your
PER requirement (see ‘The PER alert’ section above for more details).
Illustration
Illustrations walk through how to apply key knowledge and techniques step by step.
Activity
Activities give you essential practice of techniques covered in the chapter.
Essential reading
Links to the Essential reading are given throughout the chapter. The Essential
reading is included in the free eBook, accessed via the Exam Success Site (see inside
cover for details on how to access this).
At the end of each chapter you will find a Knowledge diagnostic, which is a summary of the main
learning points from the chapter to allow you to check you have understood the key concepts. You
will also find a Further study guidance which contains suggestions for ways in which you can
continue your learning and enhance your understanding. This can include: recommendations for
question practice from the Further question practice and solutions, to test your understanding of
the topics in the Chapter; suggestions for further reading which can be done, such as technical
articles, and ideas for your own research.
HB2022
Introduction vi
11 Accounting for associates Further reading on the requirement to use the equity
method when accounting for associates and activities
with consolidation including an associate
14 Provisions and events after Revision of IAS 37 covered in earlier studies, including
the reporting period practice activities
HB2022
Introduction viii
The syllabus
The broad syllabus headings are:
C Analysing and interpreting the financial statements of single entities and groups
Main capabilities
On successful completion of this exam, you should be able to:
A Discuss and apply conceptual and regulatory frameworks for financial reporting
D Prepare and present financial statements for single entities and business combinations
in accordance with IFRS Standards
Financial
Accounting (FA)
B6 Leasing Chapter 13
B8 Taxation Chapter 16
C Analysing and interpreting the financial statements of single entities and groups
HB2022
Introduction x
The complete syllabus and study guide can be found by visiting the exam resource finder on the
ACCA website: www.accaglobal.com
The exam
Computer-based exams
Applied Skills exams are all computer-based exams (CBE).
C Constructed 2 questions × 20 40
response (long form marks
questions)
Total 100
Section A and B questions will be selected from the entire syllabus. These sections will contain a
variety of OT questions. The responses to each question, or subpart in the case of OT case
questions, are marked automatically as either correct or incorrect by computer.
Section C questions will mainly focus on the following syllabus areas, but a minority of marks can
be drawn from any other area of the syllabus.
HB2022
Introduction xii
r planning
Answe
c FR skills C
n Specifi o
tio
rr req
a
ec ui
of
m
t i rem
or
nt
inf
erp ents
ng
Approach to Application
reta
agi
tion
Spreadsheet Interpretation
l y si s
Go od
skills skills
ana
ti m
c al
Approach
em
to Case
e ri
OTQs
an
um
ag
tn
em
en
en
t ci
Effi
Effe cti
ve writing
a nd p r
esentation
Specific FR skills
These are the skills specific to FR that we think you need to develop in order to pass the exam.
In this Workbook, there are five Skills Checkpoints which define each skill and show how it is
applied in answering a question. A brief summary of each skill is given below.
STEP 4: Apply your technical knowledge to the data presented in the question.
Work through calculations taking your time and read through each answer option
with care. OT questions are designed so that each answer option is plausible. Work
through each response option and eliminate those you know are incorrect
HB2022
Introduction xiv
HB2022
Introduction xvi
HB2022
Introduction xviii
HB2022
Introduction xx
Question practice
Question practice is a core part of learning new topic areas. When you practice questions, you
should focus on improving the Exam success skills – personal to your needs – by obtaining
feedback or through a process of self-assessment.
Sitting this exam as a computer-based exam and practicing as many exam-style questions as
possible in the ACCA Exam Practice Platform will be the key to passing this exam. You should
attempt questions under timed conditions and ensure you produce full answers to the discussion
parts as well as doing the calculations. Also ensure that you attempt all mock exams under exam
conditions.
ACCA have launched a free on-demand resource designed to mirror the live exam experience
helping you to become more familiar with the exam format. You can access the platform via the
Study Support Resources section of the ACCA website navigating to the CBE question practice
section and logging in with your my ACCA credentials. Question practice is a core part of learning
new topic areas. When you practice questions, you should focus on improving the Exam success
skills – personal to your needs – by obtaining feedback or through a process of self-assessment.
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
HB2022
HB2022
2 Financial Reporting (FR)
Chapter overview
The Conceptual Framework
Inhalt
Liability Derecognition
Enhancing qualitative
characteristics
Equity
Measurement
Historical cost
Current value
HB2022
1: The Conceptual Framework 3
2.2 Status
The Conceptual Framework is not an IFRS Standard. It does not override any IFRS Standard, but
instead forms the conceptual basis for the development and application of IFRS Standards.
HB2022
4 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
1: The Conceptual Framework 5
3.2.1 Comparability
Comparability: The qualitative characteristic that enables users to identify and understand
KEY
TERM similarities in, and differences among, items (Conceptual Framework: para. 2.25).
For example:
• Consider the disclosure of accounting policies. Users must be able to distinguish between
different accounting policies in order to be able to compare similar items in the accounts of
different entities.
• When an entity changes an accounting policy, the change is applied retrospectively so that
the results from one period to the next can still be usefully compared.
• Comparability is not the same as uniformity. Accounting policies should be changed if the
change will result in information that is reliable and more relevant, or where the change is
required by an IFRS Standard.
HB2022
6 Financial Reporting (FR)
Verifiability: This helps assure users that information faithfully represents the economic
KEY
TERM phenomena it purports to represent. Verifiability means that different knowledgeable and
independent observers could reach consensus, although not necessarily complete agreement,
that a particular depiction is a faithful representation (Conceptual Framework: para. 2.30).
3.2.3 Timeliness
3.2.4 Understandability
Financial reports are prepared for users who have a reasonable knowledge of business and
economic activities and who review and analyse the information diligently (Conceptual
Framework: para. 2.36).
Asset: A present economic resource controlled by the entity as a result of past events
KEY
TERM (Conceptual Framework: para. 4.2).
An economic resource is a right that has the potential to produce economic benefits (Conceptual
Framework: para. 4.14).
HB2022
1: The Conceptual Framework 7
Liability: A present obligation of the entity to transfer an economic resource as a result of past
KEY
TERM events (Conceptual Framework: para. 4.2).
An essential characteristic of a liability is that the entity has an obligation. An obligation is ‘a duty
or responsibility that the entity has no practical ability to avoid’ (Conceptual Framework: para.
4.29).
Equity: The residual interest in the assets of an entity after deducting all its liabilities
KEY
TERM (Conceptual Framework: para. 4.2).
Income: Increases in assets, or decreases in liabilities, that result in increases in equity, other
KEY
TERM than those relating to contributions from equity participants (Conceptual Framework: para.
4.2).
Expenses: Decreases in assets, or increases in liabilities, that result in decreases in equity,
other than those relating to distributions to equity participants (Conceptual Framework: para.
4.2).
The Conceptual Framework describes financial reporting as providing information about financial
position and changes in financial position: assets and liabilities are defined first, and income and
expenses are defined as changes in assets and liabilities, rather than the other way around.
Consider the following situations and in each case determine whether an asset, liability or neither
exists as defined by the Conceptual Framework.
1 PAT Co purchased a licence for $20,000. The licence gives PAT Co sole use of a particular
manufacturing process which, in turn, will save them $3,000 a year for the next five years.
2 BAW Co gifted an individual, Don Brennan, $10,000 to set up a car repair shop. In return, BAW
Co has requested that priority treatment is given to the fleet of cars used by BAW Co’s
salesmen.
3 DOW Co operates a car dealership and provides a warranty with every car it sells. The
warranty guarantees that the cars will operate as expected for a period of 12 months from the
date of purchase.
HB2022
8 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
1: The Conceptual Framework 9
Activity 3: Recognition
Solution
6 Measurement
The Conceptual Framework specifically refers to two measurement bases:
• Historical cost
• Current value
It outlines the information provided by both, but stresses that the choice between them depends
on what information the primary users of the financial statements require.
HB2022
10 Financial Reporting (FR)
Historical cost: Historical cost for an asset is the cost that was incurred when the asset was
KEY
TERM acquired or created and, for a liability, is the value of the consideration received when the
liability was incurred.
Historical cost accounting (HCA) is the traditional form of accounting, modified in some instances
by revaluations of certain assets.
Fair value: The price that would be received to sell an asset, or paid to transfer a liability, in an
KEY
TERM orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date (Conceptual
Framework: para. 6.12 and IFRS 13: Appendix A).
HB2022
1: The Conceptual Framework 11
Value in use: The present value of the cash flows, or other economic benefits, that an entity
KEY
TERM expects to derive from the use of an asset and from its ultimate disposal (Conceptual
Framework: para. 6.17).
Value in use cannot be directly observed. It looks at the likely future value to the entity of using
the asset.
Value in use considers entity-specific factors, whereas fair value is market specific.
Fulfilment value: The present value of the cash, or other economic resources, that an entity
KEY
TERM expects to be obliged to transfer as it fulfils a liability (Conceptual Framework: para. 6.17).
Fulfilment value is based on the future cash flows an entity expects to incur to fulfil a liability. Like
value in use for an asset, fulfilment value cannot be directly observed and is entity specific.
Current cost of an asset: The current cost of an asset is the cost of an equivalent asset at the
KEY
TERM measurement date, comprising the consideration that would be paid at the measurement
date, plus the transaction costs that would be incurred at that date (Conceptual Framework:
para. 6.21).
Current cost of a liability: The current cost of a liability is the consideration that would be
received for an equivalent liability at the measurement date, minus the transaction costs that
would be incurred at that date (Conceptual Framework: para. 6.21).
Current cost differs from historical cost as current cost assesses the price to purchase at the
reporting date, rather than the date the asset was acquired or liability assumed.
Where the current cost cannot be obtained from information in the market, then the entity can
adjust for condition and age to buy a similar model.
HB2022
12 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 4: Measurement
Ergo Co acquired an item of plant on 1 July 20X5 at a cost of $250,000. Ergo Co depreciates its
plant at a rate of 20% on a reducing balance basis. As at 30 June 20X6, the manufacturer still
makes the same item of plant and its current price is $300,000.
Required
What is the correct carrying amount to be shown in the statement of financial position of Ergo Co
as at 30 June 20X6 under historical cost and current cost?
Historical cost: $200,000; Current cost: $300,000
Historical cost: $200,000; Current cost: $240,000
Historical cost: $250,000; Current cost: $300,000
Historical cost: $250,000; Current cost $240,000
You have been asked to show the effect of different measurement bases for the following asset:
An item of equipment was purchased on 1 January 20X3 for $140,000. The equipment is
depreciated at 25% per annum using the reducing balance method.
The equipment is still available and its list price at 31 December 20X4 is $180,000, although the
current model is 20% more efficient than the model the entity purchased in 20X3.
It is estimated that the equipment could be sold for $44,000, although the company would have
to spend about $500 in advertising costs to do so. The asset is expected to generate net cash
inflows of $20,000 for the next five years after which time it will be scrapped. The company’s cost
of borrowing is 6%. The cumulative present value of $1 in five years’ time is $4.212.
Required
1 What is carrying amount of the equipment in the statement of financial position as at 31
December 20X4 using historical cost?
$70,000
$78,750
$105,000
$140,000
2 What is the carrying amount of the equipment in the statement of financial position as at 31
December 20X4 using fair value?
$32,868
$43,500
$44,000
$44,500
3 What is the carrying amount of the equipment in the statement of financial position as at 31
December 20X4 using current cost?
$70,313
$75,000
$84,375
$101,250
HB2022
1: The Conceptual Framework 13
HB2022
14 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
1: The Conceptual Framework 15
HB2022
16 Financial Reporting (FR)
Historical cost
• Most common
• Measured at the transaction
date and not subsequently
updated
• Asset: Cost of acquisition/
creation of asset plus
transaction costs
• Liability: Value to incur/take on
the liability less transaction
costs
Current value
• Information is updated to
reflect changes in value at the
measurement date
• Fair value: Price that would be
received to sell an asset/paid
to transfer a liability in an
orderly transaction between
market participants at the
measurement date
• Value in use (assets)/fulfilment
value (liabilities)
– Value in use – present value
of the cash flows expected to
be derived from the asset
– Fulfilment value – present
value of the cash flows
expected to be obliged to
transfer to fulfil the liability
• Current cost: Cost of an
equivalent asset/consideration
that would be received for an
equivalent liability at the
measurement date
HB2022
1: The Conceptual Framework 17
6. Measurement
Using the historical cost basis is an objective and readily understood method, but overstates
profits and return on capital employed in times of inflation.
Using the current value basis attempts to solve this problem. Current value includes:
• Fair value
• Value in use/Fulfilment value
• Current cost
HB2022
18 Financial Reporting (FR)
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section A Q1
Section C Q23 Conceptual framework
Further reading
You should make time to read this article, which is available in the study support resources section
of the ACCA website:
Extreme makeover – IASB edition
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
1: The Conceptual Framework 19
Activity 3: Recognition
Recognition in the financial statements:
(1) First, it is necessary to consider whether the amounts spent on training should be recognised
as an asset or an expense. To be an asset, there must be:
- Present economic resource
- Control
- A past event
Whilst it is clear that there is a past event (the provision of training) and the training is a
resource that has the potential to produce economic benefits (the staff that will be able to do
a better job), the staff are not personally controlled by the company and thus the increased
capability to do their jobs is not under the control of the company.
(2) The issue here is whether the dividend should be recognised as a liability or not at the year
end. A liability exists only where three criteria are met at the year end:
- A present obligation
- (As a result of) a past event
- Expected to result in a transfer of economic resources.
A present obligation is one that exists at the year end. As the dividend payment has not been
communicated outside the company at the year end, there is no obligation for it to be paid:
the directors could change their mind as to how much or whether a dividend should be paid
without any consequences.
A present obligation does not therefore exist at the year end and no liability can be
recognised for proposed dividends. It is declaration of a dividend externally that creates an
obligation for it to be paid, and this has not happened at the year end. A liability would be
recognised from 10 February, even if the dividend has not been legally approved by
shareholders, as a constructive obligation is sufficient to generate a liability under IFRS
HB2022
20 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 4: Measurement
The correct answer is: Historical cost: $200,000; Current cost: $240,000
Historical cost: $250,000 × 80% = $200,000 carrying amount
Current cost: $300,000 × 80% = $240,000 carrying amount
Working
Historical cost carrying amount
Historical cost
$
1.1.X3 b/d 140,000
1.1.X3–31.12.X3 Dep’n @ 25% (35,000)
31.12.X3 Carrying amount 105,000
1.1.X4–31.12.X4 Dep’n @ 25% (26,250)
31.12.X4 Carrying amount 78,750
Working
Current cost carrying amount
Current cost
(restated)
$
150,000
1.1.X3 b/d (180,000 × 100%/120%)
1.1.X3-31.12.X3 Dep’n @ 25% (37,500)
31.12.X3 Carrying amount 112,500
1.1.X4-31.12.X4 Dep’n @ 25% (28,125)
31.12.X4 Carrying amount 84,375
HB2022
1: The Conceptual Framework 21
HB2022
22 Financial Reporting (FR)
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Explain why IFRS Standards on their own are not a complete A3(b)
regulatory framework.
Exam context
Building on your basic knowledge of the IFRS Standards introduced in your earlier studies, the FR
exam expands your knowledge of the standards and their application. It is important to
understand why we have IFRS Standards and to recognise the key aims of the IASB. This chapter
also looks at the impact of IFRS Standards worldwide and their interaction with local accounting
standards.
This is an area that is most likely to be tested as part of a Section A objective test question (OTQ).
However, it is important to understand the basis for setting IFRS Standards and the reasons for
making changes to IFRS Standards for your future studies at the Strategic Professional level.
HB2022
Chapter overview
The Regulatory Framework
Advantages
Disadvantages
Definition
Advantages
Disadvantages
HB2022
24 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
2: The regulatory framework 25
Tutorial Note
You must keep up to date with the IASB’s progress and the problems it encounters in the financial
press. You should also be able to discuss:
• Use and application of IFRS Standards
• Due process of the IASB
• The IASB’s relationship with other standard setters which looks at current and future work of
the IASB
• Criticisms of the IASB
HB2022
26 Financial Reporting (FR)
Solution
HB2022
2: The regulatory framework 27
4.5 Asia-Oceania
China, Japan and Australia are all significant economies with differing levels of convergence.
Australia requires the use of IFRS Standards for ‘reporting entities’ (mainly those entities which are
publicly traded). Japan permits, but does not require, the use of IFRS Standards alongside its
three other permitted reporting frameworks, with increasing adoption by Japanese companies
each year.
China’s national standards are substantially converged with IFRS Standards. However, the
implementation of IFRS Standards themselves has no current timetable. In 2015, the IASB and the
Chinese Ministry of Finance announced the formation of a joint working group for a possible
implementation of IFRS Standards within China.
Thailand is in the process of adopting IFRS Standards in full; Indonesia is in the process of
converging its national standards substantially with IFRS Standards; whereas India uses national
standards.
4.6 Africa
In 2021, 36 countries in Africa have adopted IFRS Standards for listed companies and other public
companies. These included the Republic of Congo, Senegal and Cameroon.
HB2022
28 Financial Reporting (FR)
The period of exposure for public comment is normally 120 days. However, in exceptional
circumstances, proposals may be issued with a comment period of no less than 30 days. Draft
IFRS Interpretations are exposed for a 60-day comment period (IFRS Foundation Due Process
Handbook: para. 6.7).
HB2022
2: The regulatory framework 29
Which of the following bodies is responsible for reviewing new financial reporting issues and
issuing guidance on the application of IFRS Standards?
The International Accounting Standards Board
The IFRS Foundation
The IFRS Interpretations Committee
The IFRS Advisory Council
6.2 Advantages
In favour of accounting standards (both national and international), the following points can be
made.
• They reduce, even eliminate, confusing variations in the methods used to prepare accounts.
• They provide a focal point for debate and discussions about accounting practice.
• They oblige companies to disclose the accounting policies used in the preparation of accounts.
• They are a less rigid alternative to enforcing conformity by means of legislation.
• They have obliged companies to disclose more accounting information than they would
otherwise have done if accounting standards did not exist. For example, IAS 33 Earnings per
Share.
6.3 Disadvantages
Many companies are reluctant to disclose information that is not required by national legislation,
with some arguing against standardisation and in favour of choice.
• One method of preparing accounts might be inappropriate in some circumstances.
• Standards may be subject to lobbying or government pressure (in the case of national
standards).
• Many national standards are not based on a conceptual framework of accounting, although
this is the basis for IFRS Standards.
• There may be a trend towards rigidity.
• There are also political problems, as any international body, whatever its purpose or activity,
faces difficulties in attempting to gain international consensus and the IASB is no exception to
this. It is complex for the IASB to reconcile the financial reporting situation between economies
as diverse as developing countries and sophisticated first-world industrial powers.
HB2022
30 Financial Reporting (FR)
Which of the following bodies provides strategic support and advice to the IFRS Foundation?
IFRS Advisory Council
IFRS Interpretations Committee
Global Preparers Forum
Accounting Standards Advisory Forum
PER alert
One of the competences you require to fulfil Performance Objective 7 of the PER is the ability
to prepare drafts or review primary financial statements in accordance with relevant
accounting standards and policies and legislation. The information in this chapter will give you
knowledge to help you demonstrate this competence.
HB2022
2: The regulatory framework 31
Disadvantages
• Practices may change leading to outdated principles
• Principles may be overly flexible
HB2022
32 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
2: The regulatory framework 33
3. IASB
The IASB issues and revises IFRS Standards and is an independent standard setter made up of
representatives from different global economies.
HB2022
34 Financial Reporting (FR)
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section C Q24 Regulators
Section C Q25(a) Standard setters
Further reading
IASB publishes its workplan and future projects, including details of current and proposed
changes. The website also looks at the IFRS Standards adoption process on a global basis.
www.ifrs.org
The IASB has significant information on its website about the ongoing consideration and adoption
of IFRS Standards on a global basis:
https://www.ifrs.org/use-around-the-world/
HB2022
2: The regulatory framework 35
HB2022
36 Financial Reporting (FR)
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Account for revaluation and disposal gains and losses for non- B1(d)
current assets.
Exam context
Property, plant and equipment is an important area of the Financial Reporting syllabus. You can
almost guarantee that in every exam you will be required to account for property, plant and
equipment at least once and it can feature as an OT Question in Section A or B, or as an
adjustment when preparing primary financial statements in Section C. This chapter builds on the
knowledge of IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment that you have already gained from your
earlier studies and also introduces IAS 23 Borrowing Costs and IAS 40 Investment Property.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Tangible non-current assets
Transfers
Disposals
Disclosure
HB2022
38 Financial Reporting (FR)
1.2 Definitions
1.3 Recognition
The recognition of property, plant and equipment depends on two criteria:
It is probable that future economic benefits The cost of the asset to the entity
and
associated with the asset will flow to the entity can be measured reliably
The degree of certainty attached to the flow It is generally easy to measure the cost of an
of future economic benefits must be assessed. asset as the transfer amount on purchase, ie
This should be based on the evidence what was paid for it.
available at the date of initial recognition Self-constructed assets can also be measured
(usually the date of purchase). easily by adding together the purchase price
of all the constituent parts (labour, material
etc) paid.
See Section 1.6 below
The recognition criteria applies to subsequent expenditure as well as costs incurred initially. There
are no separate criteria for recognising subsequent expenditure. For example, if a shop building is
extended to include a new café as a revenue source, then this meets the criteria of probable
future economic benefits, and so should be recognised as property, plant and equipment.
HB2022
3: Tangible non-current assets 39
The following costs will not be part of the cost of property, plant or equipment:
• The costs of opening a new facility
• The costs of introducing a new product or service
• The costs of conducting business in a new location or with a new class of customer
• Administration and other general overheads costs
(IAS 16: para. 19)
The recognition of costs in the carrying amount of PPE ceases when the item is in the location and
condition necessary for its use. Therefore, the costs incurred in using or redeploying PPE are not
capitalised. The following costs are therefore not included in the carrying amount of PPE:
• Costs incurred when an item capable of operating has not yet been brought into use or is
being used at less than full capacity
• Initial operating losses
• Costs of relocating or reorganising part of entity’s business
(IAS 16: para. 20)
Note that IAS 16 was amended in May 2020 to make it clear that if a company incurs costs of
testing whether an asset is functioning properly before it is brought into use, the costs of testing
may be capitalised as part of the cost of the PPE, but any proceeds earned by the company in
selling any items produced as a result of that testing should be accounted for in profit or loss.
HB2022
40 Financial Reporting (FR)
Carry the asset at its historic cost less Carry the asset at a revalued amount, being its fair
• depreciation and value at the date of the revaluation less
• any accumulated impairment loss • depreciation and
• any accumulated impairment loss
The IAS 16 makes clear that the revaluation model is
available only if the fair value of the item can be
measured reliably.
1.5.1 Depreciation
IAS 16 requires the depreciable amount of an asset to be allocated on a systematic basis to each
accounting period during the useful life of the asset. Every part of an item of property, plant and
equipment with a cost that is significant in relation to the total cost of the item must be
depreciated separately. (IAS 16: para. 44)
Activity 1: Depreciation
A lorry bought for Titan Co cost $17,000. It is expected to last for five years and then be sold for
scrap for $2,000. Usage over the five years is expected to be:
Year 5 40 days
Required
Calculate the depreciation to be charged each year under:
(1) The straight-line method
(2) The reducing balance method (using a rate of 35%)
(3) The machine hour method
Solution
HB2022
3: Tangible non-current assets 41
Chapter 3, Section 1 of the Essential reading provides more detailed revision on the important
definitions, recognition and measurement principles, basic revaluation, disposals and disclosure.
Chapter 3, Section 2 of the Essential reading provides revision of depreciation. It is essential that
you are comfortable with this material before continuing with this chapter.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
Binkie Co has a year end of 30 June 20X3. On 1 July 20X2, it purchased land at a cost of
$120,000 and incurred legal fees totalling $5,000 relating to the purchase. Due to a surge in land
prices in the year, the land has been independently assessed as having a fair value of $150,000
at 30 June 20X3.
Required
Calculate the revaluation surplus on the land at 30 June 20X3 and prepare the journal entry to
record the increase.
Solution
The difference between the initial measurement of the land on acquisition and the fair value at the
year end date is recorded in other comprehensive income and accumulated in a revaluation
surplus.
HB2022
42 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Land carrying amount (statement of financial
position) 25
CREDIT Other comprehensive income (revaluation
surplus) 25
Continuing the information from Illustration 1, Binkie Co has a year end of 30 June 20X6. There
has been a decline in the value of the land at 30 June 20X6.
Required
Account for the revaluation in the current year, assuming that:
1 The fair value at 30 June 20X6 is $130,000.
2 The fair value at 30 June 20X6 is $120,000.
Solution
1 The value of the land has decreased by $20,000 (from $150,000 at 30 June 20X3 to $130,000
at 30 June 20X6). The decrease in value is less than the amount accumulated in revaluation
surplus and therefore the amount can be debited to other comprehensive income (revaluation
surplus).
The double entry is:
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Other comprehensive income (revaluation surplus) 20
CREDIT Land carrying amount (statement of financial position) 20
HB2022
3: Tangible non-current assets 43
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Other comprehensive income (revaluation surplus) 25
DEBIT Expenses (statement of profit or loss) 5
CREDIT Land carrying amount (statement of financial position) 30
Depreciation for the year is Depreciation for the year is Two separate depreciation
based on the revalued amount. based on the cost or valuation calculations are required:
brought forward at the start of • Pro rata on the brought
the year. Depreciation for the forward cost or valuation to
year must be deducted in arrive at carrying amount at
arriving at the carrying the date of valuation
amount of the asset at the • Pro rata on the revalued
date of valuation. amount
HB2022
44 Financial Reporting (FR)
If this entry is not made the full $40,000 is transferred to retained earnings when the asset is
disposed of/retired.
Crinkle prepares its financial statements to 31 December each year. It bought an asset that had a
useful life of five years for $10,000 in January 20X6. On 1 January 20X8, the asset was revalued
to $12,000. The expected useful life has remained unchanged (ie three years remain). It is the
policy of Crinkle to make a reserve transfer for excess depreciation.
Required
Account for the revaluation and state the treatment for depreciation from 20X8 onwards.
Solution
HB2022
3: Tangible non-current assets 45
$
List price of machine 8,550
Trade discount (855)
Delivery costs 105
Set-up costs incurred internally 356
8,156
Notes.
1 The machine was purchased on 1 October 20X4 when it was expected to have a useful life of
12 years and a residual value of $2,000.
2 Xavier’s accounting policy is to charge a full year’s depreciation in the year of purchase and
no depreciation is the year of retirement or sale.
3 Xavier has a policy of keeping all equipment at revalued amounts. No revaluations had been
necessary until 30 September 20X8 when one of the major suppliers of such machines went
bankrupt, causing a rise in prices. A specific market value for Xavier’s machine was not
available, but an equivalent brand-new machine would now cost $15,200 (including relevant
disbursements). Xavier treats revaluation surpluses as being realised through use of the asset
and transfers them to retained earnings over the life of the asset. The remaining useful life and
residual value of the machine remained the same.
4 Xavier’s year end is 30 September.
Required
1 What is the carrying amount of plant and equipment at 30 September 20X5?
$7,200
$7,317
$7,643
$8,427
2 What is the carrying amount of the plant and equipment at 30 September 20X8?
$10,800
$11,900
$13,200
$15,200
3 Which TWO of the following statements are correct when revaluing property, plant and
equipment?
All property, plant and equipment should be revalued
The revaluation should take place every three to five years
The revalued asset continues to be depreciated
The asset should be revalued to fair value if available
HB2022
46 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Required
Calculate the depreciation for the year.
Solution
Depreciation at the end of the first year, in which 150 flights totalling 400 hours were made would
then be:
HB2022
3: Tangible non-current assets 47
Following Illustration Depreciation of assets with two or more significant parts above, an overhaul
of the aircraft was required at the end of year 3 and every third year thereafter at a cost of $1.2
million.
Required
Explain how the overhaul would be accounted for.
Solution
The cost of the overhaul would be capitalised as a separate component. $1.2 million would be
added to the cost and the depreciation (assuming 150 flights again) would therefore be:
$’000
Total as above 4,500
Overhaul ($1,200,000/3) 400
4,900
HB2022
48 Financial Reporting (FR)
2.1 Recognition
Consistent with the recognition criteria under IAS 16, IAS 40 requires that an investment property
is recognised when, and only when:
Carry the asset at its historic cost less • Investment property is measured at fair value
• Depreciation and at the end of the reporting period
• Any accumulated impairment loss • Any resulting gain or loss is included in profit
or loss for the period
• The investment property is not depreciated
HB2022
3: Tangible non-current assets 49
On 1 October 20X9 Propex has the following properties. It uses the fair value model to measure
investment property:
(1) Tennant House which cost $150,000 on 1 October 20X4. The property is freehold and is
rented to private individuals for six-monthly periods. The current fair value of the property is
$175,000.
(2) Stowe Place which cost $75,000. This is used by Propex as its headquarters. The building was
acquired on 1 October 20W9. The current fair value is $120,000.
Propex depreciates its buildings at 2% per annum on cost.
Required
What is the carrying amount of each property in the statement of financial position at 1 October
20X9?
Essential reading
Chapter 3, Section 3 of the Essential reading provides further detail on the fair value and cost
models for investment property.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
2.4 Transfers
Transfers to or from investment property should only be made when there is a change in use. For
example, owner occupation commences so the investment property will be treated under IAS 16 as
an owner-occupied property.
Consider the situation in which an investment property becomes owner-occupied on 1 July 20X6:
HB2022
50 Financial Reporting (FR)
Date of transfer
Determine FV
Kapital owns a building which it has been using as a head office. In order to reduce costs, on 30
June 20X9 it moved its head office functions to one of its production centres and is now letting out
its head office. Company policy is to use the fair value model for investment property.
The building had an original cost on 1 January 20X0 of $250,000 and was being depreciated over
50 years. At 30 June 20X9, its fair value was judged to be $350,000. At 31 December 20X9, its fair
value had fallen to $320,000.
Required
Explain how the building will be accounted for in the financial statements of Kapital Co at 31
December 20X9.
HB2022
3: Tangible non-current assets 51
2.5 Disposals
Derecognise (eliminate from the statement of financial position) an investment property on
disposal or when it is permanently withdrawn from use and no future economic benefits are
expected from its disposal.
Any gain or loss on disposal is the difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying
amount of the asset. It should generally be recognised as income or expense in profit or loss.
Compensation from third parties for investment property that was impaired, lost or given up shall
be recognised in profit or loss when the compensation becomes receivable (IAS 40: paras. 66–69).
HB2022
52 Financial Reporting (FR)
3.3.2 Suspension
Capitalisation is suspended during extended periods when development is interrupted. (IAS 23:
para. 20)
3.3.3 Cessation
Capitalisation ceases when substantially all the activities necessary to prepare the qualifying
asset for its intended use or sale are complete (IAS 23: para. 22).
The capitalisation of borrowing costs should be calculated pro-rata if the commencement or
cessation occurs within the period, or there has been a suspension within the period.
Essential reading
Chapter 3, Section 4 of the Essential reading provides more detail on the commencement,
suspension and cessation of capitalisation.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
On 1 January 20X6, Stremans Co borrowed $1.5 million to finance the production of two assets,
both of which were expected to take a year to build. Work started during 20X6. The loan facility
was drawn down and incurred on 1 January 20X6, and was utilised as follows, with the remaining
funds invested temporarily.
The loan rate was 9% and Stremans Co can invest surplus funds at 7%.
HB2022
3: Tangible non-current assets 53
Solution
Acruni Co had the following loans in place at the beginning and end of 20X6.
On 1 January 20X6, Acruni Co began construction of a qualifying asset, a piece of machinery for
a hydro-electric plant, using existing borrowings. Expenditure drawn down for the construction
was: $30 million on 1 January 20X6, $20 million on 1 October 20X6.
Required
Calculate the borrowing costs that can be capitalised for the hydro-electric plant machinery.
Solution
HB2022
54 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
56 Financial Reporting (FR)
Accounting treatment
• Borrowing costs relating to a qualifying
asset must be capitalised as part of the
cost of that asset
– A qualifying asset is one that
necessarily takes a long period of
time to be ready for its intended use
or sale
HB2022
3: Tangible non-current assets 57
HB2022
58 Financial Reporting (FR)
Question practice
You should attempt the following question from the Further question practice bank (available in
the digital edition of the Workbook):
Section A Q4
Section B Q22(a)
Section C Q27 Gains Co
Further reading
Property, plant and equipment – part 1: Measurement and depreciation
Property, plant and equipment – part 2: Revaluation and derecognition
Property, plant and equipment – part 3: Summary and detailed examples
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
3: Tangible non-current assets 59
Activity 1: Depreciation
Under the straight-line method, depreciation for each of the five years is:
Annual depreciation = $(17,000 – 2,000)/5 = $3,000
Under the reducing balance method, depreciation for each of the five years is:
Year Depreciation
1 35% × $17,000 $5,950
2 35% × ($17,000 – $5,950) = 35% × $11,050 $3,868
3 35% × ($11,050 – $3,868) = 35% × $7,182 $2,514
4 35% × ($7,182 – $2,514) = 35% × $4,668 $1,634
Balance to bring carrying amount down to $2,000 = $4,668 – $1,634 –
5 $2,000 $1,034
Under the machine hour method, depreciation for each of the five years is calculated as follows:
Total usage (days) = 200 + 100 + 100 + 150 + 40 = 590 days
Depreciation per day = $(17,000 – 2,000)/ 590 = $25.42
The depreciation for each of the next three years will be $12,000 / 3 = $4,000, compared to
depreciation on cost of $10,000 / 5 = $2,000. So each year, the extra $2,000 can be treated as
part of the surplus that has become realised (this can also be calculated by taking the revaluation
surplus of $6,000 over the remaining useful life of three years):
This is a movement on owners’ equity only and it will be shown in the statement of changes in
equity. It is not an item in profit or loss.
HB2022
60 Financial Reporting (FR)
Working
Property, plant and equipment
$
Cost (8,550 – 855 + 105 + 356) 8,156
Accumulated depreciation (8,156 – 2,000)/12 years (513)
7,643
Workings
1 Plant and equipment
$
Revalued amount (W) 10,800
Accumulated depreciation (0)
10,800
$
Gross replacement cost 15,200
Depreciation (15,200 – 2,000) × 4/12 (4,400)
Depreciated replacement cost 10,800
Workings
1 Revalued amount (depreciated replacement cost)
$
Gross replacement cost 15,200
Depreciation (15,200 – 2,000) × 4/12 (4,400)
Depreciated replacement cost 10,800
HB2022
3: Tangible non-current assets 61
$
Cost 8,156
Accumulated depreciation (8,156 – 2,000) × 4/12 (2,052)
6,104
5
5 $ 587
Working
Revaluation surplus
$
Depreciation on new revalued amount (10,800 – 2,000)/8-year remaining life 1,100
Depreciation on historic cost (6,014 – 2,000)/8 years (513)
Difference transferred to retained earnings each year 587
or $
Balance on revaluation surplus at 30.9.X8 (4,696/8 years) 587
$
Original cost 250,000
Depreciation 1.1.X0 – 1.1.X9 (250/50 × 9) (45,000)
Depreciation to 30.6.X9 (250/50 × 6/12) (2,500)
HB2022
62 Financial Reporting (FR)
After the date of transfer, the building is accounted for as an investment property and will be
subjected to a fair value exercise at each year end. At 31 December 20X9, the fair value has fallen
and the loss will be recognised in profit or loss.
$
Fair value at 30.6.X9 350,000
Fair value at 31.12.X9 320,000
Decrease in value (profit or loss) 30,000
The investment property is not depreciated under the fair value model.
HB2022
3: Tangible non-current assets 63
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Describe the criteria for the initial recognition and measurement B2(c)
of intangible assets.
Exam context
Intangible assets are increasingly important in modern business where the trend is away from
investment in property, plant and equipment and inventory and towards building businesses
around brands, data intelligence, software or workforce talent. IAS 38 considers how intangible
assets can be recognised and measured in an entity’s financial statements, although there is
some criticism as to whether the standard reflects the true value of modern businesses. In the
Financial Reporting exam, intangible assets could feature as an objective test question in Section
A or B, or as an adjustment in an accounts’ preparation question in Section C. The March/June
2021 hybrid exam included a case study (Section B) question which focused on intangible assets.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Intangible assets
Identifiable
Monetary assets
Revaluation model
Amortisation/Impairment Derecognition
Point of derecognition
Revaluation model
HB2022
66 Financial Reporting (FR)
1.1 Identifiable
An asset is identifiable if either:
Monetary assets: ‘Money held and assets to be received in fixed or determinable amounts of
KEY
TERM money.’ (IAS 38: para. 8)
• Cash and receivables are both examples of monetary assets and therefore do not meet the
definition of an intangible asset.
• Property, plant and equipment and inventories are examples of non-monetary assets.
However, they have physical substance and therefore also do not meet the definition of
intangible assets.
• Computer software, brands, licences and patents are all examples of intangible assets.
HB2022
4: Intangible assets 67
Chapter 4, Section 1 of the Essential reading discusses the recognition criteria in more detail. You
will find that it is generally consistent with that covered for tangible non-current assets in Chapter
3.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
Which THREE of the following are likely to meet the recognition criteria of IAS 38 Intangible Assets?
(Tick the correct answers.)
Expenditure of $300,000 on increasing the skills of staff
$250,000 acquiring a licence to operate in a new geographical location
$28,000 spend on advertising a new product which is expected to generate economic benefits
for the entity
$100,000 on computer software acquired from a supplier
A brand, valued at $500,000 acquired as part of the purchase of a new subsidiary
An internally developed brand name, estimated to be worth $100,000
HB2022
68 Financial Reporting (FR)
A business combination usually results in the need to prepare group accounts, as covered in
Chapters 7–10 of this Workbook.
3.2 Goodwill
Goodwill reflects an entity’s value over and above its recorded value in the financial statements.
It is often referred to as representing the reputation of a business.
There are two types of goodwill:
Research: ‘Original and planned investigation undertaken with the prospect of gaining new
KEY
TERM scientific or technical knowledge and understanding.’ (IAS 38: para. 8)
Development: ‘Application of research findings to a plan or design for the production of new or
substantially improved materials, products, processes, systems or services before the start of
commercial production or use.’ (IAS 38: para. 8)
Essential reading
You should be familiar with the research and development phases and the PIRATE criteria from
your previous studies. A recap has been included in Chapter 4, Section 2 of the Essential reading.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
4: Intangible assets 69
Research Development
'original and planned investigation 'application of research findings to a
undertaken with the prospect of plan or design for the production of
gaining new scientific or technical new or substantially improved
knowledge and understanding' materials, products, processes,
systems or services before the start of
commercial production or use'
NO YES
(IAS 8: para. 8)
HB2022
70 Financial Reporting (FR)
Apricot Co purchases an operating licence from an overseas supplier for $180,000 plus non-
refundable purchase taxes of $18,000. The supplier’s normal list price is $200,000 but it has
awarded Apricot Co a 10% trade discount. Apricot Co has to pay import duties on the purchase of
this licence of $20,000.
As part of the purchase process, Apricot Co seeks advice from a lawyer and incurs legal fees of
$15,000.
Required
Calculate the initial cost of the intangible asset that Apricot Co should recognise in relation to this
licence.
Solution
HB2022
4: Intangible assets 71
Dopper Co is developing a new production process. During 20X3, expenditure incurred was
$100,000, of which $90,000 was incurred before 1 December 20X3 and $10,000 between 1
December 20X3 and 31 December 20X3. Dopper Co can demonstrate that, at 1 December 20X3,
the production process met the criteria for recognition as an intangible asset. The recoverable
amount of the know-how embodied in the process is estimated to be $50,000.
Required
Explain how the expenditure should be treated in Dopper Co’s financial statements for the year
ended 31 December 20X3.
Solution
6 Subsequent measurement
After initial recognition, an intangible asset can either be measured using the cost or the
revaluation model.
HB2022
72 Financial Reporting (FR)
Active market: ‘A market in which transactions for the asset or liability take place with
KEY
TERM sufficient frequency and volume to provide pricing information on an ongoing basis.’ (IFRS 13:
Appendix A)
It is uncommon for an active market to exist for intangible assets, although this may happen for
some intangible assets, eg freely transferable taxi licences or nut production quotas.
The revaluation surplus may be amortised to retained earnings if the entity has a policy of making
such a reserves transfer.
7 Amortisation/impairment tests
An entity shall assess whether the useful life of an intangible asset is finite or indefinite. (IAS 38:
paras. 88, 97, 99-100, 104, 107-109)
HB2022
4: Intangible assets 73
Stauffer plc has a year end of 30 September 20X6. The following transactions occurred during the
year:
(1) The Stauffer brand has become well known and has developed a lot of customer loyalty since
the company was set up eight years ago. Recently, valuation consultants valued the brand
for sale purposes at $14.6 million. Stauffer’s directors are delighted and plan to recognise the
brand as an intangible asset in the financial statements. They plan to report the gain in the
revaluation surplus as they feel that crediting it to profit or loss would be imprudent.
(2) The company undertook an expensive, but successful, advertising campaign during the year
to promote a new product. The campaign cost $1 million, but the directors believe that the
extra sales generated by the campaign will be $3.6 million over its four-year expected useful
life.
(3) Stauffer owns a 30-year patent that it acquired on 1 April 20X4 for $8 million, which is being
amortised over its remaining useful life of 16 years from acquisition. The product sold is
performing much better than expected. Stauffer’s valuation consultants have valued its
current market price at $14 million.
(4) Stauffer has been developing a new piece of technology over the past 18 months. Costs
incurred and expensed in the year ended 30 September 20X5 were $1.6 million; further costs
of $0.4 million were incurred up to 31 December 20X5 when the project met the criteria for
capitalisation. Costs incurred after 1 January 20X6 were $0.9 million.
Required
1 In accordance with IAS 38, which of the following is the correct treatment of the brand?
Recognise an intangible asset of $14.6m with the gain to the profit or loss
Recognise an intangible asset of $14.6m with the gain to other comprehensive income
Recognise an intangible asset of $14.6m with the gain direct to the revaluation surplus
Do not recognise the brand
2 What is the carrying amount of the advertising campaign in the statement of financial
position at 30 September 20X9?
Nil
$750,000
$1,000,000
$3,600,000
3 Which TWO of the following are TRUE regarding revaluing intangibles?
Revaluations should be carried out with reference to an active market
Revaluations should take place every three to five years
All assets in the same class should be revalued
Active markets are very common for intangible assets
4 What is the carrying amount of the patent in the statement of financial position at 30
September 20X6?
$6.5m
$6.75m
$8m
$14m
5 What amount should be capitalised as an intangible asset for the development project?
$ million
HB2022
74 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Net disposal proceeds (proceeds less selling costs) X
Less: Carrying amount of intangible asset (X)
Gain/loss on derecognition (recognise in profit or loss) X/(X)
HB2022
4: Intangible assets 75
Monetary assets
• Money held
• Assets to be received in fixed/determinable
amounts of money
HB2022
76 Financial Reporting (FR)
Revaluation model
• Revalue to fair value by reference to an
active market
• Revalue all assets of that class unless no
active market
• Revalue sufficiently often that carrying amount
does not differ materially from fair value
• Increase in value: to OCI (unless reverses
previous revaluation loss in P/L)
• Decrease in value: (1) to OCI (2) to P/L
Amortisation/Impairment Derecognition
Revaluation model
Balance on revaluation surplus transferred to
retained earnings
HB2022
4: Intangible assets 77
1. Definitions
‘An intangible asset is an identifiable non-monetary asset without physical substance.’ (IAS 38:
para. 8)
5. Initial measurement
(a) Intangible assets separately acquired – purchase price plus directly attributable costs
(b) Intangible assets acquired as part of a business combination – at fair value (IFRS 13)
(c) Internally generated – at expenditure incurred after criteria satisfied plus directly attributable
costs
6. Subsequent measurement
Cost model or revaluation model: Revaluation model only permitted if an active market exists for
the asset, eg licences, quota.
7. Amortisation/impairment
If the intangible asset has a finite useful life, it should be amortised on a systematic basis across
that useful life.
8. Derecognition
Intangible asset should be derecognised on disposal or when no further benefits are expected. A
gain or loss on disposal should be calculated by comparing proceeds on disposal with the
carrying amount of the asset. Any revaluation surplus should be released to retained earnings.
HB2022
78 Financial Reporting (FR)
Question practice
You should attempt the following from the Further question practice (available in the digital
edition of the Workbook):
Section C Q28 Biogenics Co
Further reading
For further reading on the treatment of intangible assets, there are two useful technical articles
available on the ACCA website:
Intangible assets – can’t touch this
(available as an article and a podcast within Financial Reporting Technical Articles)
Reporting on intangibles is all a bit of a muddle
(available on the CPD area of the ACCA website)
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
4: Intangible assets 79
$
Purchase price:
Purchase price (net of trade discount) 180,000
Non-refundable purchase taxes 18,000
Import duties 20,000
HB2022
80 Financial Reporting (FR)
5 $ 0.9 million
All costs prior to the project meeting the criteria for capitalisation should be expensed through
the profit or loss.
HB2022
4: Intangible assets 81
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Exam context
It is important that assets are not carried in the financial statements at more than the value of the
benefits they are expected to generate. An impairment arises when the carrying amount of an
asset exceeds its value to an entity. Entities must consider whether there have been any internal
events or external factors that would indicate that the carrying amount of assets is too high.
Impairment is an important concept and applies mainly to non-current tangible and intangible
assets. It is frequently examined as an objective test question in Section A and B of the Financial
Reporting exam, and could be an adjustment you are required to make when preparing the
primary financial statements in Section C.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Impairment of assets
Minimum value
HB2022
84 Financial Reporting (FR)
1.2 Definitions
Impairment loss: The amount by which the carrying amount of an asset or a cash-generating
KEY
TERM unit exceeds its recoverable amount.
Carrying amount: The amount at which the asset is recognised after deducting accumulated
depreciation and any impairment losses in the statement of financial position.
Recoverable amount: The higher of the fair value less costs of disposal of an asset (or cash-
generating unit) and its value in use.
Cash-generating unit: The smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows
that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets.
Fair value less costs of disposal: The price that would be received to sell the asset in an
orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date (IFRS 13 Fair Value
Measurement), less the direct incremental costs attributable to the disposal of the asset.
Value in use of an asset: The present value of estimated future cash flows expected to be
derived from the use of an asset.
(IAS 36: para. 6)
Recoverable amount =
Higher of
Henry Co holds an item of machinery which it believes is impaired. The following information is
relevant:
• The fair value of the machinery is $10,000, the cost of selling is $500.
• The value in use of the machinery is estimated to be $9,000.
It is the company’s intention to continue to use the asset for the remainder of its useful life.
Required
Determine the recoverable amount of the machinery.
HB2022
5: Impairment of assets 85
Recoverable amount =
Higher of
Therefore, the recoverable amount is $9,500. Note that the company’s intention to continue to use
the asset is not a relevant factor.
Essential reading
Chapter 5, Section 1 of the Essential reading provides detail on measuring the recoverable amount
of an asset.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
Recoverable amount
An impairment loss is the amount by which the carrying amount of an asset or cash-generating
unit exceeds its recoverable amount.
Following on from Illustration 1, further information has been provided about the carrying amount
of the asset:
• The machinery is held at historical cost
• The carrying amount of the machinery is $10,500
Required
Using the recoverable amount determined in Illustration 1, calculate the impairment loss.
Solution
The carrying amount of the machinery must be compared to its recoverable amount.
The recoverable amount was determined in Illustration 1 as $9,500.
The carrying amount of the machinery is therefore greater than its recoverable amount, so the
machinery is impaired.
The impairment loss charged is: $10,500 – $9,500 = $1,000.
Section 4 of this chapter will consider how to account for the impairment.
HB2022
86 Financial Reporting (FR)
Minimart Co belongs to a retail store chain, Magnus Co. Minimart Co makes all its retail
purchases through Magnus Co’s purchasing centre. Pricing, marketing, advertising and human
resources policies (except for hiring Minimart Co’s cashiers and salesmen) are decided by Magnus
Co. Magnus Co also owns five other stores in the same city as Minimart Co (although in different
neighbourhoods) and 20 other stores in other cities. All stores are managed in the same way as
Minimart Co. Minimart Co and four other stores were purchased five years ago and goodwill was
recognised.
Required
What is the cash-generating unit for Magnus Co?
HB2022
5: Impairment of assets 87
Brix Co owns a building which it uses as its offices, warehouse and garage. The land is carried as
a separate non-current tangible asset in the statement of financial position.
Brix Co has a policy of regularly revaluing its non-current tangible assets. The original cost of the
building in October 20X2 was $1,000,000; it was assumed to have a remaining useful life of 20
years at that date, with no residual value. The building was revalued on 30 September 20X4 by a
professional valuer at $1,800,000. Brix Co does not make transfers between revaluation surplus
and retained earnings. The economic climate had deteriorated during 20X5, causing Brix Co to
HB2022
88 Financial Reporting (FR)
$m
Building 30
Plant and equipment 6
Goodwill 10
Current assets 20
66
Following a recession, an impairment review has estimated the recoverable amount of the cash-
generating unit to be $50 million.
Required
Allocate the impairment loss to the assets in the CGU.
Solution
There is an impairment of $16 million as the recoverable amount of $50 million is less than the
carrying amount of $66 million.
$10 million of the impairment is allocated to goodwill. The remaining $6 million will be allocated to
the other non-current assets on a pro-rata basis based on their carrying amounts.
• Impairment allocated to building is 30/36 × $6 million
• Impairment allocated to plant and equipment is 6/36 × $6 million
HB2022
5: Impairment of assets 89
On 31 December 20X1, Invest Co purchased all the shares of Mash Co for $2 million. The net fair
value of the identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed of Mash Co at that date was $1.8
million. Mash Co made a loss in the year ended 31 December 20X2 and at 31 December 20X2, the
net assets of Mash Co – based on fair values at 1 January 20X2 – were as follows:
$’000
Property, plant and equipment 1,300
Development expenditure 200
Net current assets 250
1,750
An impairment review on 31 December 20X2 indicated that the recoverable amount of Mash Co at
that date was $1.5 million. The capitalised development expenditure has no ascertainable external
market value and the current fair value less costs of disposal of the property, plant and
equipment is $1,120,000. Value in use could not be determined separately for these two items.
Required
Calculate the impairment loss that would arise in the consolidated financial statements of Invest
as a result of the impairment review of Mash Co at 31 December 20X2 and show how the
impairment loss would be allocated.
HB2022
90 Financial Reporting (FR)
Goodwill
Development expenditure
HB2022
5: Impairment of assets 91
5.2.3 Goodwill
An exception to the rule above is for goodwill. An impairment loss for goodwill should not be
reversed in a subsequent period. (IAS 36: para. 124)
A head office building with a carrying amount of $140 million is estimated to have a recoverable
amount of $90 million due to falling property values in the area. An impairment loss of $50 million
is recognised.
After three years, property prices in the area have risen, and the recoverable amount of the
building increases to $120 million. The carrying amount of the building, had the impairment not
occurred, would have been $110 million.
Required
Calculate the reversal of the impairment loss.
Solution
Essential reading
Chapter 5, Section 2 of the Essential reading contains two further activities to allow you to
practise calculating impairment loss for an individual asset and a CGU.
HB2022
92 Financial Reporting (FR)
PER alert
One of the competences you require to fulfil Performance Objective 6 of the PER is the ability
to record and process transactions and events, using the right accounting treatments for
those transactions and events. The treatment of impairment losses for both assets and cash-
generating units is one that is non-routine, but increasingly important in the current economic
climate. The information in this chapter will give you knowledge to help you demonstrate this
competence.
HB2022
5: Impairment of assets 93
HB2022
94 Financial Reporting (FR)
1. Principle of impairment
Assets should not be measured at more than their value to an entity. An asset’s recoverable
amount is the higher of value in use (net cash flows) and fair value less costs of disposal.
Impairment losses occur where the carrying amount of an asset is above its recoverable amount.
2. Impairment indicators
An entity must do an impairment test when there are impairment indicators. These can be
internal, such as physical damage to an asset or external, such as significant technological
advances.
HB2022
5: Impairment of assets 95
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank available in the digital edition of the
workbook:
Section A Q6
Section B Q22
Section C Q29 Multiplex Co
HB2022
96 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Carrying amount at 1 October 20X2 1,000,000
Accumulated depreciation 20X2 to 20X4
(1,000,000 × 2/20 years) (100,000)
$
Valuation at 30 September 20X4 1,800,000
Depreciation 20X5 (1,800,000/18 years) (100,000)
Carrying amount 1,700,000
Recoverable amount at 30 September 20X5 1,500,000
Impairment loss 200,000
HB2022
5: Impairment of assets 97
Workings
1 Impairment loss
$’000
Carrying amount 1,950
Recoverable amount 1,500
Impairment loss 450
Carrying
amount if Actual
Initial Impairment fully loss Impaired
value pro-rated allocated Reallocation allocated value
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
PPE (250 ×
1,300/
1,500) 1,300 217 1,083 (37) 180 1,120
Dev. exp
(250 ×
200/
1,500) 200 33 167 37 70 130
The amount not allocated to the PPE because the assets cannot be taken below their
recoverable amount is allocated to other remaining assets pro-rata, in this case all against the
development expenditure.
Hence the development expenditure is reduced by a further $37,000 (217,000 – 180,000),
making the total impairment $70,000 (33,000 + 37,000).
HB2022
98 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
5: Impairment of assets 99
Chapter overview
cess skills
Exam suc
Answer planning
c FR skills C
n Specifi o
tio
rr req
a
ec ui
of
m
t i rem
or
nt
inf
erp ents
ng
Approach to Application
reta
agi
tion
Spreadsheet Interpretation
l y si s
Go od
skills skills
ana
ti m
Approach
c al
em
to Case
e ri
OTQs
an
um
ag
tn
em
en
en
t ci
Effi
Effective writing
and presentation
Introduction
Sections A and B of the FR exam consist of objective test (OT) questions.
The OT questions in Section A are single, short questions that are auto-marked and worth two
marks each. You must answer the whole question correctly to earn the two marks. There are no
partial marks.
The OT questions in Section A aim for a broad coverage of the syllabus, and so all areas of the
syllabus need to be carefully studied. You need to work through as many practice OT questions as
possible, reviewing the answers carefully to understand how the correct answers are derived.
The OT questions in Section B are a series of short questions that relate to a common scenario, or
case. Section B questions are also auto-marked and must be answered correctly to gain the
credit. There are no partial marks.
The types of OT question and approach to answering the questions is the same in both Section A
and Section B.
HB2022
Multiple response These are a kind of multiple choice question, except you need to select
(MRQ) more than one answer from a number of given options. The question will
specify how many answers need to be selected, but the system won’t
stop you from selecting more answers than this. It is important to read
the requirement carefully.
Fill in the blank (FIB) This question type requires you to type a numerical answer into a box.
The unit of measurement (eg $) will sit outside the box, and if there are
specific rounding requirements these will be displayed.
Pull down list This question type requires you to select one answer from a pull down
list. Some of these questions may contain more than one pull down list
and an answer has to be selected from each one.
Hot spot For hot spot questions, you are required to select one point on an image
as your answer. When the cursor is hovered over the image, it will
display as an ‘X’. To answer, place the X on the appropriate point on the
diagram.
Hot area These are like hot spot questions, but instead of selecting a specific
point you are required to select one or more areas in an image.
HB2022
102 Financial Reporting (FR)
STEP 4: Apply your technical knowledge to the data presented in the question.
Work through calculations taking your time and read through each answer option
with care. OT questions are designed so that each answer option is plausible. Work
through each response option and eliminate those you know are incorrect
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 1: Approach to objective test (OT) questions 103
3. Lichen Ltd owns a machine that has a carrying amount of $85,000 at the year end of 31
March 20X9. The market value of the machine at 31 March 20X9 is $78,000 and costs of disposal
are estimated at $2,500. Lichen Ltd has calculated that the value in use of the asset is $77,000.
Note. This is a fill in the blank (FIB) question. This is testing your knowledge of impairment and a
calculation of the loss to be recognised on the machine.
What is the impairment loss on the machine to be recognised in the financial statements at 31
March 20X9? (provide you answer to the nearest $000)
$_______’000
(2 marks)
$m
Total contract price 12
Costs incurred to date 4
Amounts invoiced to date 4
Certified as complete by surveyor 40%
HB2022
104 Financial Reporting (FR)
(2 marks)
5. On 1 September 20X7, Jack Co entered into a contract for the right to use a machine for a
period of five years from that date. The contract meets the definition of a lease under IFRS 16
Leases. The machinery has a useful life of eight years. Jack Co incurred costs of $4,000 to
arrange the lease. Under the terms of the lease, Jack Co was required to pay $100,000 on
commencement of the lease followed by five annual payments of $200,000 commencing 31
August 20X8. The present value of the future lease payments has been correctly calculated as
$790,000 on the commencement date. The rate of interest implicit in the lease is 8.4%.
Using the pull down list provided, what should be the carrying amount of the machine following
at 31 August 20X8?
Note. This is a pull down list question, it is very similar to an MCQ except the selection is taken
from a list.
Pull down list
$894,000
$715,200
$656,360
$782,250
STEP 1 Answer the questions you know first.
If you’re having difficulty answering a question, move on and come back to tackle it once you’ve answered
all the questions you know. It is often quicker to answer discursive style OT questions first, leaving more time
for calculations.
Questions 1 and 2 are discursive style questions. It would make sense to answer these questions
first as it is likely that you will be able to complete them comfortably within the 3.6 minutes per
question allocated to them. Any time saved could then be spent on the more complex calculations
required to answer Questions 3, 4 and 5.
STEP 2 Answer all questions.
There is no penalty for an incorrect answer in ACCA exams, there is nothing to be gained by leaving an OT
question unanswered. If you are stuck on a question, as a last resort, it is worth selecting the option you
consider most likely to be correct and moving on. Use your scratch pad or the ‘flag for review’ option within
the exam software to make a note of the question, so if you have time after you have answered the rest of
the questions, you can revisit it.
Of the questions here, you could have a guess for four out of five questions as there are
alternative answers given. With an MCQ or pull down list question, you have a 25% chance of
getting the question correct so don’t leave any unanswered. It is obviously more difficult to get a
fill in the blank question (like Question 3) correct by guessing.
STEP 3 Read the requirement first!
The requirement will be stated in bold text in the exam. Identify what you are being asked to do, any
technical knowledge required and what type of OT question you are dealing with. Look for key words in the
requirement such as “Which TWO of the following” and “ Which of the following is NOT” etc.
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 1: Approach to objective test (OT) questions 105
Question 1
HB2022
106 Financial Reporting (FR)
You should start by pulling out the key data from the
question:
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 1: Approach to objective test (OT) questions 107
Working
$
Revenue recognised ($12m × 40%) 4.8
Amounts invoiced (4.0)
Contract asset 0.8
HB2022
108 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Present value of future lease payments 790,000
Direct costs 4,000
Payments made on commencement of lease 100,000
894,000
$
Initial measurement of right of use asset 894,000
Depreciation (over 5 years) (178,800)
Carrying amount at 31 August 20X8 715,200
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 1: Approach to objective test (OT) questions 109
Most important action points to apply to your next question – Read the scenario and
requirement carefully.
Summary
60% of the FR exam consist of OT questions. Key skills to focus on throughout your studies will
therefore include:
• Always read the requirements first to identify what you are being asked to do and what type of
OT question you are dealing with.
• Actively read the scenario highlighting key data needed to answer each requirement.
• Answer OT questions in a sensible order dealing with any easier discursive style questions first.
HB2022
110 Financial Reporting (FR)
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Explain and apply the criteria for recognising revenue generated B10(b)
from contracts where performance obligations are satisfied over
time or at a point in time
Explain and apply the criteria for the recognition of contract costs B10(d)
Exam context
Revenue is usually the single largest figure in a statement of profit or loss, so it is important that it
is recognised in the financial statements at the correct point in time and is measured correctly.
Understanding the rules of revenue recognition using IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with
Customers, is vital in your Financial Reporting studies, as it can be examined across all parts of
the exam.
HB2022
HB2022
112 Financial Reporting (FR)
Chapter overview
Revenue and government grants
Repayment of grants
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 113
Income
Revenue does not include sales taxes, value added taxes or goods and service taxes which are
only collected for third parties, because these do not represent an economic benefit flowing to the
entity.
Contract: An agreement between two or more parties that creates enforceable rights and
KEY
TERM obligations.
Performance obligation: A promise in a contract with a customer to transfer to the customer
either:
(a) A good or service (or a bundle of goods or services) that is distinct; or
(b) A series of distinct goods or services that are substantially the same ad that have the
same pattern of transfer to the customer.
Transaction price: The amount of consideration to which an entity expects to be entitled in
exchange for transferring promised goods or services to a customer, excluding amounts
collected on behalf of third parties.
(IFRS 15: Appendix A)
HB2022
114 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 115
Office Solutions Co, a limited company, has developed a communications software package
called CommSoft. Office Solutions Co has entered into a contract with Logisticity Co to supply
the following:
(1) Licence to use Commsoft
(2) Installation service; this may require an upgrade to the computer operating system, but the
software package does not need to be customised
(3) Technical support for three years
(4) Three years of updates for Commsoft
Office Solutions Co is not the only company able to install CommSoft, and the technical support
can also be provided by other companies. The software can function without the updates and
technical support.
Required
Explain whether the goods or services provided to Logisticity Co are distinct in accordance with
IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
Solution
HB2022
116 Financial Reporting (FR)
Cod Co sold goods to Eel Co on 1 January 20X2 for $200,000, payable on 31 December 20X3. Eel
Co cannot return the goods.
The relevant discount rate is 6%.
Required
What amount of revenue and finance income should be recognised in Cod Co’s statement of
profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X2?
Solution
Revenue is measured based on the $200,000 payable by Eel Co on 31 December 20X3 as
discounted to its present value at 1 January 20X2.
Revenue = $200,000 × 0.890 (2 year 6% discount rate) = $178,000
Finance income in 20X2 = $178,000 × 6% = $10,680
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 117
Taplop Co supplies laptop computers to large businesses. On 1 July 20X5, Taplop Co entered into
a contract with TrillCo, under which TrillCo was to purchase laptops at $500 per unit. The
contract states that if TrillCo purchases more than 500 laptops in a year, the price per unit is
reduced retrospectively to $450 per unit. Taplop’s year end is 30 June.
(1) As at 30 September 20X5, TrillCo had bought 70 laptops from Taplop. Taplop Co therefore
estimated that TrillCo’s purchases would not exceed 500 in the year to 30 June 20X6, and
TrillCo would therefore not be entitled to the volume discount.
(2) During the quarter ended 31 December 20X5, TrillCo expanded rapidly as a result of a
substantial acquisition and purchased an additional 250 laptops from Taplop Co. Taplop Co
then estimated that TrillCo’s purchases would exceed the threshold for the volume discount in
the year to 30 June 20X6.
Required
Calculate the revenue Taplop Co would recognise in:
1 Quarter ended 30 September 20X5
2 Quarter ended 31 December 20X5
Solution
HB2022
118 Financial Reporting (FR)
A mobile phone company, Deltawave Co, sells mobile phone handsets to customers including two
years’ network services for $980. The phones are sold separately for $600 and the network
services-only contract costs $20 per month.
Required
Calculate the amount of revenue to be recognised in each year of the contract.
Solution
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 119
HB2022
120 Financial Reporting (FR)
Contract asset: A contract asset is recognised when revenue has been earned but not yet
KEY
TERM invoiced (revenue that has been invoiced is a receivable).
Contract liability: A customer has paid prior to the entity transferring control of the good or
KEY
TERM service to the customer.
This is calculated as above. However, if the answer is a net amount due to the customer, then this
is included as a contract liability. The amount of revenue the entity is entitled to corresponds to
the amount of performance complete to date.
James Co entered into a contract to build an office building for a customer commencing on 1
January 20X5, with an estimated completion date of 31 December 20X6. Control of the asset is
passed to the customer as construction takes place and James Co does not have an alternative
use for the asset. Satisfaction of performance obligations is measured by reference to work
completed to date. In the first year, to 31 December 20X5:
(1) Certificates of work completed have been issued, to the value of $750,000.
(2) The final contract price is $1,500,000.
(3) Amounts invoiced to the customer as at 31 December 20X5 is $625,000.
(4) No payments had been received in respect of the receivable at year end.
Required
What is the amount of revenue recognised in the financial statements of James Co at 31
December 20X5, and what entries would be made for the contract on the statement of financial
position at 31 December 20X5?
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 121
Build Co entered into a three-year contract to build a sports stadium. The customer takes control
of the stadium as construction takes place and Build Co has no alternative view for the stadium.
Details of the contract activity at 31 December 20X1, 20X2 and 20X3 are as follows:
HB2022
122 Financial Reporting (FR)
Principal v agent
Principal Agent
Indicators that an entity controls the goods or services before transfer and therefore is classified
as a principal include (IFRS 15: para. B37):
(a) The entity is primarily responsible for fulfilling the promise to provide the specified good or
service;
(b) The entity has inventory risk; and
(c) The entity has discretion in establishing the price for the specified good or service.
TicketsRUS Co, a ticket agency, sells tickets to a theatre show for $100. TicketsRUS Co is entitled
to a commission of 5% of the ticket price and passes the remainder to the theatre. The tickets are
non-refundable and there is no sales tax.
Required
Calculate the revenue to be recognised for the current financial period.
Solution
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 123
Austria Co enters into a contract with a customer (Belgium Co) for the sale of a tangible asset on 1
January 20X7 for $1 million. The contract includes a call option that gives Austria Co the right to
repurchase the asset for $1.1 million on or before 31 December 20X7.
Required
Explain how A should account for the right to repurchase the asset.
Solution
The existence of the call option means that Belgium Co does not obtain control of the asset, as
Belgium Co is limited in its ability to use and obtain benefit from the asset.
As control has not been transferred, Austria Co accounts for the transaction as a financing
arrangement, because the exercise price is above the original selling price. Austria Co continues
to recognise the asset and recognises the cash received as a financial liability. The difference of
$0.1 million is recognised as interest expense.
If on 31 December 20X7 the option lapses unexercised, Belgium Co now obtains control of the
asset. Austria Co will derecognise the asset and recognise revenue of $1.1 million (the $1 million
already received plus the $0.1 million charged to interest).
HB2022
124 Financial Reporting (FR)
Aberdeen Co enters into a contract with a customer (Brighton Co) for the sale of a tangible asset
on 1 January 20X7 for $1 million. The contract includes a put option that obliges Aberdeen Co to
repurchase the asset at Brighton Co’s request for $900,000 on or before 31 December 20X7, at
which time the market value is expected to be $750,000.
Required
Explain how Aberdeen Co should account for the obligation to repurchase the asset.
Solution
In this case Brighton Co has a significant economic incentive to exercise the put option because
the repurchase price exceeds the market value at the repurchase date. This means that control
does not pass to Brighton Co. Since Brighton Co will be exercising the put option, this limits its
ability to use or obtain benefit from the asset.
In this situation Aberdeen Co accounts for the transaction as a lease in accordance with IFRS 16.
The asset has been leased to the customer for the period up to the repurchase and the difference
of $100,000 will be accounted for as payments received under an operating lease.
Quirky Co is an online clothing retailer. Customers are entitled to return items within 28 days of
purchase for a full refund if they do not fit or are otherwise not suitable. In the last week of
December 20X8, Quirky Co sold 200 dresses for $400 each. The dresses cost $250 each. Quirky
Co has an expected average level of returns of 25%. None of the dresses sold in the final week of
December 20X8 have been returned by the end of the month.
Required
What are the accounting entries required to record the sale of the dresses in Quirky Co’s financial
statements for the year ended 31 December 20X8?
Solution
Quirky receives cash of $80,000 (200 dresses × $400).
Quirky should recognise revenue only in respect of the 75% of dresses not expected to be
returned: 200 dresses × 75% × $400 = $60,000.
Quirky should recognise a refund liability for the 25% of dresses expected to be returned: 200
dresses× 25% × $400 = $20,000.
The journal entry to record the sale with the right of return is:
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 125
The 200 dresses sold had a purchase cost of $50,000 (200 dresses × $250). This amount will be
included in purchases, within cost of sales. As none of these 200 dresses are held at the year end,
none of them will be included in closing inventory. Therefore, the total amount in cost of sales
relating to the dresses is an expense of $50,000.
However, no revenue has been recognised in relation to 25% of the dresses. Therefore, the
purchase expense in relation to the dresses that are expected to be returned that is included
within cost of sales needs to be reversed and an asset should be recognised for the right to
recover the dresses: 200 dresses × 25% × $250 = $12,500.
$ $
DR Asset for right to recover dresses 12,500
CR Cost of sales 12,500
This leaves a correct expense within cost of sales for the 75% of the dresses which are not
expected to be returned: 200 dresses × 75% × $250 = $37,500 which matches against the revenue
to be recognised. This can also be calculated as total purchases of $50,000 less cost of dresses
expected to be returned of $12,500.
A wholesaler sells goods to a retailer for $42,000 on credit on 31 December 20X1. The goods were
transferred to the retailer on that date and the wholesaler recognised revenue and derecognised
inventory immediately. The wholesaler sells to the retailer at a mark-up of 20% on cost.
The wholesaler retains control over the goods until they are sold to the final customer. The retailer
does not need to pay the wholesaler for the goods until they are sold to the final customer and
can return any unsold goods for a refund. No goods were sold to the final customer on 31
December 20X1.
Required
What are the adjustments needed to correct the wholesaler’s financial statements for the year
ended 31 December 20X1?
HB2022
126 Financial Reporting (FR)
9.6 Warranties
Products are often sold with a warranty. IFRS 15 identifies three types of warranty and explains
the required accounting treatment for each:
In assessing whether the warranty is an additional warranty that provides an additional service
beyond the assurance that the product will function as intended, the entity should consider
factors such as:
(a) Whether the warranty is required by law (if so, it is likely to be a standard warranty);
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 127
Illustration 5: Warranties
Lavender Co sells a machine to a customer on credit for $392,000. The sales contract includes a
standard warranty that provides assurance that the machine complies with agreed-upon
specifications and will operate as promised for one year from the date of purchase. The sales
contract also includes an additional warranty that provides the customer with the right to an
annual service of the machine for four years from the date of purchase. An annual service is
usually charged at $2,000 per annum. However, as this customer represents new business, the
servicing is offered at no additional cost to the customer. Therefore, the provision of servicing is
not reflected in the $392,000 transaction price, which is the normal standalone selling price of the
machine.
Required
Explain how the two warranties and the sale of the machine should be accounted for (ignore the
effect of any discounting).
Solution
Standard warranty
The warranty that provides assurance that the machine complies with agreed-upon specifications
and will operate as promised one year from the date of purchase is a standard warranty at no
cost to the customer.
Therefore, it should be accounted for in accordance with IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities
and Contingent Assets. This will be explained in further detail in Chapter 14.
Additional warranty
The additional warranty is provided at no cost to the customer and provides an additional service
(four years of servicing) beyond assurance that the machine will function as intended per the
agreed-upon specifications.
This additional warranty should be treated as a separate performance obligation and revenue will
not be recognised until the performance obligation is satisfied, which will be when the annual
services are performed.
Sale of the machine
The transaction price of $392,000 should be allocated to the two performance obligations in
accordance with their standalone selling prices:
Revenue of $384,160 from the sale of the machine will be recognised when control of the machine
is transferred to the customer which is likely to be on delivery. Revenue from the servicing will be
recognised when each annual service is performed.
HB2022
128 Financial Reporting (FR)
Pootle Co received a government grant of $60,000 on 1 September 20X4. The conditions of the
grant state that Pootle Co must employ a local worker on a full-time contract over a five-year
period. The local worker commenced employment on 1 September 20X4 and Pootle Co expects to
meet the conditions of the grant.
The full grant has been recorded as other income for the year ended 31 December 20X4.
Required
What is the adjustment required to correctly account for the grant at 31 December 20X4?
Solution
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 129
Government grants relating to assets are presented in the statement of financial position either:
(a) As deferred income (Dr Cash, Cr Deferred income), this is then released to the profit or loss
account over the useful life of the asset (effectively over the same period as the asset is being
depreciated); or
(b) By deducting the grant in calculating the carrying amount of the asset.
Grant conditions
In the case of grants for non-depreciable assets, certain obligations may need to be fulfilled, in
which case the grant should be recognised as income over the periods in which the cost of
meeting the obligation is incurred. For example, if a piece of land is granted on condition that a
building is erected on it, then the grant should be recognised as income over the useful life of the
building.
There may be a series of conditions attached to a grant, in the nature of a package of financial
aid. An entity must take care to identify precisely those conditions which give rise to costs that in
turn determine the periods over which the grant will be earned. When appropriate, the grant may
be split and the parts allocated on different bases.
Maddoc purchased a new item of plant for $800,000 on 1 January 20X2, and expected to use it
for five years with a zero residual value. The Government awarded Maddoc a grant of $300,000
towards the cost of the plant on the same date.
Maddoc treated the grant as deferred income and has a 30 June year end.
Required
How much is recognised in non-current liabilities in respect of the grant as at 30 June 20X2?
$60,000
$30,000
$210,000
$270,000
Essential reading
There are a number of additional activities to apply your knowledge obtained in this chapter,
which are in addition to the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of the
Workbook) and the Practice and Revision Kit. Please see Chapter 6 of the Essential reading.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
130 Financial Reporting (FR)
Revenue is income arising in the course of an entity’s Revenue is recognised when there is transfer of
ordinary activities (IFRS 15: Appendix A) control to the customer from the entity supplying the
goods or services
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 131
• A contract includes a promise to transfer Grants are not recognised until there is
goods or services to a customer reasonable assurance that the conditions will
• This is the performance obligation within the be complied with and the grants will be received
contract
• An entity must be able to reasonably measure
the outcome of a performance obligation Grants relating to income
before the revenue can be recognised Grants relating to income are shown in profit or
loss either separately or as part of 'other
income' or alternatively deducted from the
Performance obligations satisfied over time related expense
• An entity may transfer a good or service over
time with the revenue being recognised over
time Grants relating to assets
• A performance obligation is satisfied when Government grants relating to assets are
the entity transfers a promised good or presented in the statement of financial position
service (ie an asset) to a customer either:
↓ • As deferred income; or
• An asset is considered transferred when (or • By deducting the grant in calculating the
as) the customer obtains control of that asset carrying amount of the asset
↓ • Any deferred credit is amortised to profit or
• Control of an asset refers to the ability to loss over the asset's useful life
direct the use of, and obtain substantially all
of the remaining benefits from, the asset
Repayment of grants
• A government grant that becomes repayable
Methods of measuring performance is accounted for as a change in accounting
• Output methods estimate in accordance with IAS 8 Accounting
– Units produced Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates
– Survey of completion to date and Errors
• Input methods • Repayment of grants relating to income are
– Resources consumed applied first against any unamortised
– Costs incurred deferred credit and then in profit or loss
• A contract asset is recognised when revenue • Repayments of grants relating to assets are
has been earned but not yet invoiced (revenue recorded by increasing the carrying amount
that has been invoiced is a receivable) of the asset or reducing the deferred income
• A contract liability is recognised when a balance
customer has paid prior to the entity • Any resultant cumulative extra depreciation is
transferring control of the good or service to recognised in profit or loss immediately
the customer
HB2022
132 Financial Reporting (FR)
1. Revenue recognition
• Revenue is recognised when there is a transfer of control to the customer from the entity
supplying the goods or services.
• Five step model for recognition:
Step 1 Identify the contract with the customer
Step 2 Identify the separate performance obligations
Step 3 Determine the transaction price
Step 4 Allocate the transaction price to the performance obligations
Step 5 Recognise revenue when a performance obligation is satisfied
• Where the outcome cannot be estimated reliably, revenue is only recognised to the extent of
expenses recognised that are recoverable, ie no profit is recognised until the outcome can be
estimated reliably.
• Where performance obligations are satisfied over time, for example with a construction
contract, revenue and costs are recognised by reference to the stage of completion of the
construction contract where its outcome can be estimated reliably. However, any expected
losses are recognised immediately on the grounds of prudence.
• Where the outcome cannot be estimated reliably, revenue is recognised only to the extent of
contract costs incurred that are recoverable, consistent with the treatment of service revenue.
2. Government grants
• An entity should not recognise grant income unless:
(i) The conditions attached to the grant will be complied with; and
(ii) The entity will receive the money
• Grants relating to income are shown in profit or loss either separately or as part of ‘other
income’ or alternatively deducted from the related expense
• Government grants relating to assets are presented in the statement of financial position
either:
(i) As deferred income; or
(ii) By deducting the grant in calculating the carrying amount of the asset.
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 133
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section C Q42 Jenson Co
Section C Q43 Trontacc Co
Further reading
There are articles on the ACCA website, written by the Financial Reporting examining team, which
are relevant to the topics studied in this chapter and which you should read:
Revenue revisited
IFRS 15 – Contract Assets and Contract Liabilities
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
134 Financial Reporting (FR)
Standalone price
$ %
Handset 600 56
Contract – two years (20 × 24 months) 480 44
Total value 1,080 100
As the total receipts are $980, this is the amount that must be allocated to the separate
performance obligations. Revenue will be recognised as follows (rounded to nearest $).
$
Year 1
Handset (900 × 56%) 544
Contract (980 – 544) × 12/24 month 218
762
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 135
Year 2
Contract (as above) 218
$ $
DEBIT Trade receivable 625,000
DEBIT Contract asset (750,000 – 625,000) 125,000
CREDIT Revenue 750,000
1 The correct answer is: 20X1: $76m, 20X2: $171m, 20X3: $133m
Working
Statement of profit or loss (extract)
2 The correct answer is: Trade receivable $30m; Contract asset $180m
Workings
1 Trade receivables
20X3
$m
Amounts billed to the customer 200
Cash received from the customer (170)
Trade receivable 30
HB2022
136 Financial Reporting (FR)
20X3
$m
Revenue recognised (cumulative) 380
Less: amounts billed to the customer (200)
Contract asset 180
$ $
DR Revenue 42,000
CR Trade receivables 42,000
and
DR Inventories (42,000 × 100%/120%) 35,000
CR Cost of sales 35,000
$ $
DR Other income 56,000
CRDeferred income 56,000
HB2022
6: Revenue and government grants 137
The $27,000 deferred income at 30 June 20X2 must be split into current and non-current
elements.
$
Credited to profit or loss
(300,000/5) = current
20X2–20X3 year amount (60,000)
HB2022
138 Financial Reporting (FR)
Chapter overview
cess skills
Exam suc
Answer planning
c FR skills C
n Specifi o
tio
rr req
a
ec ui
of
m
t i rem
or
nt
inf
erp ents
ng
Approach to Application
reta
agi
tion
Spreadsheet Interpretation
l y si s
Go od
skills skills
ana
ti m
c al
Approach
em
to Case
e ri
OTQs
an
um
ag
tn
em
en
en
t ci
Effi
Effective writing
and presentation
Introduction
Section B of the FR exam consists of three OT case questions.
Each case contains a group of five OT questions focused on a single scenario (which may
describe two connected themes, such as government grants and revenue recognition). These can
be any combination of the single OT question types and they are auto-marked in the same way
as the single OT questions.
OT cases are worth 10 marks (each of the five OTs within it are worth two marks), and as with the
single OT questions in Section A, candidates will score either two marks or zero marks for those
individual questions). Your skills from practising the Section A questions will be relevant in this
section.
OT cases are written so that there are no dependencies between the individual questions. So, if
you did get the first question in the case wrong, this does not affect your ability to get the other
four correct. The OT case scenario remains on screen so you can see it while answering the
questions.
Each OT case normally consists of a range of numerical (calculation-based) questions and
narrative questions. It is often quicker to tackle the narrative questions first leaving some
additional time to tackle calculations.
HB2022
Multiple response (MRQ) You need to select more than one answer from a number of given
options. The question will specify how many answers need to be
selected, but the system won’t stop you from selecting more
answers than this. It is important to read the requirement
carefully.
Fill in the blank (FIB) This question type requires you to type a numerical answer into a
box. The unit of measurement (eg $) will sit outside the box, and if
there are specific rounding requirements these will be displayed.
Pull down list This question type requires you to select one answer from a pull
down list. Some of these questions may contain more than one
pull down list and an answer has to be selected from each one.
Hot spot For hot spot questions, you are required to select one point on an
image as your answer. When the cursor is hovered over the
image, it will display as an ‘X’. To answer, place the X on the
appropriate point on the diagram.
Hot area These are like hot spot questions, but instead of selecting a
specific point you are required to select one or more areas in an
image.
HB2022
140 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 2: Approach to Case OT questions 141
Skill activity
The following scenario relates to questions 1 to 5.
On 1 October 20X5 Dearing Co acquired a machine under the following terms.
$
Cost 1,050,000
Trade discount (applying to cost only) 20%
Freight charges 30,000
Electrical installation cost 28,000
Staff training in use of machine 40,000
Pre-production testing 22,000
Purchase of a three-year maintenance contract 60,000
On 1 October 20X7 Dearing Co decided to upgrade the machine by adding new components at a
cost of $200,000. This upgrade led to a reduction in the production time per unit of the goods
being manufactured using the machine.
1. What amount should be recognised under non-current assets as the initial cost of the
machine? (enter your answer to the nearest $000)
$_____,000
Note. This is FIB question which requires the calculation of the total cost of the machine to be
capitalised under IAS 16 is required.
3. Every five years the machine will need a major overhaul in order to keep running. How should
this be accounted for?
Note. This is an MCQ requiring you to select one valid statement.
• Set up a provision at year 1
• Build up the provision over years 1–5 capitalising the cost in year 1 and releasing it over five
years.
• Capitalise the cost when it arises in year 5 and amortising over five years
• Write the overhaul off to maintenance costs in the year they are incurred
HB2022
142 Financial Reporting (FR)
The performance of the machine had declined Internal indicator External indicator
leading to reduced economic benefits.
There were legal and regulatory changes Internal indicator External indicator
affecting the operating of the machine.
There was an unexpected fall in the market Internal indicator External indicator
value of the machine.
5. On 30 September 20X7 the impairment review was carried out. The following amounts were
established in respect of the machine:
$
Carrying amount 850,000
Value in use 760,000
Fair value 840,000
Costs of disposal 30,000
Use the pull down list below to identify the carrying amount of the machine following the
impairment review.
Note. This is a pull down list question, which is similar to an MCQ. Ensure you correctly scroll to
your intended answer in the exam.
Pull down list
$850,000
$760,000
$840,000
$810,000
STEP 1 Read the introduction to the question carefully, ensuring you understand what the questions are asking you
to do. Skimming the questions requirement will help you to identify whether the questions are narrative or
numerical in style.
Question 1 is a FIB question, you need to follow the instructions carefully and ensure you enter
your answer to the nearest $000 as required. Questions 2 and 3 are narrative questions which ask
you to identify which statements are correct. Read through each statement carefully knowing
that you are looking to identify the statement that is correct. Question 4 is a hot area question,
which ask you to select the correct indicator for each statement. Question 5 is a pull down list
question, the approach for which is very similar to an MCQ.
STEP 2 Attempt the narrative questions first as this will allow you to use any remaining time to focus on the
numerical questions. The case will always have some narrative questions.
Questions 2, 3, and 4 are discursive style ‘narrative’ questions that do not require any
calculations. It would make sense to answer these three questions first as it is likely that you will be
able to complete them comfortably within the 10.8 minutes allocated to them. Any time saved
could then be spent on the more complex calculations required to answer Questions 1 and 5.
STEP 3 Apply your technical knowledge to the data presented in the question.
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 2: Approach to Case OT questions 143
• Purchase price
• Import duties
$ Note
Cost 1,050,000
Trade discount (applying to cost only) 20% 1
Freight charges 30,000 2
Electrical installation cost 28,000 3
Staff training in use of machine 40,000 4
Pre-production testing 22,000 5
Purchase of a three-year maintenance contract 60,000 6
Notes.
1 You will need to calculate the discount value.
2 Freight charges (allowable as part of the initial delivery costs, and capitalised under IAS 16)
3 Electrical costs (allowable as part of the initial delivery costs, and capitalised under IAS 16).
4 These costs should be expensed as the company does not have control over the benefits generated.
5 Testing is specifically allowed, as without it, the asset would not be able to function. Therefore,
allowable capitalised cost.
6 Not allowable, as the asset would be able to function without the maintenance contract (it would be
classed as repairs and maintenance cost, therefore expensed).
Therefore, the cost calculation should look like this:
$
Cost 1,050,000
Trade discount (1,050,000 × 20%) (210,000)
840,000
Freight charges 30,000
HB2022
144 Financial Reporting (FR)
The correct answer is therefore $920,000, which you should enter in the fill in the blank box as
920 as you are asked to provide your answer to the nearest $000.
Question 5 is the other numerical question, requiring knowledge of impairment recoverable
amounts of an asset. A reminder from IAS 36 Impairment of Assets:
An asset is impaired if its carrying amount ($850,000) exceeds its recoverable amount.
The recoverable amount of an asset should be measured as the higher of:
Question 2 is answered by applying your knowledge of the accounting standards covered in this
question, namely IAS 16.
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 2: Approach to Case OT questions 145
Notes.
1 The machine is used and maintained by the company, it therefore has influence over its use and state of
repair. This is deemed to be an internal factor.
2 The laws are made external to the company.
3 The company cannot dictate market prices, so this is external.
4 There is no indication in the question that the company has R&D costs, so it is assumed that it is ‘general
technological updates’ and therefore external to the company.
STEP 4 Stick to your time carefully, as each question is worth two marks, so spending more than the allocated time
of 3.6 minutes on each individual element of the case question is an inefficient use of your time, as you will
need to move onto the Section C questions. If you are running out of time, or you cannot answer any of the
questions, guess the answer from the options provided. You do not lose marks for incorrect answers.
Be strict with your time keeping, if you feel that you are getting stuck on one question, select an
answer and move onto to the next question. With the exception of the FIB (fill in the box)
questions, all OT question can be attempted by guessing one of the given answers. If your revised
carefully and know the key knowledge areas of the standards, then the statement questions
should be a case of selecting the correct answer. The calculation questions require application of
your knowledge.
Remember each OT question gives you two marks regardless of the style of question. It is
important to practice OT questions as this question practice will develop your skills and improve
HB2022
146 Financial Reporting (FR)
Summary
60% of the FR exam consist of OT questions. Key skills to focus on throughout your studies will
therefore include:
• Always read the requirements first to identify what you are being asked to do and what type of
OT question you are dealing with.
• Actively read the scenario highlighting key data needed to answer each requirement.
• Answer OT questions in a sensible order dealing with any easier discursive style questions first.
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 2: Approach to Case OT questions 147
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Using IFRS Standards and other regulation, identify and outline the A4(c)
circumstances in which a group is required to prepare consolidated
financial statements.
Explain the need for using coterminous year ends and uniform A4(f)
accounting policies when preparing consolidated financial
statements.
HB2022
HB2022
150 Financial Reporting (FR)
Chapter overview
Introduction to groups
Definitions
Subsequent measurement
Mid-year acquisitions
HB2022
7: Introduction to groups 151
We will only consider the situation where the entity acquires a company by the acquisition of its
ordinary shares. We can summarise the different types of investment that result from the
acquisition of a company’s shares and the required accounting treatment in the group accounts
as follows:
This chapter, along with Chapters 8, 9 and 10 of this Workbook, consider the accounting
requirements for a subsidiary. Chapter 11 looks at accounting for an associate and Chapter 12,
the accounting for an investment (financial asset).
1.2 Definitions
The following definitions are important for group accounting:
Control: An investor controls an investee when the investor is exposed, or has rights, to variable
KEY
TERM returns from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns
through power over the investee.
Power: Existing rights that give the current ability to direct the relevant activities of the
investee.
Subsidiary: An entity that is controlled by another entity.
Parent: An entity that controls one or more subsidiaries.
Group: A parent and all its subsidiaries.
Associate: An entity over which an investor has significant influence and which is neither a
subsidiary nor an interest in a joint venture.
(IFRS 10: App. A)
HB2022
152 Financial Reporting (FR)
2 Control
We noted above that the acquired company is a subsidiary if control exists. It is important that
you do not simply consider the percentage ownership of the acquired company’s shares to
determine whether a subsidiary exists and instead focus on the criteria for control.
Control
Activity 1: Control
Alpha acquired 4,000 of the 10,000 equity voting shares and 8,000 of the 10,000 non-voting
preference shares in Crofton.
Alpha acquired 4,000 of the 10,000 equity voting shares in Element and had a signed agreement
giving it the power to appoint or remove all of the directors of Element.
HB2022
7: Introduction to groups 153
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 56,600 16,200
Investment in Sanus Co (at cost) 13,800 –
70,400 16,200
Current assets
Inventories 2,900 1,200
Trade receivables 3,300 1,100
Cash 1,700 100
7,900 2,400
78,300 18,600
Equity
Share capital ($1 shares) 8,000 2,400
Reserves 54,100 10,600
62,100 13,000
HB2022
154 Financial Reporting (FR)
On 31 December 20X4, Portus Co purchased a 100% holding in Sanus Co for $13.8 million in cash.
It shows investment in Sanus Co at cost. This will remain unchanged from year to year, ie post-
acquisition increases in value are not evident from the parent’s separate statement of financial
position.
The assets and liabilities shown are only those held by the parent (Portus Co) directly.
Essential reading
Chapter 7 Section 1 of the Essential reading considers the exemptions that are available from
preparing consolidated financial statements.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
7: Introduction to groups 155
5 Goodwill
5.1 Recognition and initial measurement
Essential reading
Chapter 7, Section 2 of the Essential reading discusses goodwill under IFRS 3 Business
Combinations in detail.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
$
Consideration transferred (cost of investment) X
Non-controlling interests (NCI) X
Less fair value of identifiable assets acquired and
liabilities assumed at acquisition date (X)
Goodwill X
Note. The fair value of identifiable assets acquired and liabilities assumed at the acquisition date
is commonly referred to as ‘fair value of net assets’ in this Workbook.
HB2022
156 Financial Reporting (FR)
At 31 December 20X4, the statements of financial position of Portus Co and Sanus Co were as
follows:
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 56,600 16,200
Investment in Sanus (at cost) 13,800 –
70,400 16,200
Current assets
Inventories 2,900 1,200
Trade receivables 3,300 1,100
Cash 1,700 100
7,900 2,400
78,300 18,600
Equity
Share capital ($1 shares) 8,000 2,400
Reserves 54,100 10,600
62,100 13,000
Non-current liabilities
Long-term borrowings 13,200 4,800
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 3,000 800
78,300 18,600
Note. On 31 December 20X4, Portus Co purchased a 100% holding in Sanus Co for $13.8 million in
cash.
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of the Portus Group as at 31 December
20X4
Method:
(1) Cancel the investment in Sanus Co in Portus’s books with the shares and reserves (at the date
of acquisition) in Sanus Co’s books. Any difference is goodwill.
(2) Aggregate the two statements of financial position.
Solution
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X4
HB2022
7: Introduction to groups 157
Non-current assets
Goodwill (W1)
Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Cash
Reserves (W2)
Non-current liabilities
Long-term borrowings
Current liabilities
Workings
1 Group structure
Portus Co
Sanus Co
Pre-acq'n reserves
HB2022
158 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000 $’000
Consideration transferred
Share capital
Reserves
Goodwill
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Per question
Pre-acquisition reserves
Sanus Co
6 Non-controlling interests
6.1 What are non-controlling interests?
Parent (P)
Subsidiary (S)
Non-controlling interests are the 'equity in a subsidiary not attributable, directly or indirectly, to a
parent' (IFRS 3: App. A), ie the non-group shareholders' interest in the net assets of the subsidiary
HB2022
7: Introduction to groups 159
7 Mid-year acquisitions
7.1 Net assets of subsidiary
So far, we have considered acquisitions only at the end of a reporting period. Since companies
produce statements of financial position at that date anyway, there has been no special need to
establish the net assets of the acquired company at that date.
With a mid-year acquisition, a statement of financial position will not exist at the date of
acquisition, as required. Accordingly, we have to estimate the net assets at the date of acquisition
using various assumptions. Any profits made after acquisition – post-acquisition reserves – must
be consolidated in the group financial statements.
Date of acquisition,
becomes subsidiary of P
At 31 December 20X4, the statements of financial position of Portus Co and Sanus Co were as
follows:
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 56,600 16,200
Investment in Sanus Co (at cost) 13,800 –
70,400 16,200
Current assets
Inventories 2,900 1,200
Trade receivables 3,300 1,100
Cash 1,700 100
7,900 2,400
78,300 18,600
HB2022
160 Financial Reporting (FR)
Notes.
1 On 1 April 20X4, Portus Co purchased an 80% holding in Sanus Co for $13.8 million in cash.
Sanus Co’s total comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X4 was $2.0
million, accruing evenly over the year. Sanus Co did not pay any dividends in the year.
2 The non-controlling interest in Sanus Co is to be valued at its fair value of $3.2 million at the
date of acquisition.
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of the Portus Group as at 31 December
20X4.
Solution
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X4
$’000
Non-current assets
Goodwill (W2)
Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Cash
HB2022
7: Introduction to groups 161
Reserves (W3)
Non-current liabilities
Long-term borrowings
Current liabilities
Workings
1 Group structure
Portus Co
Sanus Co
Pre-acq'n reserves
2 Goodwill
$’000 $’000
Consideration transferred
Share capital
Reserves
HB2022
162 Financial Reporting (FR)
Goodwill
3 Consolidated reserves
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Per question
Pre-acquisition reserves
Sanus Co
4 Non-controlling interests
$’000
Essential reading
Chapter 7 Section 3 of the Essential reading considers the accounting policies and year-end date
of the subsidiary.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
7: Introduction to groups 163
Important features
• Investment remains at cost, unchanged over time Features of the consolidated statement of financial
• Assets and liabilities are those of parent only position
• Present results as single economic entity
• No investment in subsidiary
• Subsidiary assets and liabilities included
• Share capital that of parent only
• Show the assets and liabilities controlled by
the group
• Shows the equity of the owners of the net assets
HB2022
164 Financial Reporting (FR)
Points to note
Calculation of goodwill • Don't need to own 100% of S to control it
$ $ • NCI in equity section to reflect ownership
Consideration transferred X
Non-controlling interests X
Less fair value of net assets at acquisition:
Share capital X
Share premium X
Retained earnings X
Revaluation surplus X
(X)
X
Subsequent measurement
Test annually for impairment
Mid-year acquisitions
HB2022
7: Introduction to groups 165
2. Control
Control exists when the acquiring company:
• Has the power to direct relevant activities of the other entity
• Has exposure or the right to variable returns
• Ability to use power to direct the amount of those returns
5. Goodwill
Goodwill arises when the value of a business as a whole exceeds the fair value of the net asset
acquired. It is subsequently tested for impairment annually.
6. Non-controlling interests
Non-controlling interests own any interest in a subsidiary that the parent does not own.
7. Mid-year acquisitions
The net assets of a subsidiary need to be established at the date of acquisition. Any profits
earned by the subsidiary pre-acquisition are included in its retained earnings, and therefore its
net assets, at the date of acquisition. Any post-acquisition profits of the subsidiary are included
within the consolidated financial statements.
HB2022
166 Financial Reporting (FR)
Question practice
As this is an introductory chapter, there are no recommended questions from the Further question
practice bank at this stage. Questions will be recommended in Chapters 8–10 which build on the
concepts covered in this chapter.
Further reading
ACCA have produced a number of technical articles which look at key areas of the FR syllabus.
IFRS 3, Business combinations
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
7: Introduction to groups 167
Activity 1: Control
The correct answer is: Element only
Alpha does not have power over Crofton as the non-voting preference shares do not give it power
and they only own 40% of the voting shares. The agreement regarding Element affords Alpha with
power, thus Element is a subsidiary.
Activity 2: Goodwill
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X4
$’000
Non-current assets
73,600
Current assets
10,300
83,900
62,100
Non-current liabilities
Current liabilities
83,900
HB2022
168 Financial Reporting (FR)
31.12.X4
100%
Cost $13.8m
Sanus Co
Pre-acq'n reserves $10.6m
2 Goodwill
$’000 $’000
Reserves 10,600
(13,000)
Goodwill 800
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Sanus Co (0 × 100%) 0
54,100
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X4
$’000
Non-current assets
HB2022
7: Introduction to groups 169
78,300
Current assets
10,300
88,600
63,300
66,800
Non-current liabilities
Current liabilities
88,600
Workings
1 Group structure
Portus Co
31.12.X4
100%
Cost $13.8m
Sanus Co
Pre-acq'n reserves $10.6m
2 Goodwill
$’000 $’000
HB2022
170 Financial Reporting (FR)
(11,500)
Goodwill 5,500
3 Consolidated reserves
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
1,500
55,300
4 Non-controlling interests
$’000
3,500
HB2022
7: Introduction to groups 171
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Explain why it is necessary to use fair values for the consideration A4(i)
for an investment in a subsidiary together with the fair values of a
subsidiary’s identifiable assets and liabilities when preparing
consolidated financial statements.
Explain and account for other components of equity (eg share D2(c)
premium and revaluation surplus).
Account for the effects of fair value adjustments (including their D2(e)
effect on consolidated goodwill) to:
(a) depreciating and non-depreciating non-current assets
(b) inventory
(c) monetary liabilities
(d) assets and liabilities not included in the subsidiary’s own
statement of financial position, including contingent assets
and liabilities
HB2022
Exam context
The consolidated statement of financial position is one of the key financial statements you need to
be able to prepare and/or interpret in Section C of the Financial Reporting exam. It is important
that you understand the approach to preparing the consolidated statement of financial position
and that you can apply that approach efficiently in an exam question.
HB2022
174 Financial Reporting (FR)
Chapter overview
The consolidated statement of financial position
Reconciliation of
intragroup balances
Method
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 175
HB2022
176 Financial Reporting (FR)
Goodwill
$
Consideration transferred (cost of investment) X
Non-controlling interests (NCI) X
Less the fair value of identifiable assets acquired and liabilities
assumed at the acquisition date (X)
Goodwill X
Sing Co gained control of Wing Co on 31 March 20X5 when it acquired 80% of its ordinary shares.
The draft statements of financial position of each company were as follows:
SING CO
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 MARCH 20X5
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 177
WING CO
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 MARCH 20X5
$
Current assets 60,000
Equity
50,000 ordinary shares of $1 each 50,000
Retained earnings 10,000
60,000
The fair value of the non-controlling interest in Wing Co as at 31 March 20X5 has been determined
as $12,500.
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of the Sing Group as at 31 March 20X5.
Solution
SING GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 MARCH 20X5
Assets
Non-current assets
Current assets
Total assets
Ordinary shares
HB2022
178 Financial Reporting (FR)
Retained earnings
Non-controlling interests
Consideration
A liability of $100,000 is to be paid in two years’ time. The discount rate of 6%.
Required
At what amount should the liability be recorded?
Solution
The liability should be recorded at $100,000 × 1/1.062 = $89,000.
Essential reading
Chapter 8, Section 1 of the Essential reading provides more detail on the types of consideration
that may be used to acquire a subsidiary.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 179
ABC acquired 300,000 of DEF’s 400,000 ordinary shares during the year ending 28 February
20X5. DEF was purchased from its directors who will remain in their current roles in the business.
The purchase consideration comprised:
• $250,000 in cash payable at acquisition
• $88,200 payable two years after acquisition
• $100,000 payable in two years’ time if profits exceed $2 million
• New shares issued in ABC at acquisition on a 1 for 3 basis
The consideration payable in two years after acquisition is a tough target for the directors of DEF,
which means its fair value (taking into account the time value of money) has been measured at
only $30,750.
The market value of ABC’s shares on the acquisition date was $7.35.
An appropriate discount rate for use where relevant is 5%.
Required
1 How much is the consideration that has been/will be paid in cash to include in the calculation
of goodwill on acquisition?
$
2 How much is the consideration payable in shares that will be included in the calculation of
goodwill on acquisition?
$
However, this is complicated when there is NCI at fair value at the date of acquisition.
When NCI is valued at fair value the goodwill in the statement of financial position includes
goodwill attributable to the NCI. In this case, the double entry will reflect the NCI proportion
based on their shareholding as follows:
HB2022
180 Financial Reporting (FR)
Using the information in Activity 1 above, assume that in the year ending 31 March 20X6, the
goodwill of Wing Co is impaired by 20%.
Required
Prepare the journal entry to record the goodwill impairment of Wing Co in the year ended 31
March 20X6.
Solution
The goodwill impairment is $32,500 × 20% = $6,500.
$5,200 ($6,500 × 80%) of this will be allocated to the group and the remaining $1,300 ($6,500 ×
20%) will be allocated to the NCI.
2 Fair values
In order to calculate goodwill, we need to establish
• The fair value of the non-controlling interest; and
• The fair value of the net assets acquired
2.1 Definition
Fair value: The price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an
KEY
TERM orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date (IFRS 13: para. 9).
Essential reading
Chapter 8 Section 2 of the Essential reading provides more detail regarding the interaction of IFRS
3 and IFRS 13.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 181
NCI at acquisition
Note that a parent can choose which method to use on a transaction by transaction basis.
Important Note
You should note that the term ‘full goodwill’ is sometimes used to refer to measuring NCI at fair
value and the term ‘partial goodwill’ is sometimes used when referring to NCI at proportionate
share of net assets. These terms are not used in IFRS 3 and are not used in this Workbook,
however you may be familiar with them from your workplace.
On 31 December 20X8, Penn acquired four million of the five million $1 ordinary shares of
Sylvania, paying $10 million in cash. On that date, the fair value of Sylvania’s net assets was $7.5
million.
Required
Calculate the goodwill arising on acquisition assuming:
1 Penn has elected to value the non-controlling interest at acquisition at fair value. The market
price of the shares held by the non-controlling shareholders immediately before the
acquisition was $2.00.
2 Penn has elected to value the non-controlling interest at acquisition at its proportionate share
of the fair value of the subsidiary’s identifiable net assets.
Solution
1 NCI at fair value
$’000
Consideration transferred 10,000
Non-controlling interest: 1m × $2 2,000
12,000
Net assets acquired (7,500)
Goodwill 4,500
HB2022
182 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000
Consideration transferred 10,000
Non-controlling interest: 20% × $7.5m 1,500
11,500
Net assets acquired (7,500)
Goodwill 4,000
You can see from the above illustration that measuring NCI at fair value at acquisition results in an
increased amount of goodwill. The additional amount of goodwill represents goodwill attributable
to the shares held by non-controlling shareholders. It is not necessarily proportionate to the
goodwill attributed to the parent as the parent may have paid more to acquire a controlling
interest.
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 183
At 31 December 20X4, the statements of financial position of Portus Co and Sanus Co were as
follows:
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 56,600 16,200
Investment in Sanus Co (at cost) 13,800 –
70,400 16,200
Current assets
Inventories 2,900 1,200
Trade receivables 3,300 1,100
Cash 1,700 100
7,900 2,400
78,300 18,600
Equity
Share capital ($1 shares) 8,000 2,400
Reserves 54,100 10,600
62,100 13,000
HB2022
184 Financial Reporting (FR)
Non-current liabilities
Long-term borrowings 13,200 4,800
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 3,000 800
78,300 18,600
Notes.
1 On 1 April 20X4, Portus Co purchased an 80% holding in Sanus Co for $13.8 million in cash.
Sanus Co’s total comprehensive income for the year ending 31 December 20X4 was $2.0
million, accruing evenly over the year. Sanus Co did not pay any dividends in the year.
2 At the date of acquisition, the fair value of Sanus Co’s assets was equal to their carrying
amounts with the exception of the items listed below which exceeded their carrying amounts
as follows (see table below). Sanus Co. has not adjusted the carrying amounts as a result of
the fair value exercise. The inventories were sold by Sanus Co before the year end.
3 The non-controlling interest in Sanus Co is to be valued at its fair value of $3.2 million at the
date of acquisition. An impairment test conducted at the year-end revealed that the
consolidated goodwill of Sanus Co was impaired by $150,000.
£’000
Inventories 300
Plant and equipment (10-year remaining useful life) 1,200
1,500
Required
1 Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of the Portus Group as at 31
December 20X4.
2 Show how the goodwill and non-controlling interests would change if the non-controlling
interests were measured at acquisition at the proportionate share of the fair value of the
acquiree’s identifiable net assets.
3 Explain how the goodwill would have been treated if the calculation had resulted in a negative
figure, and how such a negative figure may arise.
Solution
1
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X4
$’000
Non-current assets
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 185
Goodwill (W2)
Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Cash
Reserves (W3)
Non-current liabilities
Long-term borrowings
Current liabilities
Workings
1 Group structure
Portus Co
Sanus Co
Pre-acq'n reserves
HB2022
186 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000 $’000
Consideration transferred
Share capital
Reserves
3 Consolidated reserves
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Per question
Pre-acquisition reserves
Sanus Co
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 187
$’000
At acquisition
date Movement At year end
Inventories
Take to
Take to Goodwill CoS/reserves Take to SOFP
2
Changes:
Workings
1 Goodwill
$’000 $’000
Consideration transferred
Non-controlling interests
Share capital
HB2022
188 Financial Reporting (FR)
Reserves
2 Non-controlling interests
$’000
Elderberry Co acquired 750,000 of Apricot Co’s 1,000,000 $1 ordinary shares on 1 January 20X2
for $3,800,000 when Apricot Co’s retained earnings were $4,200,000. Elderberry Co elected to
measure non-controlling interests in Apricot Co at its fair value of $1,600,000 at the date of
acquisition.
At 1 January 20X2, Apricot Co had not recognised the following in its financial statements:
• Apricot Co had a customer list which it had not recognised as an intangible asset because it
was internally generated. However, on acquisition, external experts managed to establish a fair
value for the list of $150,000. Customers are typically retained for an average of 5 years.
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 189
Solution
Essential reading
Chapter 8, Section 3 of the Essential reading is an activity in which a subsidiary is acquired mid-
way through the year.
HB2022
190 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 3 included a figure for ‘reserves’ of Portus Co and Sanus Co. We must now more
accurately refer to the component parts of those reserves. The total reserves presented in Activity
3 can be broken down as follows:
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Equity
Share capital ($1 shares) 8,000 2,400
Retained earnings 42,700 9,000
Revaluation surplus 11,400 1,600
62,100 13,000
At acquisition, the retained earnings of Sanus Co were $7.8 million and its revaluation surplus
stood at $1.3 million (coming to a total of $9.1 million as before).
Required
Calculate the consolidated retained earnings, consolidated revaluation surplus and non-
controlling interests for the Portus Group as at 31 December 20X4.
Solution
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X4 (EXTRACT)
$’000
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 191
Workings
1 Consolidated retained earnings
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Per question
Sanus Co (
× 80%)
× 80%)
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Per question
Sanus Co (
× 80%)
HB2022
192 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000
× 20%))
× 20%))
× 20%)
3,392
Subsidiary Co, a 60% subsidiary of Parent Co, pays a dividend of $1,000 on the last day of its
accounting period. Its retained earnings before paying the dividend stood at $5,000.
Required
Explain how the dividend paid by Subsidiary Co should be accounted for.
Solution
(1) $400 (40%) of the dividend is paid to non-controlling shareholders. The cash leaves the group
and will not appear anywhere in the consolidated statement of financial position.
(2) The parent company receives $600 of the dividend, debiting cash and crediting profit or loss.
This will be cancelled on consolidation.
(3) The remaining balance of retained earnings in Subsidiary Co’s statement of financial position
($5,000 less $1,000 dividend paid) will be consolidated in the normal way. The group’s share
(60% × $4,000 = $2,400) will be included in group retained earnings in the statement of
financial position; the non-controlling interest share (40% × $4,000 = $1,600) is credited to the
non-controlling interest account in the statement of financial position.
5 Intragroup trading
5.1 IFRS 10 requirement
IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements states ‘Intragroup balances, transactions, income and
expenses shall be eliminated in full’ (IFRS 10: para. B86).
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 193
5.3 Method
Make the adjustments for in transit items on your proforma answer after consolidating the assets
and liabilities.
• Cash in transit
DEBIT Cash
CREDIT Receivables
• Goods in transit
DEBIT Inventories
CREDIT Payables
• Eliminate intragroup receivables and payables
DEBIT Intragroup payable
CREDIT Intragroup receivable
6.2 Method
Calculate the unrealised profit included in inventories and mark the adjustment to inventories on
your proforma answer and to retained earnings in your workings.
HB2022
194 Financial Reporting (FR)
At 31 December 20X4, the statements of financial position of Portus Co and Sanus Co were as
follows:
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 56,600 16,200
Investment in Sanus Co (at cost) 13,800 –
70,400 16,200
Current assets
Inventories 2,900 1,200
Trade receivables 3,300 1,100
Cash 1,700 100
7,900 2,400
78,300 18,600
Equity
Share capital ($1 shares) 8,000 2,400
Reserves 54,100 10,600
62,100 13,000
Non-current liabilities
Long-term borrowings 13,200 4,800
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 3,000 800
78,300 18,600
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 195
$’000
Inventories 300
Plant and equipment (10-year remaining useful life) 1,200
1,500
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of the Portus Group as at 31 December
20X4 (incorporating the changes from the previous example identified in bold text).
Solution
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X4
$’000
Non-current assets
Goodwill (W2)
Current assets
HB2022
196 Financial Reporting (FR)
Reserves (W3)
Non-current liabilities
Current liabilities
Workings
1 Group structure
Portus Co
Sanus Co
Pre-acq'n reserves
2 Goodwill
$’000 $’000
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 197
(13,000)
4,000
3,850
3 Consolidated reserves
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Sanus Co (
× 80%)
4 Non-controlling interests
$’000
(W3) × 20%)
HB2022
198 Financial Reporting (FR)
At acquisition
date Movement At year end
6 Intragroup trading
(1) Cash in transit
$’000 $’000
$’000 $’000
$’000 $’000
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 199
7.2 Method
(a) Calculate the unrealised profit on the transfer of the item of property, plant and equipment
(PPE).
(b) Calculate the amount of this unrealised profit that has been depreciated by the year-end.
This is the ‘excess depreciation’ that must be added back to group PPE.
(c) Adjust for these amounts in your consolidation workings.
DEBIT PPE
CREDIT Retained earnings (subsidiary’s column in retained earnings working)
With the excess depreciation
DEBIT PPE
CREDIT Retained earnings (group’s column in retained earnings working)
With the excess depreciation
HB2022
200 Financial Reporting (FR)
Percy Co owns 60% of the equity shares of Edmund Co, giving Percy Co control over Edmund Co.
On 1 January 20X1, Edmund Co sold a machine with a carrying amount of $10,000 to Percy Co
for $12,500.
The reporting date of the group is 31 December 20X1 and the balances on the retained earnings of
Percy Co and Edmund Co at that date are:
$
Percy Co, after charging depreciation of 10% on the machine 27,000
Edmund Co, including profit on the sale of the machine to Percy Co 18,000
Required
Show the working for consolidated retained earnings.
Solution
Consolidated retained earnings
Percy Co Edmund Co
$ $
Per question 27,000 18,000
Disposal of plant
Profit (2,500)
Excess depreciation: 10% × $2,500 250 ––––––
15,500
Share of Edmund Co: $15,500 × 60% 9,300
Retained earnings 36,550
Notes.
1 The NCI in the retained earnings of Edmund Co is 40% × $15,500 = $6,200.
2 The profit on the transfer of $2,250 ($2,500 – $250) will be deducted from the carrying
amount of the machine to write it down to cost to the group.
Sanus Co sells plant with a remaining useful life of four years and a carrying amount of $120,000
to Portus Co for $200,000 on 1 October 20X4.
Required
Using the options below, select the correct entries for the journals to remove the unrealised profit
in the consolidated statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X4.
Debit Credit
Retained earnings ▼
Property, plant and equipment ▼
With the unrealised profit on disposal
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 201
Essential reading
Chapter 8 Section 4 of the Essential reading provides a further activity relating to the
consolidated statement of financial position.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
PER alert
One of the competences you require to fulfil Performance Objective 7 of the PER is the ability
to classify information in accordance with the requirements for external financial statements
or for inclusion in disclosure notes in the statements. You can apply the knowledge you obtain
from this chapter to help to demonstrate this competence.
HB2022
202 Financial Reporting (FR)
Fair values
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 203
Other reserves
• Include in goodwill working
• Include parent + group share of subsidiary post-acquisition
HB2022
204 Financial Reporting (FR)
2. Goodwill
Positive goodwill is capitalised and tested annually for impairment. ‘Negative’ goodwill (once
reassessed to ensure it is accurate) is recognised as a bargain purchase in profit or loss.
The consideration transferred comprises any assets or equity transferred at the date of
acquisition, less any liabilities incurred, deferred consideration and any contingent consideration.
3. Fair values
Non-controlling interests at acquisition can be measured either at their fair value or at their
proportionate share of the fair value of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets.
The fair value of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed must be recognised at fair value at
the date of acquisition. Internally generated intangible assets and contingent liabilities not
recognised in the individual financial statements of the subsidiary are recognised on acquisition,
provided criteria satisfied.
6. Intragroup trading
In the consolidated accounts (only), items in transit must be accounted for and intragroup
balances cancelled.
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 205
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section A Q8
Section C Q31 Barcelona Co and Madrid Co
Section C Q32 Reprise Group
Section C Q36 Highveldt Co
Section C Q56 Armstrong Co
Further reading
There are useful articles written by the examining team on the calculation of goodwill, which can
be found on the ACCA website.
Accounting for goodwill
Watch your step
The use of fair values in the goodwill calculation
Impairment of goodwill
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
206 Financial Reporting (FR)
Assets
Non-current assets
Working
Goodwill
$ $
Consideration transferred 80,000
Non-controlling interest 12,500
Net assets acquired as represented by:
Ordinary share capital 50,000
Retained earnings on acquisition 10,000
(60,000)
Goodwill 32,500
Activity 2: Consideration
1 $ 360,750
$
Cash 250,000
Deferred consideration (88,200 × (1/1.052)) 80,000
Contingent consideration 30,750
360,750
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 207
1 PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X4
$’000
Non-current assets
77,760
Current assets
10,300
88,060
62,868
66,260
Non-current liabilities
Current liabilities
88,060
HB2022
208 Financial Reporting (FR)
1.4.X4
80%
Cost $13.8m
Sanus
Pre-acq'n reserves $9.1m
($10.6m – ($2.0m × 9/12))
or ($10.6m – $2.0m + ($2.0 × 3/12))
2 Goodwill
$’000 $’000
(13,000)
4,000
3,850
3 Consolidated reserves
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
1,110
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 209
$’000 $’000
54,868
4 Non-controlling interests
$’000
At acquisition
date Movement At year end
(390)
1,500 Take to 1,110
Take to Goodwill CoS/reserves Take to SOFP
2 Changes:
Workings
1 Goodwill
$’000 $’000
HB2022
210 Financial Reporting (FR)
(13,000)
3,400
3,280
2 Non-controlling interests
$’000
2,822
3 Where the goodwill calculation results in a negative figure (ie where the fair value of net assets
at acquisition exceeds the consideration paid and value attributed to non-controlling
interests), the full amount is treated as a ‘bargain purchase’. It is credited directly to profit or
loss (and retained earnings) attributable to the parent. There is no non-controlling interest
effect.
This situation could arise for several reasons:
(1) The seller needed to make a quick/forced sale (eg due to liquidity or regulatory reasons)
resulting in a bargain purchase of the net assets at less than their fair value.
(2) An expectation that losses will be made lowering the value of the net assets acquired
before the business can be turned around.
(3) An expectation that the business will need to be broken up and sold off with significant
break-up costs.
(4) The existence of liabilities that did not meet the recognition criteria for recognition in the
fair value of the net assets acquired (for this reason, IFRS 3 actually requires a review of
the calculations of net assets acquired to ensure no contingent liabilities that can be
recognised have been missed before a credit is allowed to be made to profit or loss).
$’000 $’000
Consideration 3,800
NCI at FV 1,600
Fair value of identifiable net assets:
Share capital 1,000
Retained earnings 4,200
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 211
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X4 (EXTRACT)
$’000
66,260
Workings
1 Consolidated retained earnings
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
810
43,228
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
HB2022
212 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000 $’000
(1,300)
Pre-acquisition revaluation surplus 300
11,640
3 Non-controlling interests
$’000
3,392
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X4
$’000
Non-current assets
77,760
Current assets
10,090
87,850
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 213
62,804
66,180
Non-current liabilities
Current liabilities
87,850
Workings
1 Group structure
Portus Co
31.12.X4
100%
Cost $13.8m
Sanus Co
Pre-acq'n reserves $10.6m
2 Goodwill
$’000 $’000
(13,000)
4,000
3,850
HB2022
214 Financial Reporting (FR)
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
1,030
54,804
4 Non-controlling interests
$’000
3,376
At acquisition
date Movement At year end
6 Intragroup trading
(1) Cash in transit
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Group cash 70
CREDIT Trade receivables 70
HB2022
8: The consolidated statement of financial position 215
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Group payables 130
CREDIT Group receivables 130
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Cost of sales (& reserves) (of Sanus Co the seller) 80
CREDIT Group inventories 80
Debit Credit
Retained earnings $80,000
Property, plant and equipment $80,000
With the unrealised profit on disposal
Debit Credit
Retained earnings $5,000
Property, plant and equipment $5,000
With the excess depreciation
Working
Unrealised profit
$
Profit on transfer (200 – 120) 80,000
Excess depreciation (80 × 3/12 × ¼) 5,000
HB2022
216 Financial Reporting (FR)
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Explain the need for using coterminous year-ends and uniform A4(f)
accounting polices when preparing consolidated financial
statements.
9
Exam context
The group accounting question in Section C of the Financial Reporting exam may ask you to
prepare and/or interpret a consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income (SPLOCI). This chapter builds on the knowledge gained in Chapters 7 and 8, focusing on
the inclusion of a subsidiary in the group financial statements. As with Chapter 8, it is important
that you develop an approach to preparing the SPLOCI and that you can apply that approach
efficiently in an exam question.
HB2022
Chapter overview
The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income (SPLOCI)
Basic procedure
Impairment
Intragroup loans
and interest
Issue
Method
HB2022
218 Financial Reporting (FR)
Total
comprehensive
Profit for the income for the
year (PFY) year (TCI)
$ $
S’s PFY/S’s TCI per the question X X
Consolidation adjustments affecting the subsidiary’s
profit:
• Impairment loss on goodwill for the year (Non-
controlling interest (NCI) is measured at fair value at
acquisition) (X) (X)
• Provision for unrealised profit (if the subsidiary is the
seller) (X) (X)
• Interest on intragroup loans (X)/X (X)/X
• Fair value adjustments – movement in the year (X)/X (X)/X
A B
NCI share NCI % × A NCI % × B
HB2022
9: The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income 219
HB2022
220 Financial Reporting (FR)
Chapter 9, Section 1 of the Essential reading provides further detail and an Activity on the pre-
and post-acquisition profits.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
The statements of profit or loss and other comprehensive income of Portus Co and its subsidiary
Sanus Co for the year ended 31 December 20X4 are as follows:
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Revenue 28,500 11,800
Cost of sales (17,100) (7,000)
Gross profit 11,400 4,800
Expenses (4,400) (2,200)
Finance costs (400) (200)
Profit before tax 6,600 2,400
Income tax expense (2,100) (800)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 4,500 1,600
Other comprehensive income:
Gains on property revaluation 900 400
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR 5,400 2,000
Note. On 1 April 20X4, Portus Co purchased an 80% holding in Sanus Co for $13.8 million in cash.
Sanus’s total comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X4 was $2.0 million,
accruing evenly over the year. Sanus Co did not pay any dividends in the year. Portus Co paid
dividends of $3 million in the year.
HB2022
9: The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income 221
Solution
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR
THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X4
$’000
Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Expenses
Finance costs
HB2022
222 Financial Reporting (FR)
Workings
1 Group structure
Portus Co
1.4.X4
80%
Cost $13.8m
Sanus
Pre-acq'n reserves $9.1m
($10.6m – ($2.0m × 9/12))
or ($10.6m – $2.0m + ($2.0 × 3/12))
$’000 $’000
PFY/TCI per
× ×
% %
HB2022
9: The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income 223
Example
3rd party
supplier
P sells goods on to S
80% for $2,000, making a
profit of $400
S holds inventories of
S
$2,000 at the year end
After this transaction, the individual company and consolidated statements of profit or loss
(before cancellation of intragroup trading) look like this:
P S Consolidated
$ $ $ $ $ $
Revenue 2,000 – 2,000
Cost of sales:
Opening inventory – – –
Purchases 1,600 2,000 3,600
Closing inventory (–) (2,000) (2,000)
(1,600) (–) (1,600)
Gross profit 400 – 400
After these adjustments, the consolidated statement of profit or loss is now as follows:
HB2022
224 Financial Reporting (FR)
Note. The intragroup revenue and purchase of $2,000 have been eliminated leaving the $1,600
purchase from the third-party supplier. Closing inventory has been reduced to the cost to the
group of $1,600 and the unrealised profit of $400 has been eliminated.
2.2 Method
There are two potential adjustments needed when group companies trade with each other:
$ $
DEBIT Group revenue X
CREDIT Group cost of sales X
With the total amount of the intragroup sales between the companies. This adjustment is needed
regardless of whether any of the goods are still in inventories at the year end or not.
An adjustment will also need to be made in the NCI calculation if it is the subsidiary that makes
the sale.
Note. You should be aware that whilst this section focuses on the transfer of goods between group
companies, the transfer of non-current assets (as covered in Chapter 8) may also impact on the
consolidated statement of profit or loss. Recall that there were two adjustments when non-current
assets are transferred:
(a) An adjustment to alter retained earnings (profit or loss in the year the transfer is made) and
non-current assets cost to remove unrealised profit
(b) An adjustment to alter retained earnings (profit or loss for the current year) and accumulated
depreciation so that consolidated depreciation is based on the asset’s cost to the group
You should be prepared to answer a group accounting question which includes the transfer of
goods, the transfer of non-current assets, or both in a Financial Reporting exam question.
HB2022
9: The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income 225
Continuing from the previous example, the statements of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income of Portus Co and its subsidiary, Sanus Co, for the year ended 31 December 20X4 are as
follows:
Portus Co Sanus Co
$’000 $’000
Revenue 28,500 11,800
Cost of sales (17,100) (7,000)
Gross profit 11,400 4,800
Expenses (4,400) (2,200)
Finance costs (400) (200)
Profit before tax 6,600 2,400
Income tax expense (2,100) (800)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 4,500 1,600
Other comprehensive income:
Gains on property revaluation 900 400
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR 5,400 2,000
Notes.
1 On 1 April 20X4 Portus Co purchased an 80% holding in Sanus Co for $13.8 million in cash.
Sanus’s total comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X4 was $2.0 million,
accruing evenly over the year. Sanus Co did not pay any dividends in the year. Portus Co paid
dividends of $3 million in the year.
2 At the date of acquisition, the fair value of Sanus’s assets were equal to their carrying amounts
with the exception of the items listed below which exceeded their carrying amounts by the
following amounts (see table below). Sanus Co has not adjusted the carrying amounts as a
result of the fair value exercise. The inventories were sold by Sanus Co before the year end.
3 The NCI in Sanus Co is to be valued at its fair value of $3.2 million at the date of acquisition.
An impairment test conducted at the year-end revealed that the consolidated goodwill of
Sanus Co was impaired by $150,000.
4 On 1 October 20X4, Sanus Co sold goods to Portus Co for $200,000 at a gross profit margin
of 40%. The goods were still in Portus Co’s inventories at the year end. No other sales were
made between Portus Co and Sanus Co in the year. At 31 December 20X4, Portus Co’s current
account with Sanus Co was $130,000 (credit). This did not agree with the equivalent balance
in Sanus’s books due to cash in transit of $70,000 which was not received by Sanus Co until
after the year end.
$’000
Inventories 300
Plant and equipment (10-remaining useful life) 1,200
1,500
Required
1 Prepare the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the
Portus Group for the year ended 31 December 20X4.
HB2022
226 Financial Reporting (FR)
Solution
1
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X4
$’000
Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Expenses
Finance costs
NCI (W2)
HB2022
9: The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income 227
NCI (W2)
Workings
1 Group structure
Portus Co
1.4.X4
80%
Cost $13.8m
Sanus
Pre-acq'n reserves $9.1m
($10.6m – ($2.0m × 9/12))
or ($10.6m – $2.0m + ($2.0 × 3/12))
Total comp
Profit for the year income
$’000 $’000
× 20% × 20%
At acquisition
date Movement At year end
Inventories –
HB2022
228 Financial Reporting (FR)
4 Intragroup trading
(1) Cancel intragroup trading
$’000 $’000
$’000 $’000
HB2022
9: The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income 229
3.2 Method
3.2.1 Cancel the loan in the consolidated statement of financial position
Adjustment is required to cancel the loans in the consolidated statement of financial position:
The loan balance will be a receivable in the statement of financial position of the provider of the
loan and a payable to the recipient of the loan. The balances need to be cancelled in the
consolidated statement of financial position:
$ $
DEBIT Loan payable X
CREDIT Loan receivable X
3.2.2 Cancel the finance cost and finance income in the consolidated statement of profit or
loss and other comprehensive income
The provider of the loan will present finance income in its statement of profit or loss and the
recipient of the loan will show a finance cost. This is an intragroup income and expense which
must be cancelled in the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive
income:
$ $
DEBIT Group finance income X
CREDIT Group finance costs X
Example
P acquired 100% of S on its incorporation. On the same date, P made a fixed rate 4% loan to S.
The loan has not been repaid at the year end. The loan is eliminated on consolidation as follows:
STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION
P S Adjustment Consolidated
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and
equipment 6,200 3,050 9,250
Investment in S 1,000 – –
4% loan to S 400 – (400) –
7,600 3,050 9,250
Current assets 1,350 850 2,200
8,950 3,900 11,450
Equity
Share capital 800 1,000 800
Retained earnings 6,900 1,800 8,700
7,700 2,800 9,500
HB2022
230 Financial Reporting (FR)
P S Adjustment Consolidated
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Revenue 2,200 1,100 3,300
Cost of sales and expenses (1,540) (770) (2,310)
Profit before interest and
tax 660 330 990
Finance income (from S) 16 – (16) –
Finance costs (20) (16) (16) (20)
Profit before tax 656 314 970
Income tax expense (196) (94) (290)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 460 220 680
HB2022
9: The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income 231
P acquired 60% of the ordinary share capital of S on 1 January 20X0. At 1 January 20X0, the fair
value of S’s net assets was the same as their carrying amount with the exception of a factory. The
fair value of the factory was $500,000 higher than its carrying amount. At acquisition, the
remaining useful life of the factory was 20 years. Depreciation on the factory is presented in cost
of sales.
In the year ended 31 December 20X4, P and S had cost of sales of $900,000 and $700,000
respectively and profits for the year of $3.9 million and $2.1 million respectively.
Required
Calculate the following figures for inclusion in the consolidated statement of profit or loss of the P
Group for the year ended 31 December 20X4:
(1) Cost of sales
(2) Profit for the year attributable to non-controlling interest
Solution
Step 1 Calculate the movement in the fair value adjustments in the year
= $500,000 fair value adjustment on factory × 1/20 depreciation = $25,000
Step 2 Calculate consolidated cost of sales
$’000
P 900
S 700
Fair value adjustment - movement in the year 25
1,625
HB2022
232 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
9: The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income 233
Basic procedure
• Draw up group structure, % ownership, date of acquisition
• Create proforma
• Transfer parent and 100% sub to proform (pro-rate mid year)
• Adjust for intragroup trading, loans, fair value adjustments
• Complete NCI calculations
Impairment
Only current year impairment losses included
HB2022
234 Financial Reporting (FR)
Issue
• Intragroup borrowings do not
represent:
– Amounts owed/owing
– Additional finance
income/expense
– From a group perspective
Method
• Cancel the loan
DEBIT (↓) Loan payable
CREDIT (↓) Loan receivable
• Eliminate the interest
DEBIT (↓) Finance income
CREDIT (↓) Finance expense
HB2022
9: The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income 235
1. Approach to the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income
The purpose of the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income is to
show the results of the group as a single business entity.
Where an acquisition occurs part way through an accounting period, income and expenses are
only consolidated for the number of months that the subsidiary is controlled by the parent.
2. Intragroup trading
In order not to overstate group revenue and costs, intragroup trading is cancelled. Similarly,
unrealised profits on intragroup trading are eliminated.
HB2022
236 Financial Reporting (FR)
Question practice
You should attempt the following questions from the Further question practice (available in the
digital edition of the Workbook):
Section A Q9 and Q10
Section C Q33 Fallowfield Co and Rusholme Co
Section C Q34 Panther Group
Further reading
You should make time to read the following articles, which is available in the study support
resources section of the ACCA website:
Watch your step
The use of fair values in the goodwill calculation
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
9: The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income 237
$’000
5,700
6,900
HB2022
238 Financial Reporting (FR)
1.4.X4
80%
Cost $13.8m
Sanus
Pre-acq'n reserves $9.1m
($10.6m – ($2.0m × 9/12))
or ($10.6m – $2.0m + ($2.0 × 3/12))
$’000 $’000
× 20% × 20%
240 300
1 PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X4
$’000
Cost of sales (17,100 + (7,000 × 9/12) + 390 (W3) – 200 (W4) + 80 (W4)) (22,620)
HB2022
9: The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income 239
5,080
6,280
Workings
1 Group structure
Portus Co
1.4.X4
80%
Cost $13.8m
Sanus
Pre-acq'n reserves $9.1m
($10.6m – ($2.0m × 9/12))
or ($10.6m – $2.0m + ($2.0 × 3/12))
Total comp
Profit for the year income
$’000 $’000
580 880
× 20% × 20%
116 176
HB2022
240 Financial Reporting (FR)
(390)
1,500 Take to COS & 1,110
Take to Goodwill reserves Take to SOFP
4 Intragroup trading
(1) Cancel intragroup trading
$’000 $’000
$’000 $’000
2 If Portus Co (the parent) sold the inventories rather than Sanus Co, there would be no change
on the top half of the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income. However, in
the reconciliation of profit and total comprehensive income attributable to owners of the
parent and to non-controlling interests, unrealised profit would no longer affect profit
attributable to non-controlling interests. Non-controlling interests would therefore be:
Profit and total comprehensive income attributable to owners of the parent would therefore
decrease by the amount of the increase in the respective non-controlling interest, as they are
calculated as residual figures.
HB2022
9: The consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income 241
10
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Syllabus reference
no.
Explain and illustrate the effect of the disposal of a parent’s investment D2(h)
in a subsidiary in the parent’s individual financial statements and/or
those of the group, including as a discontinued operation (restricted to
disposals of the parent’s entire investment in the subsidiary)
10
Exam context
You may be asked to calculate the effects of the disposal of a subsidiary in an OT question in
Section A or B. You should be prepared for an OT question that asks you to calculate the gain or
loss on disposal, the amount that would be presented as the profit or loss from discontinued
operations in the statement of profit or loss, or to calculate balances in the consolidated
statement of financial position after taking account of a disposal.
In Section C, disposals could feature if you are asked to prepare consolidated financial
statements, or the disposal of a subsidiary could be an important reason for the difference
between ratios, if comparing consolidated financial statements across two different periods.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Disposals of subsidiaries
HB2022
244 Financial Reporting (FR)
Disposal
$
Fair value of consideration received X
Less carrying amount of investment disposed of (X)
Profit/(loss) X(X)
HB2022
10: Changes in group structures: disposals 245
$ $
Fair value of consideration received X
Less: Share of consolidated carrying amount at date control lost:
Net assets at date control lost X
Goodwill at date control lost X
Less non-controlling interests at date control lost (X)
(X)
Group profit/(loss) (recognise in CSPL) X/(X)
Pelmer Co acquired 80% of Symta Co’s 100,000 $1 shares on 1 January 20X2 for $600,000 when
the net assets of Symta Co were $410,000. In addition to its net assets, Symta Co had a brand
name valued at $50,000 which was recognised on acquisition. It is group policy to measure non-
controlling interests at fair value at acquisition. The fair value of the non-controlling interests in
Symta Co at acquisition was $150,000. No impairment has been necessary.
On 1 June 20X6, Pelmer Co disposed of its shareholding for $1,500,000. At that date, Symta Co’s
statement of financial position showed net assets with a carrying amount of $660,000. The value
of the brand name which is not recognised in the individual financial statements of Symta Co, has
not changed since acquisition. The individual financial statements of Pelmer Co do not include
any profit or loss on the dispoal of Symta Co.
HB2022
246 Financial Reporting (FR)
Solution
The summarised statements of profit or loss and other comprehensive income of Mart, Oat and
Pipe are shown below.
SUMMARISED STATEMENTS OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE
YEAR ENDED 30 APRIL 20X4
HB2022
10: Changes in group structures: disposals 247
Solution
1 Group profit on disposal of the shares in Pipe
Group structure
Mart
Oat Pipe
Calculate goodwill in Pipe (for inclusion in the group profit on disposal calculation)
Goodwill
$m
Consideration transferred 250
Non-controlling interests (20% × 300) 60
Fair value of identifiable net assets (300)
10
Calculate non-controlling interests at the disposal date (for inclusion in the group profit on
disposal calculation)
Non-controlling interests (SOFP)
$m
NCI at acquisition (20% × 300) 60
NCI share of post-acquisition reserves to disposal (20% × [370 – 300]) (note) 14
74
Note. In this question reserves were not provided. However, net assets at acquisition and
disposal were given. As net assets = equity, the movement in net assets will be the movement in
reserves (as there has been no share issue by Pipe).
HB2022
248 Financial Reporting (FR)
$m $m
Fair value of consideration received 330
Less share of consolidated carrying amount at date control
lost
Net assets 370
Goodwill 10
Less non-controlling interests (74)
(306)
Group profit on disposal 24
2 Consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended
30 April 20X4
Draw up a timeline to work out the treatment in the consolidated statement of profit or loss
and other comprehensive income (SPLOCI)
Oat was a subsidiary for the full year so should be consolidated for a full year. However, there
was a change in the shareholding in Pipe in the year as shown below.
1.5.X3 31.10.X3 30.4.X4
SPLOCI
Consolidate for 6/12
NCI 20% for 6/12
Had 80% of Pipe Sold Pipe
Note. Pro-rate Pipe as it was only a subsidiary for 6 months in the year (1.5.X3 – 31.10.X3).
In total comprehensive income:
Note. Pro-rate Pipe as it was only a subsidiary for 6 months in the year (1.5.X3 – 31.10.X3).
HB2022
10: Changes in group structures: disposals 249
$m
Revenue (800 + 140 + [6/12 × 230]) 1,055
Cost of sales and expenses (680 + 90 + [6/12 × 170]) (855)
Profit on disposal of share in subsidiary 24
Profit before tax 224
Income tax expense (30 + 15 + [6/12 × 20]) (55)
Profit for the year 169
Other comprehensive income for the year (net of tax)
2.2 The relationship between the profit or loss in the parent’s separate
financial statements and the group profit or loss on disposal
We have seen how to calculate the profit or loss on disposal of a subsidiary in the separate
financial statements of the parent and in the consolidated financial statements.
In the parent’s individual financial statements, the carrying amount of the subsidiary is not
changed to reflect the change in the net assets of the subsidiary after the date of acquisition. The
group financial statements do reflect the group share of the change in the subsidiary’s net assets
after the date of acquisition, hence the difference in the profit or loss on disposal.
The following example will help to demonstrate the relationship.
Using the information in Activity 1 Profit or loss on disposal of a subsidiary, we saw that the profit
on disposal in the separate financial statements of Pelmer Co was $900,000 and the profit on
disposal in the consolidated financial statements was $700,000.
HB2022
250 Financial Reporting (FR)
Solution
The investment in the Symta Co is held at its cost of $600,000 in the separate financial
statements of Pelmer Co. The carrying amount of the investment does not reflect the increase in
Symta Co’s net assets post acquisition. Symta Co’s net assets have increased from $410,000 at
acquisition to $660,000 at the date of disposal. The group share of this is $200,000 (80% ×
(660,000 – 410,000)), which is the same amount as the difference between the profit of $900,000
in the separate financial statements of Pelmer Co and the profit of $700,000 in the consolidated
financial statements.
Note. If the parent’s profit or loss on disposal has been recognised in the parent’s individual
financial statements, it will be included in the parent’s retained earnings on consolidation. In such
a case, an adjustment is needed to account for the parent’s share of the movement in the net
assets of the subsidiary between the date of acquisition and the date of disposal.
HB2022
10: Changes in group structures: disposals 251
Disposals
Disposal
Full disposal
HB2022
252 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
10: Changes in group structures: disposals 253
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section A Q5
Section A Q19
Further reading
The Study support resources section of the ACCA website does not include any specific articles
relating to disposal, but the following provides a useful reminder about important concepts such
as pro-rating in the consolidated statement of profit or loss which are relevant to this Chapter.
• Watch your step
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
254 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000 $’000
Consideration transferred 1,500
Less share of consolidated
carrying amount at date
control lost:
Net assets (660 + 50) 710
Goodwill (W1) 290
Non-controlling interests
(W2) (200)
(800)
Gain 700
Workings
1 Goodwill
$’000
Consideration 600
NCI at fair value 150
Less: Net assets acquisition 410
Fair value adjustment 50
290
2 Non-controlling interests
$’000
NCI at acquisition 150
Add NCI share of post-acquisition reserves
(20% × (660 – 410) 50
200
$’000
Consideration received 1,500
Cost of investment (600)
Profit on disposal 900
HB2022
10: Changes in group structures: disposals 255
11
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Exam context
When investing in another company, a parent may not wish to buy a controlling stake. It may
instead buy a smaller stake but still obtain significant influence over another entity, resulting in
the group having an associate. Accounting for associates may feature in an objective test
question in Section A or B of the Financial Reporting exam. Section C of the exam may require you
to prepare and/or interpret group financial statements that contain an associate. The approach
to accounting for an associate is very different to that for a subsidiary and you must be clear on
the correct approach.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Associates and joint arrangements
Significant influence
HB2022
258 Financial Reporting (FR)
1.1 Presumptions
If an investor holds, directly or indirectly:
HB2022
11: Accounting for associates 259
3 Accounting treatment
3.1 Consolidated financial statements
An investment in an associate is accounted for in consolidated financial statements using the
equity method.
Equity method: ‘A method of accounting whereby the investment is initially measured at cost
KEY
TERM and adjusted thereafter for the post-acquisition change in the investor’s share of the investee’s
net assets. The investor’s profit or loss includes its share of the investee’s profit or loss and the
investor’s other comprehensive income includes its share of the investee’s other comprehensive
income.’ (IAS 28: para. 3)
Essential reading
Chapter 11, Section 1 of the Essential reading provides more detail on the requirement to apply
equity accounting.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
260 Financial Reporting (FR)
Non-current assets
Investment in associate (Working) X
Working
Cost of associate X
Share of post-acquisition retained reserves X/(X)
Less impairment losses on associate to date (X)
Less group share of unrealised profit (X)
X
Profit or loss $
Share of profit of associate:
A’s profit for the year × Group % X
Less Impairment losses (X)
Less Group share of unrealised profit (X)
Other comprehensive income
Share of other comprehensive income of the associate
A’s other comprehensive income for the year × Group % X
Holly Co owns 35% of Hock Co, its only associate. During the year to 31 December 20X4, Hock Co
made a profit for the year of $721,000. Holly Co considers its investment in Hock to have suffered
a $20,000 impairment during the year.
Required
At what amount should ‘share of profit of associate’ be stated in the consolidated statement of
profit or loss of Holly Co for the year ended 31 December 20X4?
$
HB2022
11: Accounting for associates 261
• A downstream transaction occurs when a parent sells goods to an associate. The parent is the
seller and therefore earns the unrealised profit. The associate is the buyer and therefore holds
the inventory at the year end. As the inventory of the associate is not separately presented in
the group financial statements, the adjustment is made to investment in associate and not to
inventory. The adjustment required to eliminate the unrealised profit is:
Group % × unrealised
DEBIT Cost of sales (SOPL) profit
Group % ×
CREDIT Investment in associate(SOFP) unrealised profit
Beta purchased a 60% holding in Delta’s ordinary shares on 1 January 20X0 for $6.1 million when
the retained earnings of Delta were $3.6 million. The retained earnings of Delta at 31 December
20X4 were $10.6 million. Since acquisition, there has been no impairment of the goodwill in Delta.
Beta also has a 30% holding in Kappa’s ordinary shares, which it acquired on 1 July 20X1 for $4.1
million when the retained earnings of Kappa were $6.2 million. The retained earnings of Kappa at
31 December 20X4 were $9.2 million.
An impairment test conducted at the year end revealed that the investment in the associate
(Kappa) was impaired by $500,000.
During the year, Kappa sold goods to Beta for $3 million at a profit margin of 20%. One-third of
these goods remained in Beta’s inventories at the year end. The retained earnings of Beta at 31
December 20X4 were $41.6 million.
Required
1 State the accounting adjustment required in respect of the unrealised profit on the sale of
goods from Kappa to Beta.
2 Calculate the following amounts for inclusion in the consolidated statement of financial
position of the Beta group as at 31 December 20X4:
(a) Investment in associate
HB2022
262 Financial Reporting (FR)
Solution
At 31 December 20X4, the statements of financial position of Portus Co, Sanus Co and Allus Co
were as follows:
HB2022
11: Accounting for associates 263
(1) On 1 April 20X4, Portus Co purchased an 80% holding in Sanus Co for $13.8 million in cash.
Sanus Co’s total comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X4 was $2.0
million, accruing evenly over the year. Sanus Co did not pay any dividends in the year.
(2) Portus Co also acquired a 30% holding in Allus Co on 1 July 20X4 for 500,000 of its own
shares. The stock market value of Portus Co’s shares at the date of this share exchange was
$9.40 each. Portus Co has not yet recorded the investment in Allus Co. Allus Co’s reserves
were $8.6 million on 1 July 20X4.
(3) At the date of acquisition, the fair value of Sanus Co’s assets were equal to their carrying
amounts, with the exception of the items listed below which exceeded their carrying amounts
as follows:
$’000
Inventories 300
Plant and equipment (10-year remaining useful life) 1,200
1,500
Sanus Co has not adjusted the carrying amounts as a result of the fair value exercise. The
inventories were sold by Sanus Co before the year end.
(4) The non-controlling interest in Sanus Co is to be valued at its fair value of $3.2 million at the
date of acquisition.
An impairment test conducted at the year end revealed that the consolidated goodwill of
Sanus Co was impaired by $150,000.
Additionally, an impairment loss of $40,000 is to be recognised in respect of Portus Co’s
investment in Allus Co in the group financial statements.
(5) On 1 October 20X4, Sanus Co sold goods to Portus Co for $200,000 at a gross profit margin
of 40%. The goods were still in Portus Co’s inventories at the year end. No other sales were
made between Portus Co and Sanus Co in the year.
After the acquisition, Portus Co sold goods to Allus Co for $400,000 at a mark-up on cost of
25%. A quarter of these goods remained in Allus Co’s inventories at the year end.
(6) At 31 December 20X4, Portus Co’s current account with Sanus Co was $130,000 (credit). This
did not agree with the equivalent balance in Sanus Co’s books due to cash in transit of
$70,000 which was not received by Sanus Co until after the year end.
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of the Portus Group as at 31 December
20X4.
Solution
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X4
HB2022
264 Financial Reporting (FR)
Non-current assets
Goodwill (W2)
Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Cash
Reserves (W4)
Non-current liabilities
Long-term borrowings
Current liabilities
HB2022
11: Accounting for associates 265
1.4.X4
80%
Cost $13.8m
Sanus Co Allus Co
Pre-acq'n reserves $9.1m
($10.6m – ($2.0m × 9/12))
or ($10.6m – $2.0m + ($2.0 × 3/12))
2 Goodwill
$’000 $’000
(13,000)
4,000
3,850
3 Investment in associate
$’000
Cost of associate
HB2022
266 Financial Reporting (FR)
Per question
Pre-acquisition reserves
Sanus Co
Allus Co
Allus Co
$’000
NCI at acquisition (W2) 3,200
NCI share of post-acquisition reserves (W4) 206
NCI share of impairment losses (W2) 30
3,376
At acquisition At year
date Movement end
$’000 $’000 $’000
Inventories 300 (300) -
Plant and equipment 1,200 (90)* 1,110
*Extra depreciation (1,200 × 10% × 9/12) 1,500 (390) 1,110
Take to Take to
Goodwill COS & SOFP
HB2022
11: Accounting for associates 267
7 Intragroup trading
(1) Cash in transit
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Group cash 70
CREDIT Trade receivables 70
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Group revenue 200
CREDIT Group purchases (cost of sales) 200
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Group payables 130
CREDIT Group receivables 130
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Cost of sales (& retained earnings) (of Sanus Co
the seller) 80
CREDIT Group inventories 80
Allus Co:
Downstream transaction. Profit element in inventories:
Associate share:
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Cost of sales (and retained earnings) (of Portus
Co the seller)
The statements of profit or loss and other comprehensive income of Portus Co, its subsidiary
Sanus Co and its associate Allus Co for the year ended 31 December 20X4 are as follows:
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
HB2022
268 Financial Reporting (FR)
(1) On 1 April 20X4, Portus Co purchased an 80% holding in Sanus Co for $13.8 million in cash.
Sanus Co’s total comprehensive income for the year ended 31 December 20X4 was $2.0
million, accruing evenly over the year. Sanus Co did not pay any dividends in the year.
(2) Portus Co also acquired a 30% holding in Allus Co on 1 July 20X4 for 500,000 of its own
shares. The stock market value of Portus Co’s shares at the date of this share exchange was
$9.40 each. Portus Co has not yet recorded the investment in Allus Co. Allus Co ‘s reserves
were $8.6 million on 1 July 20X4.
(3) At the date of acquisition, the fair value of Sanus Co’s assets were equal to their carrying
amounts, with the exception of the items listed below which exceeded their carrying amounts
as follows:
$’000
Inventories 300
Plant and equipment (10-year remaining useful life) 1,200
1,500
Sanus Co has not adjusted the carrying amounts as a result of the fair value exercise. The
inventories were sold by Sanus Co before the year end.
(4) The non-controlling interest in Sanus Co is to be valued at its fair value of $3.2m at the date
of acquisition. An impairment test conducted at the year end revealed that the consolidated
goodwill of Sanus Co was impaired by $150,000. Additionally, an impairment loss of $40,000
is to be recognised in respect of Portus Co’s investment in Allus Co in the group financial
statements.
(5) On 1 October 20X4, Sanus Co sold goods to Portus Co for $200,000 at a gross profit margin
of 40%. The goods were still in Portus Co’s inventories at the year end. No other sales were
made between Portus Co and Sanus Co in the year. After the acquisition, Portus Co sold
goods to Allus Co for $400,000 at a mark-up on cost of 25%. A quarter of these goods
remained in Allus Co’s inventories at the year end.
(6) At 31 December 20X4, Portus Co’s current account with Sanus Co was $130,000 (credit). This
did not agree with the equivalent balance in Sanus Co’s books due to cash in transit of
$70,000 which was not received by Sanus Co until after the year end.
HB2022
11: Accounting for associates 269
Solution
PORTUS GROUP
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR
THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X4
$’000
Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Expenses
Finance costs
HB2022
270 Financial Reporting (FR)
Workings
1 Timeline
1.1.X4 1.4.X4 1.7.X4 31.12.X4
PUP
adjustment
$’000 $’000
× 20% × 20%
HB2022
11: Accounting for associates 271
Chapter 11, Section 2 of the Essential reading contains a further Activity to allow you to practise
preparing consolidated financial statements containing an Associate.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
272 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
11: Accounting for associates 273
1. Definition
An associate relationship exists where there is significant influence. Significant influence is ‘the
power to participate in the financial and operating policy decisions of the investee but is not
control or joint control over those policies’ (IAS 28: para. 3). This is presumed where a parent holds
20% or more of voting shares, but also can be demonstrated in other ways.
3. Accounting treatment
In the group financial statements, an associate is equity accounted as a one-line entry
‘investment in associate’ in the statement of financial position and the share of the associate’s
profit and other comprehensive income are shown on two separate lines in the statement of profit
or loss and other comprehensive income.
To adjust for unrealised profits in inventory in an upstream transaction:
$ $
DEBIT Group share of profit in associate Group % × unrealised
(SOPL) profit
Group % × unrealised
CREDIT Inventory (SOFP) profit
$ $
Group % × unrealised
DEBIT Cost of sales (SOPL) profit
Group % × unrealised
CREDIT Investment in associate (SOFP) profit
HB2022
274 Financial Reporting (FR)
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section A Q11
Section C Q35 Hever Co
HB2022
11: Accounting for associates 275
$’000
Cost of associate 4,100
Share of post-acquisition retained earnings (9,200 – 6,200) × 30% 900
5,000
Less impairment losses on associate to date (500)
4,5000
HB2022
276 Financial Reporting (FR)
Note. Even though the associate was the seller for the intragroup trading, the group share
has already been reflected in arriving at the PUP of $60,000 and is therefore adjusted in
the parent’s column so as not to multiply it by the group share twice.
Working
Group structure
Beta
Delta Kappa
$’000
Non-current assets
82,654
Current assets
HB2022
11: Accounting for associates 277
10,090
92,684
67,638
71,014
Non-current liabilities
Current liabilities
92,684
Workings
1 Group structure
Portus Co
1.4.X4 1.7.X4
80% 30%
Cost $13.8m (W8) $4.7m
Sanus Co Allus
Pre-acq'n reserves $9.1m $8.6m
($10.6m – ($2.0m × 9/12))
or ($10.6m – $2.0m + ($2.0 × 3/12))
2 Goodwill
$’000 $’000
HB2022
278 Financial Reporting (FR)
(13,000)
4,000
3,850
3 Investment in associate
$’000
4,834
4 Consolidated reserves
1,030 600
Allus Co (40)
54,938
$’000
NCI at acquisition (W2) 3,200
HB2022
11: Accounting for associates 279
At acquisition At year
date Movement end
$’000 $’000 $’000
Inventories 300 (300) -
Plant and equipment 1,200 (90)* 1,110
*Extra depreciation (1,200 × 10% × 9/12) 1,500 (390) 1,110
Take to
COS & Take to
Goodwill reserves SOFP
7 Intragroup trading
(1) Cash in transit
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Group cash 70
CREDIT Trade receivables 70
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Group revenue 200
CREDIT Group purchases (cost of sales) 200
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Group payables 130
CREDIT Group receivables 130
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Cost of sales (& retained earnings) (of Sanus Co
the seller) 80
CREDIT Group inventories 80
Allus Co:
Downstream transaction. Profit element in inventories: $400,000 × 25/125 × 1/4 = $20,000
Associate share: $20,000 × 30% = $6,000
HB2022
280 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000
Cost of sales (17,100 + (7,000 × 9/12) + (W6) 390 – (W7) 200 + (W7) 80 + (W7) 6)) (22,626)
5,229
6,474
HB2022
11: Accounting for associates 281
PUP
adjustment
$’000 $’000
580 880
× 20% × 20%
116 176
HB2022
282 Financial Reporting (FR)
Chapter overview
cess skills
Exam suc
Answer planning
c FR skills C
n Specifi o
tio
rr req
a
ec ui
of
m
t i rem
or
nt
inf
erp ents
ng
Approach to Application
reta
agi
tion
Spreadsheet Interpretation
l y si s
skills
Go od
skills
ana
ti m
Approach
c al
em
to Case
e ri
OTQs
an
um
ag
tn
em
en
en
t ci
Effi
Effective writing
and presentation
Introduction
Section C of the FR exam will have two longer questions worth a total of 40 marks. One question
will require you to prepare extracts from the financial statements (this may be for a single entity
or for a group, and it may be any of the primary financial statements). You will be required to use
a spreadsheet to prepare your answer to the accounts preparation question and must be
prepared to use spreadsheets effectively in your exam.
HB2022
The ACCA FR Examining Team has stated that some candidates are poorly prepared to use the
spreadsheet software used in the FR exam. It is essential that you attempt questions using the
exam software as part of your preparation for the FR exam. You should ensure that you use the
ACCA Practice Platform (www.accaglobal.com) to practice exam standard questions prior to the
exam.
HB2022
284 Financial Reporting (FR)
Skill activity
STEP 1 Understanding the data in the question.
Where a question includes a significant amount of data, read the requirements carefully to make sure that
you understand clearly what the question is asking you to do. You can use the highlighting function to pull
out important data from the question. Use the data provided to think about what formula you will need to
use. For example, if the company calculates the allowance for receivables as a percentage of the balance,
use the percentage function.
The question scenario will appear here. The question requirement will appear here.
Edit Format
100%
11
A1
A B C D E F G H I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 3: Using spreadsheets effectively 285
Viagem Co Greca Co
$’000 $’000
Revenue 64,600 38,000
Cost of sales (51,200) (26,000)
Gross profit 13,400 12,000
Distribution costs (1,600) (1,800)
Administrative expenses (3,800) (2,400)
Investment income 500 –
Finance costs (420) –
Profit before tax 8,080 7,800
Income tax expense (2,800) (1,600)
Profit for the year 5,280 6,200
Equity as at 1 October 20X1
Equity shares of $1 each 30,000 10,000
Retained earnings 54,000 35,000
HB2022
286 Financial Reporting (FR)
Required
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 3: Using spreadsheets effectively 287
100%
11
C1
A B C D E F
1
2 (a) Goodwill calculaon $΄000 $΄000
3
4 Consideraon transferred:
5 Shares
6 Deferred consideraon
7
8
9
10
11
Columns C and D have been highlighted. At this point, it is a sensible idea to format the cells so
that they show thousand dividers. This makes the numbers easier to read and means you are less
likely to start answering in, for example thousands and later change to millions or full numbers,
which can be confusing.
Edit Format
100%
11
C4 45200 General
A B C
Custom D E F
1 0.00
2 (a) Goodwill calculaon $΄000
#,##0
$΄000
3
#,##0.00
4 Consideraon transferred:
5 Shares
6 Deferred consideraon
By highlighting the whole two columns, this speeds up the formatting process. This is where you
will insert the figures.
If you feel you will need more columns highlighting and formatting, then select more columns.
Once you have completed part (a) of the question, the second part calls for a proforma of a
consolidated statement of profit or loss. You may also want to consider setting up proforma some
of the sub-calculations you may require such as non-controlling interests.
HB2022
288 Financial Reporting (FR)
C13 =C11-C12
A B C D
9 (b) Consolidated statement of profit or loss
10 $΄000 $΄000
11 Revenue 85,900
12 Cost of sales 64,250
13 Gross profit =C11-C12
14 Distribuon costs
15 Administraon costs
16
Here, the gross profit is calculated by subtracting the cost of sales figure from the revenue figure.
This does three things:
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 3: Using spreadsheets effectively 289
Correct interpretation of The question is asking for a calculation of goodwill and then
requirements preparation of the consolidated statement of profit or loss. It is
important to make sure that all parts of the question are
answered, and the relevant information taken from the
information given in the question.
Efficient numerical analysis The answer needs to be presented neatly, and all information
easily readable by the Examining team.
HB2022
290 Financial Reporting (FR)
Good time management The question is worth 20 marks but split into two sections. The
calculation of goodwill is worth six marks, so you should allow
no more than 10–11 minutes for this section, and then move
onto the consolidated statement of profit or loss. It is
important not to linger too long on one section as you may
miss easy marks in the next question at the expense of
spending longer than allowed to gain an additional mark or
two.
Most important action points to apply to your next question: show all workings.
Summary
Section C of the FR exam will contain questions that require proformas and calculations to be
carried out using the spreadsheet facility in the exam.
Make sure you are familiar with the tool (the ACCA website allows access both in completing an
online example paper, and also just to practice using the spreadsheet functionality).
It is also important to be aware that in the exam you are dealing with detailed calculations under
timed exam conditions and time management is absolutely crucial. You therefore need to ensure
that you:
• Interpret the date given in the question correctly.
• Use clear proformas (where appropriate) for your workings and your financial statement
extracts.
• Use spreadsheet formula to perform basic calculations.
• Show clear workings using a combination of formula and linking separate workings (such as
goodwill calculation that can be linked into your statement of financial position).
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 3: Using spreadsheets effectively 291
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Exam context
Financial instruments is frequently examined in all sections of the Financial Reporting exam. It is a
technical area which students sometimes find challenging. The December 2018 Examiner’s report
stated that students need to avoid a superficial understanding of this subject area and the June
2019 Examiner’s report identified that financial instruments is one of the more technical areas of
the course that students struggle with.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Financial instruments
Measurement
HB2022
294 Financial Reporting (FR)
2 Classification
2.1 Definitions
In order to understand how to account for financial instruments, we must first understand what we
mean by financial instruments.
Financial instruments
Financial instrument: Any contract that gives rise to both a financial asset of one entity and a
KEY
TERM financial liability or equity instrument of another entity.
Financial asset: Any asset that is:
(a) Cash
(b) An equity instrument of another entity
(c) A contractual right to receive cash or another financial asset from another entity; or to
exchange financial instruments with another entity under conditions that are potentially
favourable to the entity.
Financial liability: Any liability that is:
(a) A contractual obligation:
(i) To deliver cash or another financial asset to another entity, or
(ii) To exchange financial instruments with another entity under conditions that are
potentially unfavourable.
Equity instrument: Any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity
after deducting all of its liabilities. (IAS 32: para. 11)
HB2022
12: Financial instruments 295
Solution
Although we may first think of shares as equity, in substance, redeemable preference shares meet
the definition of a financial liability as they contain an obligation to pay a fixed amount of interest
and are redeemable at a fixed future date. Accordingly, the redeemable shares will be reported
under non-current liabilities in the statement of financial position (unless they are repayable
within one year, in which case they are considered to be current liabilities).
IAS 32 requires the component parts of the compound instrument, ie the liability element and the
equity element, to be classified separately. (IAS 32: para. 28)
The following method should be used to initially measure the liability and equity elements:
Rathbone Co issues 2,000 convertible bonds at the start of 20X2. The bonds have a three-year
term, and are issued at par with a face value of $1,000 per bond, giving total proceeds of
$2,000,000. Interest is payable annually in arrears at a nominal annual interest rate of 6%. Each
bond is convertible into 250 ordinary shares.
HB2022
296 Financial Reporting (FR)
Solution
Step 2: Calculate the carrying amount of the liability element (which is the
present value of the future cash flows discounted using the 9% interest
rate for equivalent bonds without conversion rights)
PV of the principal
PV of the interest
Step 3:
Calculate the residual value of the equity component
(balancing figure)
HB2022
12: Financial instruments 297
Chapter 12, Section 1 of the Essential reading provides more detail and a further activity relating
to compound financial instruments.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
Shares On issue
3.2 Derecognition
A financial instrument should be derecognised as follows:
You need to apply the principles of derecognition only in respect of the factoring of trade
receivables.
HB2022
298 Financial Reporting (FR)
Freddo Co sold its trade receivables balance of $300,000 to a debt factor for $270,000 on 1 July
20X1.
The factor charges interest of 5% per annum on amounts advanced.
The factor collected $150,000 of the amounts due on 31 December 20X1. No other amounts were
collected in 20X1, but the amounts due are still considered recoverable.
Under the terms of the agreement, any unpaid debts will be returned to Freddo Co for a cash
repayment on 1 July 20X2.
Required
Explain how Freddo Co should account for the debt factoring arrangement as at 30 June 20X2.
Solution
HB2022
12: Financial instruments 299
Amortised cost: The amount at which the financial asset (financial liability) is measured at
KEY
TERM initial recognition, minus the principal repayments, plus (minus) the cumulative amortisation
using the effective interest.
Effective interest rate: The rate that exactly discounts estimated future cash receipts
(payments) through the expected life of the financial asset (financial liability) to the gross
carrying amount of a financial asset (amortised cost of a financial liability).
(IFRS 9: Appendix A)
(b) Held to collect Fair value + transaction Fair value through other
contractual cash flows and costs comprehensive income (with
to sell; and cash flows are reclassification to P/L on
solely principal and interest derecognition)
NB: interest revenue
calculated on amortised
cost basis recognised in P/L
HB2022
300 Financial Reporting (FR)
Essential reading
In the Essential reading, Chapter 12, Section 2 provides more detail on the business model test
and Chapter 12, Section 3 provides more detail on the contractual cash flow test.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
An entity holds an investment in shares in another company, which cost $45,000. At the date of
purchase the election was made to record changes in value in other comprehensive income for
this asset. At the year end, their value has risen to $49,000.
Required
How should the increase in value be accounted for?
Solution
The following adjustment would need to be made in an accounts preparation question:
$ $
DEBIT Investment in shares ($49,000 – $45,000) 4,000
CREDIT Other comprehensive income (and other
components of equity in SOFP) 4,000
HB2022
12: Financial instruments 301
Grafton Co’s draft statement of financial position as at 31 March 20X8 shows financial assets at
fair value through profit or loss with a carrying amount of $9.5 million as at 1 April 20X7.
These financial assets are held in a fund whose value changes directly in proportion to a specified
market index. At 1 April 20X7, the relevant index was 1,100 and at 31 March 20X8, it was 1,187.
Required
What amount of gain or loss should be recognised at 31 March 20X8 in respect of these assets?
$827,000 gain
$751,000 gain
$1,000,000 loss
$827,000 loss
$ Accounting entries:
DEBIT (↑) Financial asset
CREDIT (↓) Cash
Balance b/d X (if initial recognition at start of year)
DEBIT (↑) Financial asset
Finance income (effective interest × b/d) X SPL CREDIT (↑) Finance income
DEBIT (↑) Cash
Interest received (coupon × par value) (X) CREDIT (↓) Financial asset
Balance c/d X SOFP
Zebidee Co purchases a deep discount bond with a par value of $500,000 on 1 January 20X1 for
proceeds of $440,000 with the intention of holding it until the redemption value is received.
HB2022
302 Financial Reporting (FR)
Solution
$ $ $
b/d at 1 January
(
Cash received
c/d at 31 December
Essential reading
Chapter 11, Section 4 of the Essential reading provides further activities relating to the
measurement of amortised cost financial assets.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
2 Financial liabilities at fair Fair value (transaction costs Fair value through profit or
value through profit or loss expensed in P/L) loss
• ‘Held for trading’ (short-
term profit making)
• Derivatives that are
liabilities
HB2022
12: Financial instruments 303
Dire Co issued 3,000 convertible bonds at par on 1 January 20X1. The bonds are redeemable on
31 December 20X4 at their par value of $100 per bond.
The bonds pay interest annually in arrears at an interest rate (based on nominal value) of 5%.
Each bond can be converted at the maturity date into five $1 shares.
The prevailing market interest rate for four-year bonds that have no right of conversion is 8%.
The present value at 8% of $1 receivable at end of each year is as follows:
Year 1 0.926
Year 2 0.857
Year 3 0.794
Year 4 0.735
Required
Show the accounting treatment of the:
1 Bond at inception
2 Finance cost for the year ended 31 December 20X1 and financial liability component at 31
December 20X1 using amortised cost
Note. The examining team has stated that they will not test the treatment of the equity
component after inception.
Solution
1
Bond at inception:
At 1 January 20X1 $
Non-current liabilities
HB2022
304 Financial Reporting (FR)
2
Finance cost:
At 31 December 20X1 $
Non-current liabilities
Working
Amortised cost financial liability
HB2022
12: Financial instruments 305
Chapter 12, Section 5 of the Essential reading includes detail on the disclosure requirements of
IFRS 7.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
306 Financial Reporting (FR)
• When entity becomes party to • Financial assets – rights to • In substance a genuine sale
contractual provisions of the cashflows expire or – Derecognise trade receivable
instrument • Substantially all risks and • In substance a secured loan
• Usually: rewards transferred – Continue to recognise a
– Trade receivable/payable • Financial liabilities – trade receivable and
◦ On transfer of promised discharged, cancelled, expires recognise a financial liability
goods/services
– Loans
◦ On issue
– Shares
◦ On issue
HB2022
12: Financial instruments 307
HB2022
308 Financial Reporting (FR)
2. Classifications
Financial assets are cash, the right to receive cash under a contract or derivative assets. Similarly,
financial liabilities are an obligation to deliver cash under a contract or derivative liabilities.
Financial instruments are classified in accordance with their substance. Redeemable preference
shares are, in substance, debt and are shown as a non-current liability in the statement of
financial position.
Compound instruments must be split into its financial liability and equity components. This is
done by measuring the financial liability (debt) component, first by discounting the debt’s cash
flows, and then assigning the residual cash received to the equity component.
4. Measurement
Financial assets are measured depending upon their classification.
Financial assets that are investments in debt instruments held for the purpose of collecting cash
flows that are solely interest and principal cash flows are held at amortised cost.
Investments in debt instruments held to collect cash flows that are solely payments of principals
and interest and the intention is to sell the instrument are accounted for at fair value through
other comprehensive income (FVTOCI) with no reclassification to profit or loss.
All other financial instruments (including all derivatives) are held at fair value through profit or loss
(FVTPL). An exception is permitted for investments in equity instruments of another entity (eg an
investment in shares) that are not held for trading which can be accounted for as FVTOCI with
reclassification to profit or loss if an election is made to use that treatment at the original date of
purchase.
Most financial liabilities are accounted for as amortised cost.
Financial liabilities held for trading are accounted for as FVTPL.
HB2022
12: Financial instruments 309
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section A Q15
Section C Q40 Financial assets and liabilities
Further reading
There is a useful article regarding this subject on the ACCA website:
Financial Instruments
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
310 Financial Reporting (FR)
£
Step 1: Calculate the value of the whole instrument 2,000,000
Step 2: Calculate the carrying amount of the liability element (which is the
present value of the future cash flows discounted using the 9% interest
rate for equivalent bonds without conversion rights)
1,544,000
PV of the principal ($2m × 0.772) 303,720
PV of the interest ($120,000* × 2.531) 1,847,720
Step 3:
Calculate the residual value of the equity component
(balancing figure) 152,280
$’000
$9,500 × 1,187/1,100 10,251
Carrying amount (9,500)
Gain 751
$ $ $
b/d at 1 January
(440,000 + 5,867) 445,867 462,333 480,330
HB2022
12: Financial instruments 311
$ $ $
1 Bond at inception:
At 1 January 20X1 $
Non-current liabilities
Working
Financial liability component
49,680
270,180
2
2 Finance cost:
At 31 December 20X1 $
HB2022
312 Financial Reporting (FR)
Non-current liabilities
Working
Amortised cost financial liability
HB2022
12: Financial instruments 313
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Explain the exemption from the recognition criteria for leases in B6(b)
the records of the lessee.
Exam context
Leasing is an important area both in the Financial Reporting exam and in the wider business
context. You will be considering leasing from the perspective of the lessee only for your Financial
Reporting exam. It is vital that you understand how to account for right of use assets and lease
liabilities before going on to account for sale and leaseback transactions. Question practice is key
in order to consolidate your knowledge and application in this important topic.
Leasing questions could be asked in any section of the FR exam. In Section C questions, you
should be prepared to see leasing as an adjustment in a single entity accounts preparation
question or you may be asked to comment on the impact of leasing as opposed to the outright
purchase of assets as part of an interpretation of financial statements question, including the
statement of cash flows.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Leases (IFRS 16)
Definitions
Right-of-use asset
Transfer is NOT in
substance a sale
HB2022
316 Financial Reporting (FR)
2 Identifying a lease
2.1 Definitions
Lease: A contract is, or contains, a lease if there is an identifiable asset and the contract
KEY
TERM conveys the right to control the use of the identified asset for a period of time in exchange for
consideration (IFRS 16: para. 9).
Underlying asset: An asset that is the subject of a lease, for which the right to use that asset
has been provided by a lessor to a lessee (IFRS 16: Appendix A).
The contract has to meet the definition of a lease contract to be within the scope of IFRS 16. A
lessee does not control the use of an identified asset if the lessor can substitute the underlying
asset for another asset during the lease term and would benefit economically from doing so.
Some contracts may contain elements that are not leases, such as service contracts. These must
be separated out from the lease and accounted for separately (IFRS 16: para. 13).
Entity must have the • Stated in the contract • Period of use in time or
right to: • May be part of a larger in units produced
• Obtain substantially all asset • Lease may only be for
economic benefits from • The lessor has no a portion of the term
the use of the asset; and substitution rights (a of the contract (if the
• Direct the use of the similar asset cannot be right to control the
asset used instead of the asset exists for part of
original leased asset) the term)
Coketown Council has entered into a five-year contract with Carefleet Co, under which Carefleet
Co supplies the council with ten vehicles for the purposes of community transport. Carefleet Co
owns the relevant vehicle, all ten of which are specified in the contract. Coketown Council
determines the routes taken for community transport and the charges and eligibility for discounts.
HB2022
13: Leasing 317
Solution
This is a lease. There is an identifiable asset, the ten vehicles specified in the contract. The council
has a right to use the vehicles for the period of the contract. Carefleet Co does not have the right
to substitute any of the vehicles unless they are being serviced or repaired. Therefore, Coketown
Council would need to recognise a right-of-use asset and a lease liability in its statement of
financial position.
Activity 1: Is it a lease?
Outandabout Co provides tours around places of interest in the tourist city of Sightsee. While
these tours are mainly within the city, it does the occasional day trip to visit tourist sites further
away. Outandabout Co has entered into a three-year contract with Fastcoach Co for the use of
one of its coaches for this purpose. The coach must seat 50 people, but Fastcoach Co can use
any of its 50-seater coaches when required.
Required
Explain whether this agreement constitutes a lease.
Solution
HB2022
318 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
13: Leasing 319
The current liability at 31.12.X1 is calculated as the difference between the liability at 31.12.X1 and
the liability at 31.12.X2.
Alternatively, if payments are made in advance, there will be no lease payment in the first period
and interest is simply applied to the PVFLP on initial recognition of the liability. In subsequent
periods, interest is calculated after deducting the instalment payment as follows:
Payments in advance
$
1.1.X1 Lease liability (PVFLP) X
1.1.X1–31.12.X1 Interest at x% X
31.12.X1 Liability c/d X
Instalment in advance
1.1.X2 (current liability) (X)
Bento Co enters into a contract to gain the right to use an asset from 1 January 20X1. The
contract meets the definition of a lease under IFRS 16. The terms of the lease require Bento Co to
pay a non-refundable deposit of $575 followed by seven annual instalments of $2,000 payable in
arrears. The present value of the future lease payments on 1 January 20X1 is $10,000.
The interest rate implicit in the lease is 9.2%.
Required
1 What is the interest charge in the statement of profit or loss of Bento Co for the year ended 31
December 20X1?
$
2 What are the current and non-current liability balances included in the statement of financial
position of Bento Co as at 31 December 20X1?
Current liability $1,179; Non-current liability $7,741
Current liability $Nil; Non-current liability $8,920
Current liability $2,000; Non-current liability $6,920
Current liability $Nil; Non-current liability $7,741
HB2022
320 Financial Reporting (FR)
The key is the right to control the use of the asset. The right to control the use of an identified
asset depends on the lessee having:
(a) The right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefits from use of the identified asset;
and
(b) The right to direct the use of the identified asset. This arises if either:
(i) The customer has the right to direct how and for what purpose the asset is used during
the whole of its period of use; or
(ii) The relevant decisions about use are predetermined and the customer can operate the
asset without the supplier having the right to change those operating instructions, or the
customer designed the asset in a way that predetermines how and for what purpose the
asset will be used throughout the period of use.
$m $m
Initial measurement of lease liability X
Payments made before or at commencement of lease X
Less incentives received (X)
X
Initial direct costs X
PV of costs of dismantling, removing and restoring the site X
Right-of-use asset X
At the commencement date, recognise a right-of-use asset, representing the right to use the
underlying asset and a lease liability representing the company’s obligation to make lease
payments
HB2022
13: Leasing 321
5 Presentation
5.1 Statement of financial position
Right-of-use assets
Right-of-use assets should be disclosed separately from other assets, either as a separate line on
the statement of financial position or separately within the notes.
Right-of-use assets which qualify as investment property are an exception; they should be
presented within investment property in the statement of financial position.
Lease liabilities
Lease liabilities should be disclosed separately from other liabilities, either in the statement of
financial position or in the notes.
The balance remaining at the year-end needs to be split between current liabilities and non-
current liabilities. (IFRS 16 does not require this, but this should be in accordance with IAS 1
Presentation of Financial Statements.)
Non-current liabilities
Lease liabilities X
Current liabilities
Lease liabilities X
HB2022
322 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Interest expense on lease liabilities X
Activity 3: Alpha Co
Alpha Co makes up its accounts to 31 December each year. It enters an agreement, which meets
the definition of a lease under IFRS 16, for the right to use an item of equipment with the following
terms:
Required
1 What is the carrying amount of the right-of-use asset in the statement of financial position of
Alpha Co as at 31 December 20X1?
$8,000
$6,460
$6,000
$8,075
2 What is the non-current liability balance in the statement of financial position as at 31
December 20X1?
$4,075
$4,804
$6,804
$6,075
HB2022
13: Leasing 323
Activity 4: Oscar Co
Oscar Co is preparing its financial statements for the year ended 30 June 20X6. On 1 May 20X6,
Oscar made a payment of $32,000 for an eight-month lease of a milling machine. Oscar has
elected to utilise any lease exemptions available.
Required
What amount would be charged to Oscar Co’s statement of profit or loss for the year ended 30
June 20X6 in respect of this transaction?
Solution
HB2022
324 Financial Reporting (FR)
Stage 1: Calculate total gain = fair value (= proceeds) less carrying amount
The right-of-use asset continues to be depreciated as normal, although a revision of its remaining
useful life may be necessary to restrict it to the lease term.
Activity 5: Wigton Co
On 1 April 20X2, Wigton Co bought an injection moulding machine for $600,000. The carrying
amount of the machine as at 31 March 20X3 was $500,000. On 1 April 20X3, Wigton Co sold it to
Whitehaven Co for $740,000, its fair value. Wigton Co immediately leased the machine back for
five years, the remainder of its useful life, at $160,000 per annum payable in arrears. The present
value of the future lease payments is $700,000 and the transaction satisfies the IFRS 15 criteria to
be recognised as a sale.
HB2022
13: Leasing 325
Activity 6: Capital Co
Capital Co entered into a sale and leaseback on 1 April 20X7. It sold a lathe with a carrying
amount of $300,000 for $400,000 (equivalent to fair value) and leased it back over a five-year
period, equivalent to its remaining useful life. The transaction constitutes a sale in accordance
with IFRS 15.
The lease required Capital Co to make five annual payments in arrears of $90,000. The rate of
interest implicit in the lease is 5%. The cumulative value of $1 in five years’ time is $4.329.
Required
What are the amounts to be recognised in the financial statements at 31 March 20X8 in respect of
the sale and leaseback transaction?
Solution
HB2022
326 Financial Reporting (FR)
In Chapter 13 of the Essential reading there are additional examples relating to sale and
leaseback transactions.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
13: Leasing 327
HB2022
328 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
13: Leasing 329
1. Issue
• Lessee accounting is an example of the application of the substance over form concept.
• The asset is recognised in the books of the entity that controls it, even though that asset may
never be owned by the entity.
2. Leases
• A contract, or part of a contract, that conveys the right to use an asset, the underlying asset,
for a period of time in exchange for consideration.
• Lessees must recognise assets and liabilities for all leases with a term of more than 12 months,
unless the underlying asset is of low value.
3. Recognition exemptions
• For short-term leases or leases of low value assets, the lease payments are simply charged to
profit or loss as an expense.
HB2022
330 Financial Reporting (FR)
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section A Q16
Section B Q21
Section C Q45 Bulwell Aggregates Co
Section C Q46 Lis Co
Further reading
There are articles in the Exam Resources section of the ACCA website which are relevant to the
topics covered in this chapter and would be useful to read:
IFRS 16 Leases
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
13: Leasing 331
Activity 1: Is it a lease?
This is not a lease. There is no identifiable asset. Fastcoach Co can substitute one coach for
another, and would derive economic benefits from doing so in terms of convenience. Therefore,
Outandabout Co should account for the rental payments as an expense in the statement of profit
or loss.
1 $ 920
$
1.1.X1 Liability b/d 10,000
1.1.X1–31.12.X1 Interest at 9.2% 920
31.12.X1 Instalment 1 (in arrears) (2,000)
31.12.X1 Liability c/d 8,920
2 The correct answer is: Current liability $1,179; Non-current liability $7,741
$
1.1.X1 Liability b/d 10,000
1.1.X1–31.12.X1 Interest at 9.2% 920
31.12.X1 Instalment 1 (in arrears) (2,000)
31.12.X1 Liability c/d 8,920
1.1.X2–31.12.X2 Interest at 9.2% 821
31.12.X2 Instalment 2 (in arrears) (2,000)
Liability c/d (payable > 1
31.12.X2 year) 7,741
Activity 3: Alpha Co
1 The correct answer is: $6,460
RIGHT-OF-USE ASSET
$
Initial measurement of lease liability 6,075
Payments made before or at commencement of lease 2,000
Right-of-use asset 8,075
Depreciation charge = $8,075/5 = $1,615 (depreciate over shorter of useful life or lease term)
Carrying amount = $8,075 – $1,615 = $6,460
2 The correct answer is: $4,804
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION (EXTRACT)
HB2022
332 Financial Reporting (FR)
Working
$
1.1.X1 Liability b/d 6,075
1.1.X1-31.12.X1 Interest at 12% 729
31.12.X1 Liability c/d 6,804
1.1.X2 Instalment 2 (in advance) – current liability (2,000)
1.1.X2 Non-current liability 4,804
Activity 4: Oscar Co
The lease is for eight months, which counts as a short-term lease, and so it does not need to be
recognised in the statement of financial position. The amount charged to profit or loss for the year
ended 30 June 20X6 is therefore $32,000 × 2/8 = $8,000.
Activity 5: Wigton Co
The correct answer is: $12,973
Step 1 Gain on sale: $740,000 – $500,000 = $240,000
Step 2 Gain relating to rights retained = $(240,000 × 700,000/740,000) = $227,027
Step 3 Gain relating to rights transferred = $240,000 – $227,027 = $12,973
Activity 6: Capital Co
$
Statement of profit or loss
Gain on transfer (W3) 2,598
Depreciation (W2) (58,442)
Interest (W1) (19,480)
Non-current liabilities
Lease liability (W1) 245,044
HB2022
13: Leasing 333
Workings
1 Lease liability
$
Lease liability (present value of future lease payments)
1.4.X7 ($90,000 × $4.329 = $389,610) 389,610
1.4.X7 – 31.3.X8 Interest at 5% 19,480
31.3.X8 Instalment paid in arrears (90,000)
31.3.X8 Liability carried down 319,090
1.4.X8 – 31.3.X9 Interest at 5% 15,954
31.3.X9 Instalment paid in arrears (90,000)
31.3.X9 Liability due in more than 1 year 245,044
Current liabilities of $74,046 ($319,090 – 245,044) reflect the amount of the lease liability that
will become due within 12 months.
2 Right of use asset
$
Right of use asset at commencement date
= carrying amount × PVFLP/fair value
= 300,000 × 389,610/400,000 292,208
Depreciation (over 5 years) (58,442)
Carrying amount at 31.3.X8 233,766
= $400,000 – $300,000
= $100,000
= $97,402
Stage 3: Gain relating to the rights = Total gain (Stage 1) – gain on rights
transferred retained (Stage 2)
= $100,000 – $97,402
= $2,598
HB2022
334 Financial Reporting (FR)
Chapter overview
cess skills
Exam suc
Answer planning
c FR skills C
n Specifi o
tio
rr req
a
ec ui
of
m
t i rem
or
nt
inf
erp ents
ng
Approach to Application
reta
agi
tion
Spreadsheet Interpretation
l y si s
skills
Go od
skills
ana
ti m
Approach
c al
em
to Case
e ri
OTQs
an
um
ag
tn
em
en
en
t ci
Effi
Effe cti
ve writing
a nd p r
esentation
Introduction
Financial Reporting introduces a number of IFRS Standards for the first time (such as IFRS 9
Financial Instruments) and tests further understanding of those already covered in your earlier
studies (for example, IAS 2 Inventories and IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment).
It is important that you understand how the IFRS Standards that are covered in the Financial
Reporting exam apply to financial statements, not just gaining the knowledge of what they are
and how they work, but also developing your application skills. These application skills will be
further developed in Strategic Business Reporting, so it is vitally important that you gain a
confident knowledge of the main IFRS Standards in your Financial Reporting studies.
Knowledge of the IFRS Standards will be required in all sections of the Financial Reporting exam.
You may be asked to identify the key requirements of an IFRS Standard in a knowledge based
narrative question and are likely to be asked questions about the application or impact of IFRS
Standards in an OT question. Knowledge of the requirements of IFRS Standards is essential when
preparing financial statements and may be relevant in the interpretation of an entity’s
performance and position in Section C.
The key to success in the Financial Reporting exam is:
• Understanding the key elements of the IFRS Standards; and
• Applying your knowledge of these IFRS Standards.
HB2022
HB2022
336 Financial Reporting (FR)
Disclosure
• Nature of the change
• Quantify the effect of the
change
Ensure that you are familiar with IAS 8, and understand the key points made in the summary. This
will act, initially, as your main reference for applying the accounting treatment. Once you have
gained additional question practice, you will be familiar with different question styles and
different scenarios.
STEP 2 Practice the numerical questions in the workbook and in the BPP Practice and Revision Kit. These will test
your knowledge of the mechanics of the accounting standards. Often there can be a difference between
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 4: Application of IFRS Standards 337
HB2022
338 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 4: Application of IFRS Standards 339
This is the information that was given These are the blank answer spaces in
in the question and can't be changed which you should type your answer.
You can see that the pre-formatted response area helps to give your answer structure and should
give you a good starting point for how you should approach this part of the question. Ensure that
you use pre-formatted response areas if they are provided.
STEP 5 Let’s also consider how you might answer an accounts preparation question, which also requires your
knowledge of IAS 8, this time using the spreadsheet software.
Remaining with IAS 8, Practice Exam 1 Q31, which is available on the ACCA Practice Platform,
contains the following information regarding an error: In September 20X5, the directors of Triage
Co discovered a fraud. In total, $700,000 which had been included as receivables in the above
trial balance had been stolen by an employee. $450,000 of this related to the year ended 31
March 20X5, the rest to the current year. The directors are hopeful that 50% of the losses can be
recovered from the company’s insurers.
Candidates were asked to prepare a schedule of adjustments to the draft profit or loss to take
account of adjustments, including the error. Consider how you would approach this using the
spreadsheet software:
You should cross-reference your
adjustments to any workings
Correct interpretation of Make sure you have answered the question by referring to the
requirements given information. As mentioned above, this question hinged
HB2022
340 Financial Reporting (FR)
Efficient numerical analysis There was not any numerical analysis in this narrative
question. Remember that FR is not all about getting the
numbers right. Expect a range of numerical and narrative
questions in the exam.
Effective writing and In an OTQ, you don’t need to worry about writing and
presentation presentation. However, consider how you might discuss the
impact of the change in accounting policy in an interpretation
question in Section C.
Most important action points to apply to your next question – work through each of the
alternative answers carefully as the differences between the options are often subtle.
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 4: Application of IFRS Standards 341
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Syllabus reference
no.
State when provisions may and may not be made and demonstrate how B7(c)
they should be accounted for.
Define contingent assets and liabilities and describe their accounting B7(e)
treatment and required disclosures.
Exam context
You will already have covered the basic aspects of IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and
Contingent Assets in your earlier studies. The Financial Reporting exam builds on this knowledge
by looking at the need for discounting certain provisions and by considering in detail some
specific transactions. IAS 10 Events After the Reporting Period is also revisited. You need to be able
to review financial statements and correct for errors and omissions which occur after the
reporting date. The exam will test your application of IAS 37 and IAS 10 within both OT Questions
and as part of a single entity accounts preparation question in Section C. If you require revision
from your earlier studies, review the activities and information in the Essential reading section.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Provisions and events after the reporting period
Measurement Restructuring
HB2022
344 Financial Reporting (FR)
Essential reading
Provision: A provision is a liability of uncertain timing or amount. (IAS 37: para. 10)
KEY
TERM
Recognition
A provision shall be recognised when: an entity has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as
a result of a past event, it is probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits
will be required to settle obligation, and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the
obligation.
(IAS 37: para. 14)
Unless all of these conditions are met, no provision can be recognised.
Provisions are reviewed each year and adjusted to reflect current best estimate. If it is no longer
probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required, the provision
is reversed.
Present obligations and obligating events
A past event which leads to a present obligation is called an obligating event. For an event to be
an obligating event, it is necessary that the entity has ‘no realistic alternative to settling that
obligation’ created by the event (IAS 37: para. 17).
In rare cases, it is not clear whether there is a present obligation. In these cases, a past event is
deemed to give rise to a present obligation if, taking into account all available evidence, it is more
likely than not that a present obligation exists at the end of the reporting period.
Legal and constructive obligations
An obligation can either be legal or constructive.
• A legal obligation is one that derives from a contract, legislation or any other operation of law.
• A constructive obligation is an obligation that derives from the actions of an entity where:
(i) From an established pattern of past practice, published policies or a specific statement,
the entity has indicated to other parties that it will accept certain responsibilities; and
(ii) As a result, the entity has created a valid expectation in other parties that it will
discharge those responsibilities. (IAS 37: para. 10)
Measurement
The amount recognised as a provision is the best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the
obligation at the end of the reporting period.
Provisions are discounted where the effect of discounting (time value of money) is material.
HB2022
14: Provisions and events after the reporting period 345
Cambridge Co is preparing its financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20X4.
Cambridge Co was informed on 31 December 20X4 that, due to a change in environmental
legislation, it will be required to pay environmental clean-up costs of $5 million on 31 December
20X9.
The relevant discount rate in this case is 10%.
The discounted values of $1 are as follows:
$1 in five years = $0.621
Required
1 Calculate the provision required for the year ended 31 December 20X4.
2 Calculate the provision required for the year ended 31 December 20X5.
Solution
Essential reading
The Essential reading has an example showing the double entry and full explanation of unwinding
of a discount, looking in depth at the impact on the financial statements.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
346 Financial Reporting (FR)
Uncertainties
If the provision involves a large population of items:
• Use expected values, taking into account the probability of all expected outcomes.
If a single obligation is being measured:
• The individual most likely outcome may be the best evidence of the liability.
2 Types of provision
Financial Reporting develops your application of knowledge gained in your earlier studies as well
as introducing more complex ideas. You need to be aware of the specific requirements relating to
the following:
2.1 Warranties
Warranties are argued to be genuine provisions based on past experience that it is probable, ie
more likely than not, that some claims will emerge.
Due to the developments in IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers, the nature of how
the liability has arisen should be taken into account regarding its accounting treatment. You
should consider whether:
• There is a legal obligation, such as all goods being purchased online may be returned within
14 days for a full refund under the Consumer Contracts Regulations; or
• There is a constructive obligation, such as the store has historically allowed a 12 month, ‘no
quibble’ return guarantee.
Then the entity should make the provision under IAS 37.
Warranties that the customer pays for separately (extended warranties, such as for white goods)
are covered by IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers (see Chapter 6). This is due there
being a contract between the customer and the supplier in exchange for a separable component
(a performance obligation).
The nature of the warranty granted will determine whether the warranty should be accounted for
under IAS 37 or IFRS 15.
Activity 2: Warranties
Warren Co gives warranties, at no additional cost, to its customers. There is no legal requirement
to repair or replace these items after 28 days, but Warren Co promises, on its website, to make
good, by repair or replacement, manufacturing defects that become apparent within a period of
one year from the date of the sale. Warren Co has replaced between 4% and 6% of total sales of
the product in the past five years.
Required
Which of the following statements about the above scenario is correct?
Warren Co is not required to make a provision because there is no legal obligation to
undertake the repair work.
Warren Co has an obligation to repair or replace all items of product that show
manufacturing defects, therefore a provision for the cost of this should be made.
Warren Co has an obligation to repair or replace all items that show manufacturing defects,
however, as the amount cannot be reliably estimated, no provision is required.
Warren Co must make a provision under IAS 37 because this is a potential future operating
loss.
HB2022
14: Provisions and events after the reporting period 347
The costs have not yet been expensed in the statement of profit or loss. Instead, the costs are
released to the profit or loss account by depreciating the asset (and the capitalised provision).
Subsequent double entries would be:
This will expense the cost of the provision over the period, such as a refurbishment required in five
years’ time, depreciation expensed over five years.
Once the provision is required in the final year, the accounting entries will be:
DEBIT Provision
CREDIT Cash
Petrolleo Co built an oil rig at a cost of $80 million. The oil rig came into operation on 1 January
20X2. The operating licence is for 20 years from 1 January 20X2, after which time Petrolleo Co is
HB2022
348 Financial Reporting (FR)
Onerous contracts: An onerous contract is a contract entered into with another party under
KEY
TERM which the unavoidable costs of fulfilling the terms of the contract exceed any revenues
expected to be received from the goods or services supplied or purchased directly or indirectly
under the contract and where the entity would have to compensate the other party if it did not
fulfil the terms of the contract (IAS 37: para. 68). An example might be a three-year contract to
make and supply a service to a third party. The seller can no longer provide the service, so it
becomes ‘onerous’, and the costs to the seller would be the costs of outsourcing the provision
of the service or any penalties for non-provision.
If an entity has a contract that is onerous, the present obligation under the contract should be
recognised as a provision (IAS 37: para. 66). The obligation is measured as:
HB2022
14: Provisions and events after the reporting period 349
An amendment to IAS 37 was issued in 2020 which sought to clarify what constitutes the cost of
fulfilling the contract:
The cost of fulfilling a contract comprises the costs that relate directly to the contract. Costs that
relate directly to a contract consist of both:
(a) the incremental costs of fulfilling that contract—for example, direct labour and materials; and
(b) an allocation of other costs that relate directly to fulfilling contracts—for example, an
allocation of the depreciation charge for an item of property, plant and equipment used in
fulfilling that contract
(IAS 37: para. 68A)
You have a contract to buy 300 metres of silk from China Co each month for $9 per metre. From
each metre of silk, you make one silk shirt. You also incur labour and other direct variable costs of
$8 per shirt.
Usually you can sell each shirt for $22 but in late July 20X8 the market price falls to $14. You are
considering ceasing production since you think that the market may not improve. If you decide to
cancel the silk purchase contract without two months’ notice you must pay a cancellation penalty
of $1,200 for each of the next two months.
Required
What will appear in respect of the contract in your financial statements for the period ending 31
July 20X8?
$1,800
$2,400
$8,400
$10,200
The IAS gives the following examples of events that may fall under the definition of restructuring.
• The sale or termination of a line of business
• The closure of business locations in a country or region or the relocation of business activities
from one country region to another
• Changes in management structure, for example, the elimination of a layer of management
• Fundamental reorganisations that have a material effect on the nature and focus of the
entity’s operations (IAS 37: para. 70)
HB2022
350 Financial Reporting (FR)
On 12 December 20X1, the board of Shutdown Co decided to close down a division. The detailed
plan was agreed by the board on 20 December 20X1, and letters sent to notify customers. By the
year end of 31 December 20X1, the staff had received redundancy notices.
Required
Explain the appropriate accounting treatment for the closure for the year ended 31 December
20X1.
Solution
HB2022
14: Provisions and events after the reporting period 351
In which TWO of the following circumstances would a provision be recognised in the year ended
31 December 20X8?
On 13 December 20X8, the board of an entity decided to close down a division. The decision
was not communicated to any of those affected and no other steps were taken to implement
the decision until 18 January 20X9.
The board agreed a detailed closure plan on 20 December 20X8 and details were given to
customers and employees.
The entity is obliged to incur clean-up costs for environmental damage caused as a result of
the construction of its factory.
The entity intends to carry out future expenditure to operate in a particular way in the future.
3 Contingent liabilities
3.1 Definition
Contingent liability:
KEY
TERM • A possible obligation that arises from past events and whose existence will be confirmed
only by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not
wholly within the control of the entity; or
• A present obligation that arises from past events but is not recognised because:
- It is not probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be
required to settle the obligation; or
- The amount of the obligation cannot be measured with sufficient reliability
(IAS 37: para. 10)
3.2 Recognition
Contingent liabilities should not be recognised in financial statements but they should be
disclosed (unless the possibly of the outflow of resources is remote) (IAS 37: para. 27).
Essential reading
See Chapter 14 Section 1.4 of the Essential reading for a decision tree summarising the recognition
criteria of IAS 37 for provisions and contingent liabilities.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
3.3 Disclosure
For each class of contingent liability, an entity must disclose at the end of the reporting period all
of the following:
HB2022
352 Financial Reporting (FR)
4 Contingent assets
4.1 Definition
Contingent asset: A possible asset that arises from past events and whose existence will be
KEY
TERM confirmed by the occurrence or non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not
wholly within control of the entity. (IAS 37: para. 10)
• A contingent asset must not be recognised (IAS 37: para. 31).
• A contingent asset should only be disclosed when an inflow of economic benefits is
probable (IAS 37: para. 34).
• Only when the realisation of the related economic benefits is virtually certain should
recognition take place. At that point, the asset is no longer a contingent asset.
HB2022
14: Provisions and events after the reporting period 353
Solution
• There is a requirement for a provision at 31 December 20X5 as the obligating event was the
faulty Bimblebats which were manufactured prior to the year-end.
• The supplier has taken responsibility and agree to reimburse Jackaboo Co. However, there is
doubt as to the exact amount that will be recovered, however probable that recovery may be.
Therefore, it will be recognised as a contingent asset.
During 20X0 Smack Co gives a guarantee of certain borrowings of Pony Co, whose financial
condition at that time is sound. During 20X1, the financial condition of Pony Co deteriorates and
at 30 June 20X1 Pony Co files for protection from its creditors.
Required
Explain the accounting treatment that is required:
1 At 31 December 20X0
2 At 31 December 20X1
Solution
HB2022
354 Financial Reporting (FR)
5.1 Definition
Events after the reporting period: Those events, both favourable and unfavourable, that occur
KEY
TERM between the end of the reporting period and the date when the financial statements are
authorised for issue.
5.2 Recognition
• Those that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the end of the reporting period –
adjusting
• Those that are indicative of conditions that arose after the reporting period – non-adjusting
(IAS 10: para. 3)
Essential reading
See Chapter 14, Section 4 of the Essential reading for revision on the main elements of IAS 10,
including a table which gives examples of adjusting and non-adjusting events.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
Activity 8: IAS 10
Which ONE of the following events taking place after the year-end but before the financial
statements were authorised for issue would require adjustment in accordance with IAS 10 Events
After the Reporting Period?
Three lines of inventory held at the year-end were destroyed by flooding in the warehouse.
The directors announced a major restructuring.
Two lines of inventory held at the year-end were discovered to have faults rendering them
unsaleable.
The value of the company’s investments fell sharply.
5.3 Disclosure
• An entity discloses the date when the financial statements were authorised for issue and who
gave the authorisation (IAS 10: para. 17).
HB2022
14: Provisions and events after the reporting period 355
PER alert
One of the competences you require to fulfil Performance Objective 7 of the PER is the ability
to review financial statements and correct for errors and make any required disclosures
regarding events after the reporting date. The information in this chapter will give you
knowledge to help you demonstrate this competence.
HB2022
356 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
14: Provisions and events after the reporting period 357
HB2022
358 Financial Reporting (FR)
1. Provisions
Provisions are recognised when there is a present obligation as a result of a past event, with a
probable outflow of economics resources that can be measured reliably.
3. Contingent liabilities
• Contingent liabilities are not recognised because they are possible rather than present
obligations, the outflow is not probable or the liability cannot be reliably measured.
• Contingent liabilities are disclosed.
4. Contingent assets
Contingent assets are disclosed, but only where an inflow of economic benefits is probable.
HB2022
14: Provisions and events after the reporting period 359
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section A Q14
Section B Q20
Section C Q39 Provisions
Further reading
The FR examining team has provided a useful technical article on IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent
Liabilities and Contingent Assets. This should help you in understanding the key criteria of the
standard.
IAS 37, Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
360 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
$5m × 0.621* 3,105,000
$
Carrying amount of provision at 1 January 20X5 3,105,000
Unwinding of the discount at 10% (β) 310,000
Carrying amount of the provision at 31 December 20X5 ($5m × 0.683**) 3,415,000
Notes.
1 The increase in the year of $310,5000 is the unwinding of the discount. This is accounted
for as a finance cost expense in the statement of profit or loss. The original provision of
$3.105 million will be capitalised as part of the cost of the assets involved in the operation
and depreciated over five years.
2 The unwinding of the discount can be calculated as the difference between the opening
and closing carrying amounts, or by taking the opening carrying amount × 10%. Note that
there is a small rounding difference of $500 is the unwinding is calculated as $3,105,000 ×
10%. This is due to the discount rates being rounded to three decimal places.
Activity 2: Warranties
The correct answer is: Warren Co has an obligation to repair or replace all items of product that
show manufacturing defects, therefore a provision for the cost of this should be made.
Warren Co has an obligation to repair or replace all items of product that manifest
manufacturing defects in respect of which warranties are given before the end of the reporting
period, and a provision for the cost of this should therefore be made. The cost cannot be avoided.
Warren Co is obliged to repair or replace items that fail within the entire warranty period.
Therefore, in respect of this year’s sales, the obligation provided for at the end of the reporting
period should be the cost of making good items for which defects have been notified but not yet
processed, plus an estimate of costs in respect of the other items sold for which there is sufficient
evidence that manufacturing defects will manifest themselves during their remaining periods of
warranty cover.
HB2022
14: Provisions and events after the reporting period 361
The provision has been capitalised, by crediting the provision and debiting the non-current
asset. This is applying the accruals method as it is matching the costs of the provision and the
asset with the revenue generated by the provision.
HB2022
362 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 8: IAS 10
The correct answer is: Two lines of inventory held at the year-end were discovered to have faults
rendering them unsaleable.
We can assume that the faults that rendered the inventory unsaleable also existed at the year-
end, so this is the only option which would require adjustment. The others give information about
conditions that arose after the end of the reporting period and therefore do not require to be
adjusted.
HB2022
14: Provisions and events after the reporting period 363
15
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Exam context
You should be familiar with the key requirements of IAS 2 Inventories from your previous studies.
Inventory is an important balance as it is often a key figure in the statement of financial position
and impacts on cost of sales in the statement of profit or loss. IAS 41 Agriculture provides the
requirements relating to biological assets and produce before the point of harvest and is therefore
relevant only in the farming industry. Questions on inventory or biological assets could appear as
OT Questions in Section A or B or as a small part of a single entity accounts preparation or
interpretation question in Section C. Inventories may also feature in an accounts preparation
question and will be relevant when analysing the gross profit margin or the inventory holding
period in an interpretation question in Section C.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Inventories and biological assets
Measurement Recognition
Disclosure Measurement
Presentation
HB2022
366 Financial Reporting (FR)
1.3 Measurement
Inventories shall be measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value (NRV) (IAS 2: para. 9).
*Fixed production overheads relate to indirect costs such as the cost of factory management and
administration which remain relatively constant regardless of the volume of production. These
should be allocated to units of production based on a normal level of activity.
Variable production overheads include indirect materials and labour and vary with the volume of
production.
HB2022
15: Inventories and biological assets 367
An entity must use the same cost formula for all inventories having a similar nature and use to
the entity.
You should be aware of these methods from your previous studies and also know that the last in,
first out (LIFO) formula is not permitted by IAS 2 on the basis that it does not bear a good
approximation to actual costs.
Essential reading
Chapter 15, Section 1 of the Essential reading provides more detail on the consistency of cost
formula used.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
Net realisable value: The estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business, less:
KEY
TERM • The estimated cost of completion; and
• The estimated costs necessary to make the sale, eg marketing, selling and distribution costs
(IAS 2: para. 6).
As noted above, where the net realisable value of inventories is less than cost the inventories in the
financial statements should be measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value.
HB2022
368 Financial Reporting (FR)
Essential reading
Chapter 15, Section 2 of the Essential reading provides more detail on the NRV of inventory.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
A B C
$ $ $
Cost 20 9 12
Selling price 30 12 22
Modification cost to enable sale – 2 8
Marketing costs 7 2 2
Required
Calculate the carrying amount of inventory held at the year-end in accordance with IAS 2
Inventories.
Solution
The value of inventory is $8,800.
HB2022
15: Inventories and biological assets 369
Teddy Co has 500 items of product HGJ in inventory at 31 October 20X8. These items are no
longer saleable in their current condition. However, they can be adjusted for a cost of $2.50 per
item. Once adjusted, the items can be sold at their normal price of $5.30 each.
The original cost of the items was $2.25 each. The replacement cost of item HGJ at 31 October
20X8 is $2.45 each.
Required
At what amount should Teddy Co measure its inventory at 31 October 20X8?
$nil
$275
$1,125
$1,400
1.9 Disclosure
The financial statements should disclose the following:
• The accounting policies adopted in measuring inventories, including the cost formula used;
• The total carrying amount of inventories and the carrying amount in classifications
appropriate to the entity;
• The carrying amount of inventories carried at fair value less costs to sell;
• The amount of inventories recognised as an expense during the period;
• The amount of any write‑down of inventories recognised as an expense in the period;
• The amount of any reversal of any write‑down that is recognised as a reduction in the amount
of inventories recognised as expense in the period;
• The circumstances or events that led to the reversal of a write‑down of inventories; and
• The carrying amount of inventories pledged as security for liabilities.
2 IAS 41 Agriculture
2.1 Introduction
IAS 41 Agriculture covers the accounting treatment of biological assets (except bearer plants) and
agricultural produce at the point of harvest. After harvest, IAS 2 Inventories applies to the
agricultural produce, as illustrated in the timeline below.
IAS 41 IAS 2
Zeit
Biological transformation
Planting/ Harvest/ Sale
birth slaughter
Bearer plants, which are plants that are used to grow crops but are not themselves consumed (eg
grapevines), are excluded from the scope of IAS 41. Instead they are accounted for under IAS 16
using either the cost or revaluation model.
HB2022
370 Financial Reporting (FR)
Essential reading
Chapter 15, Section 3 of the Essential reading provides further explanation as to what a biological
asset is.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
2.3 Recognition
As with other non-financial assets under the Conceptual Framework, a biological asset or
agricultural produce is recognised when:
(a) The entity controls the asset as a result of past events;
(b) It is probable that future economic benefits associated with the asset will flow to the entity;
and
(c) The fair value or cost of the asset can be measured reliably.
(IAS 41: para. 10)
2.4 Measurement
Biological assets are measured both on initial recognition and at the end of each reporting period
at fair value less costs to sell.
Agricultural produce at the point of harvest is also measured at fair value less costs to sell.
The fair value less costs to sell of agricultural produce harvested becomes its cost under IAS 2.
After harvest, the agricultural produce is measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value in
accordance with IAS 2.
Fair value is the price that would be received to sell the asset (IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement).
Costs to sell are incremental costs directly attributable to disposal of the asset, eg commissions to
brokers and transfer taxes.
Changes in fair value less costs to sell are recognised in profit or loss.
Where fair value of biological assets cannot be measured reliably, they are measured at cost
less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses.
2.5 Presentation
Biological assets are presented as non-current assets.
HB2022
15: Inventories and biological assets 371
PER alert
Performance objective 7 of the PER requires you to demonstrate that you can contribute to the
drafting or reviewing of primary financial statements according to accounting standards and
legislation. The Standards covered in this chapter will help you to do this for a business’s
inventory and biological assets.
HB2022
372 Financial Reporting (FR)
Recognition
Measurement • Entity controls the asset as a result of past
• At the lower of cost and net realisable value events
• Cost: • Probable that future economic benefits will
– Costs of purchase flow to the entity
– Costs of conversion • Fair value or cost of the asset can be
– Other costs measured reliably
• Estimation techniques to determine cost:
– Standard cost
– Retail method Measurement
– FIFO • Biological assets
– Weighted average – Initial measurement at fair value less costs
• NRV: to sell
– Estimated selling price less estimated costs – Subsequent measurement also at fair value
of completion and estimated costs less costs to sell
necessary to make the sale (marketing, • Agricultural produce
selling, distribution) – Initial measurement (at harvest) at fair value
less costs to sell
– Subsequent measurement per IAS 2
Disclosure
• Accounting policies including cost formula
• Total carrying amount of inventories Presentation
(RM, WIP, FG) Biological assets are non-current assets
HB2022
15: Inventories and biological assets 373
1. IAS 2 Inventories
Inventories are held at the lower of cost and net realisable value. The cost of interchangeable
inventories is measured using the FIFO or weighted average methods only.
HB2022
374 Financial Reporting (FR)
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section A Q12
Section C Q37 Villandry Co
Section C Q38 Biological assets
HB2022
15: Inventories and biological assets 375
$
Selling price 5.30
Adjustment costs (2.50)
Net realisable value 2.80
Use lower of cost and net realisable value. This is the cost amount: $2.25 × 500 units = $1,125.
The replacement value is irrelevant.
HB2022
376 Financial Reporting (FR)
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Exam context
Current tax refers to tax on a company’s taxable profits in the current period. It is a relatively
simple concept to understand and account for. Deferred tax is more complex and is an
application of accrual accounting. Current and deferred tax could both be tested in Section A or
Section B of the exam as an OT Question, or may feature as an adjustment in a single entity
financial statements preparation question.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Taxation
Temporary differences
Measurement
Presentation
HB2022
378 Financial Reporting (FR)
1.2 Definitions
IAS 12 provides the following definitions:
Accounting profit: Net profit or loss for a period before deducting tax expense is referred to as
KEY
TERM the accounting profit.
Taxable profit (tax loss): The profit (loss) for a period, determined in accordance with the rules
established by the taxation authorities, upon which income taxes are payable (recoverable).
Tax expense (tax income): The aggregate amount included in the determination of net profit
or loss for the period in respect of current tax and deferred tax.
Current tax: The amount of income taxes payable (recoverable) in respect of the taxable profit
(tax loss) for a period.
Deferred tax liabilities: The amounts of income taxes payable in future periods in respect of
taxable temporary differences.
Deferred tax assets: The amounts of income taxes recoverable in future periods in respect of:
• Deductible temporary differences
• The carry forward of unused tax losses
• The carry forward of unused tax credits
Temporary differences: Differences between the carrying amount of an asset or liability in the
statement of financial position and its tax base. Temporary differences may be either:
• Taxable temporary differences, which are temporary differences that will result in taxable
amounts in determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when the carrying amount
of the asset or liability is recovered or settled
• Deductible temporary differences, which are temporary differences that will result in
amounts that are deductible in determining taxable profit (tax loss) of future periods when
the carrying amount of the asset or liability is recovered or settled
Tax base: The tax base of an asset or liability is the amount attributed to that asset or liability
for tax purposes.
(IAS 12: para. 5)
HB2022
16: Taxation 379
Tax arising from business combination Tax arising from transaction which
Treat as part of goodwill (IAS 12: para. 19) affects equity only
• Include within equity (IAS 12: Obj)
• Eg IAS 8 adjustment made to the opening
balances due to change in accounting policy
or fundamental error
Illustration 1: Darton Co
In 20X8, Darton Co had taxable profits of $120,000. In the previous year, (20X7) income tax on
profits had been estimated as $30,000. The income tax rate is 30%.
Required
Calculate tax payable and the charge for 20X8 if the tax due on 20X7 profits was subsequently
agreed with the tax authorities as:
1 $35,000; or
2 $25,000
Note. Any under- or over-payments are not settled until the following year’s tax payment is due.
Solution
1
$
Tax due on 20X8 profits ($120,000 × 30%) 36,000
Underpayment for 20X7 5,000
Tax charge and liability 41,000
$
Tax due on 20X8 profits (as above) 36,000
Overpayment for 20X7 (5,000)
Tax charge and liability 31,000
Alternatively, the rebate due could be shown separately as income in the statement of
comprehensive income and as an asset in the statement of financial position. An offset
approach like this is, however, most likely.
HB2022
380 Financial Reporting (FR)
Tax of $60,000 is payable in respect of the profits for the year ended 31 December 20X8. The
balance of current tax in the trial balance is an under/over provision for tax in the previous year
and is shown below.
Debit Credit
$ $
Current tax 850
Required
What is the tax expense to be shown in the statement of profit or loss and the tax liability to be
included in the statement of financial position for the year ended 31 December 20X8?
Expense $60,000; Liability $60,850
Expense $60,850; Liability $60,850
Expense $60,850; Liability $60,000
Expense $59,150; Liability $60,000
3 Deferred tax
Deferred tax is an accounting measure used to match the tax effects of transactions with their
accounting impact.
If the future tax consequences of transactions are not recognised, profit can be overstated,
leading to overpayment of dividends and distortion of share price and earnings per share (EPS).
Where a difference arises, IAS 12 requires companies to recognise a deferred tax liability (or
deferred tax asset).
Deferred tax is the tax attributable to temporary differences.
Temporary differences
Differences between
There are
two types
HB2022
16: Taxation 381
HB2022
382 Financial Reporting (FR)
3.4 Measurement
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax rates expected to apply to the period
when the asset is realised or liability settled, based on tax rates (and tax laws) that have been
enacted (or substantively enacted) by the end of the reporting period (IAS 12: para. 47).
Changes in tax rates after the year-end are therefore non-adjusting events after the reporting
period.
Custard Co purchased machinery costing $1,500. At the end of 20X8 the carrying amount is
$1,000. The cumulative depreciation for tax purposes is $900 and the current tax rate is 25%.
Required
Calculate the deferred tax liability for the asset.
HB2022
16: Taxation 383
Custard Co must therefore recognise a deferred tax liability of $100, recognising the difference
between the carrying amount of $1,000 and the tax base of $600 as a taxable temporary
difference.
Calculate the tax base and temporary difference for each of the following assets, stating whether
the temporary difference is taxable or deductible.
1 A machine costs $10,000 and has a carrying amount of $8,000. For tax purposes,
depreciation of $3,000 has already been deducted in the current and prior periods and the
remaining cost will be deductible in future periods, either as depreciation or through a
deduction on disposal. Revenue generated by using the machine is taxable, any gain on
disposal of the machine will be taxable and any loss on disposal will be deductible for tax
purposes.
Required
Calculate the tax base and the temporary difference, stating whether it is taxable or
deductible.
2 Interest receivable has a carrying amount of $1,000. The related interest revenue will be taxed
on a cash basis.
Required
Calculate the tax base and the temporary difference, stating whether it is taxable or
deductible.
3 Trade receivables have a carrying amount of $10,000. The related revenue has already been
included in taxable profit (tax loss).
Required
Calculate the tax base and the temporary difference, stating whether it is taxable or
deductible.
4 A loan receivable has a carrying amount of $1 million. The repayment of the loan will have no
tax consequences.
Required
Calculate the tax base and the temporary difference, stating whether it is taxable or
deductible
HB2022
384 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 3: Epsilon Co
During the year ended 31 March 20X4, Epsilon Co correctly capitalised development costs of $1.6
million in accordance with IAS 38 Intangible Assets. The development project began to generate
economic benefits for Epsilon from 1 January 20X4. The directors of Epsilon Co estimated that the
project would generate economic benefits for five years from that date. Amortisation is charged
on a monthly pro-rata basis. The development expenditure was fully deductible against taxable
profits for the year ended 31 March 20X4 and the rate of tax applicable is 25%.
Required
Discuss the deferred tax implications of the above in the financial statements of Epsilon for the
year ended 31 March 20X4.
Solution
HB2022
16: Taxation 385
Activity 4: Lecehus Co
Lecehus Co purchased some land on 1 January 20X7 for $400,000. On 31 December 20X8, the
land was revalued to $500,000. In the tax regime in which the company operates, revaluations do
not affect either the tax base of the asset or taxable profits.
The income tax rate is 30%. Profit for the year was $850,000.
Required
1 How much should be included with other comprehensive income and as a liability at 31
December 20X8?
Other comprehensive income $100,000; Liability $30,000
Other comprehensive income $70,000; Liability $30,000
Other comprehensive income $30,000; Liability $30,000
Other comprehensive income $100,000; Liability $100,000
2 What is the balance on the revaluation surplus at 31 December 20X8?
$
HB2022
386 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 5: Pargatha Co
Solution
HB2022
16: Taxation 387
Essential reading
In Chapter 16 of the Essential reading, there is an additional activity (Activity 11: Ginger Co) which
looks at the effect of changing tax rates on deferred tax. Do attempt further question practice on
this topic as it is a tricky area.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
Activity 6: Deorf Co
Deorf Co incurs $80,000 of tax losses in the year ended 31 December 20X1 which it can carry
forward for two accounting periods before they expire. Deorf Co expects to make a loss in 20X2
and to return to profitability in 20X3, expecting to make a profit of $50,000 in that year. The
company pays tax at 20%. What is the deferred tax balance in the statement of financial position
at 31 December 20X1?
Required
What is the deferred tax balance in the statement of financial position at 31 December 20X1?
Deferred tax asset $10,000
Deferred tax liability $10,000
Deferred tax asset $50,000
Deferred tax liability $50,000
HB2022
388 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 7: Awkward Co
Awkward Co buys an item of equipment on 1 January 20X1 for $1,000,000. It has a useful life of
10 years and an estimated residual value of $100,000. The equipment is depreciated on a
straight-line basis. For tax purposes, a tax expense can be claimed on a 20% reducing balance
basis.
The rate of income tax can be taken as 30%.
Required
In respect of the above item of equipment, calculate the deferred tax charge/credit in the profit or
loss of Awkward Co for the year to 31 December 20X2 and the deferred tax balance in the
statement of financial position at that date.
Solution
MOVEMENT IN THE DEFERRED TAX LIABILITY FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X2
$’000
HB2022
16: Taxation 389
Workings
1 Deferred tax liability
20X1
Cost
Depreciation
(W2) and (W3)
c/d
20X2
b/d
Depreciation
(W2) and (W3)
c/d
2 Depreciation
3 Tax depreciation
20X1:
20X2:
Essential reading
In Chapter 16 of the Essential reading, there is an additional activity (Activity 12: Norman Kronkest
Co) which looks at the effect of deferred tax on a number of different adjustments to the financial
statements. Do attempt further question practice on this topic as it is generally an area that
students struggle with in the exam.
HB2022
390 Financial Reporting (FR)
In the accounting year to 31 December 20X3, Neil Down Co generated a profit before tax of
$110,000.
Income tax on the profit before tax has been estimated as $45,000. In the previous year (20X2),
income tax on profits had been estimated as $38,000 but it was subsequently agreed at $40,500.
A transfer to the credit of the deferred taxation account of $16,000 will be made in 20X3.
Required
1 Calculate the tax on profits for 20X3 for disclosure in the accounts.
2 Calculate the amount of tax payable.
Solution
HB2022
16: Taxation 391
IAS 12 covers current and deferred tax • Tax actually payable to the tax authorities
• Tax charged by tax authority
• Unpaid tax due is recognised as a liability
• Excess tax paid over what is due is recognised as
an asset
• Having calculated the tax due:
– DEBIT Tax charge (SOPL)
– CREDIT Tax liability (SOFP)
Deferred tax is calculated as follows: Losses can be carried forward to reduce the future
$ tax liability – future tax saving – deferred tax asset
Carrying amount of asset/(liability) [in recognised
accounting statement of financial position] X/(X)
Less tax base [value for tax purposes] (X)/X Presentation
X/(X) • Deferred tax assets/liabilities should be shown
Deferred tax (liability)/asset [always opposite separately from other assets/liabilities.
• Current tax – can be offset ONLY WHEN
(X)/X – Legally enforceable right to do so
– Amounts will be settled on a net basis, or the
asset and liability settled at the same time
HB2022
392 Financial Reporting (FR)
2. Current tax
Current tax is the amount actually payable to the tax authorities in relation to the trading
activities of the entity during the period.
IAS 12 requires any unpaid tax in respect of the current or prior periods to be recognised as a
liability.
Conversely, any excess tax paid in respect of current or prior periods over what is due should be
recognised as an asset.
HB2022
16: Taxation 393
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section B Q22(b)
Section C Q44 Telenorth Co
Section C Q47 Carpati Co
Further reading
ACCA has prepared a useful technical article on deferred tax, which is available on its website
under Exam Support Resources.
Deferred Tax
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
394 Financial Reporting (FR)
Carrying Temporary
amount Tax base difference Taxable or
$ $ $ deductible
7,000
Machine 8,000 (10,000 – 3,000) 1,000 Taxable
Carrying Temporary
amount Tax base difference Taxable or
$ $ $ deductible
Interest
receivable 1,000 Nil 1,000 Taxable
The interest has not yet been received in cash and is therefore not yet recognised for tax
purposes. The tax base of the interest receivable is therefore nil.
3
Carrying
amount Tax base Temporary Taxable or
$ $ difference deductible
Trade
receivables 10,000 10,000 Nil N/A
As the revenue is included in profit or loss and is therefore taxable in the period it is earned, the
tax base of the trade receivables is equal to the carrying amount. There is no temporary
difference as the carrying amount and tax base are equal.
4
Carrying Temporary
amount Tax base difference Taxable or
$ $ $ deductible
Loan receivable 1,000,000 1,000,000* Nil N/A
*The loan is not taxable and so the tax base is deemed to be the carrying amount of the loan
which is $1 million. There is no temporary difference.
Activity 3: Epsilon Co
Amortisation of the development costs over their useful life of five years should commence on 1
January 20X4. Therefore, at 31 March 20X4, the development costs have a carrying amount of
$1.52 million ($1.6m – ($1.6m × 1/5 × 3/12)) in the financial statements.
HB2022
16: Taxation 395
Activity 4: Lecehus Co
1 The correct answer is: Other comprehensive income $70,000; Liability $30,000
Inclusions:
$’000
Other comprehensive income:
Gain on property revaluation 100
Deferred tax relating to other comprehensive income (Working) (30)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 70
Working
$’000
Accounting carrying amount 500
Tax base (400)
Temporary difference 100
2 $ 70,000
The revaluation surplus is carried net of deferred tax. The balance is therefore $70,000
($100,000 surplus less $30,000 deferred tax).
Activity 5: Pargatha Co
The carrying amount of the warranty provision for accounting purposes is the $10,000
recognised.
The tax base of the provision is nil (as the amount in respect of warranty claims will not be
deductible for tax purposes until future periods when the claims are paid).
When the liability is settled for its carrying amount, the entity’s future taxable profit will be
reduced by $10,000 and so its future tax payments by $10,000 × 25% = $2,500.
The difference of $10,000 between the carrying amount ($10,000) and the tax base (nil) is a
deductible temporary difference. Pargatha Co should therefore recognise a deferred tax asset of
$10,000 × 25% = $2,500 provided that it is probable that the entity will earn sufficient taxable
profits in future periods to benefit from a reduction in tax payments.
Activity 6: Deorf Co
The correct answer is: Deferred tax asset $10,000
A deferred tax asset is recognised in 20X1 for $50,000 × 20% = $10,000:
In 20X3 the deferred tax asset is charged to profit or loss when profits are earned that the tax
losses are used against.
HB2022
396 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000
Workings
1 Deferred tax liability
20X1
Depreciation
(W2) and (W3) (90) (200)
c/d
20X2
Depreciation
(W2) and (W3) (90) (160)
2 Depreciation
$1,000,000 cost – $100,000 residual value/10 years = $90,000 per annum.
3 Tax depreciation
20X1: $1,000,000 × 20% = $200,000
20X2: $800,000 carrying amount b/d × 20% = $160,000
The deferred tax liability in the statement of financial position at 31 December 20X2 will be the
potential tax on the difference between the accounting carrying amount of $820,000 and the tax
base of $640,000. The temporary difference is $180,000 and the deferred tax on the difference is
a $54,000 charge/liability.
The charge (or credit) for deferred tax in profit or loss for the year is the increase (or decrease) in
the deferred tax liability during the year. The closing deferred tax liability of $54,000 is greater
than the opening deferred tax liability of $33,000, so there is a deferred tax charge of $21,000 to
profit or loss in respect of this year.
HB2022
16: Taxation 397
$
Income tax on profit before tax (liability in the statement of financial position) 45,000
Deferred taxation 16,000
Underprovision of tax in previous year ($40,500 – $38,000) 2,500
Tax on profits for 20X3 (profit or loss charge) 63,500
$
Tax payable on 20X3 profits (liability) 45,000
HB2022
398 Financial Reporting (FR)
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to
Prepare and explain the contents and purpose of the statement D1(b)
of changes in equity.
Exam context
The presentation of published financial statements is a key area of the Financial Reporting
syllabus and will be tested in a constructed response question in Section C of the exam. In Section
C, you will be required to prepare the statement of financial position, statement of profit or loss
and other comprehensive income and/or extracts from the statement of cash flows.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Presentation of published financial statements
HB2022
400 Financial Reporting (FR)
Essential reading
Chapter 17, Section 1 Presentation of Financial Statements of the Essential reading provides useful
information on how information is reported in the financial statements. This includes detail on
reporting profit or loss for the year, disclosure, materiality, identification of financial statements,
the reporting period and timeliness. Review this section carefully.
Further, you must understand the type of information that is included in the notes to the financial
statements. Read Chapter 17, Section 3 Notes to the financial statements in the Essential reading
and make sure you can explain the type of information shown by way of a note.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
20X7 20X6
$’000 $’000
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment XXX XXX
HB2022
17: Presentation of published financial statements 401
HB2022
402 Financial Reporting (FR)
An entity must present current and non-current assets as separate classifications on the face of
the statement of financial position. A presentation based on liquidity should only be used where it
provides more relevant and reliable information, in which case all assets and liabilities must be
presented broadly in order of liquidity. (IAS 1: para. 60)
In either case, the entity should disclose any portion of an asset or liability that is expected to be
recovered or settled after more than 12 months. For example, for an amount receivable that is due
in instalments over 18 months, the portion due after more than 12 months must be disclosed. (IAS
1: para. 61)
The IAS emphasises how helpful information on the operating cycle is to users of financial
statements. Where there is a clearly defined operating cycle within which the entity supplies
goods or services, then information disclosing those net assets that are continuously circulating
as working capital is useful. (IAS 1: para. 62)
This distinguishes them from those net assets used in the long-term operations of the entity.
Assets that are expected to be realised and liabilities that are due for settlement within the
operating cycle are therefore highlighted. (IAS 1: para. 62)
The liquidity and solvency of an entity is also indicated by information about the maturity dates
of assets and liabilities. As we will see later, IFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures requires
disclosure of maturity dates of both financial assets and financial liabilities. (Financial assets
include trade and other receivables; financial liabilities include trade and other payables.) (IAS 1:
para. 63)
Non-current assets include tangible, intangible, operating and financial assets of a long-term
nature. Other terms with the same meaning can be used (eg ‘fixed’, ‘long-term’). (IAS 1: para. 67)
The term ‘operating cycle’ has been used several times above. The standard defines it as follows.
Operating cycle: The time between the acquisition of assets for processing and their
KEY
TERM realisation in cash or cash equivalents. (IAS 1: para. 68)
Current assets therefore include inventories and trade receivables that are sold, consumed and
realised as part of the normal operating cycle. This is the case even where they are not expected
to be realised within 12 months. (IAS 1: para. 68)
HB2022
17: Presentation of published financial statements 403
The categorisation of current liabilities is very similar to that of current assets. Thus, some current
liabilities are part of the working capital used in the normal operating cycle of the business (ie
trade payables and accruals for employee and other operating costs). Such items will be classed
as current liabilities, even where they are due to be settled more than 12 months after the end of
the reporting period. (IAS 1: para. 70)
There are also current liabilities that are not settled as part of the normal operating cycle, but
which are due to be settled within 12 months of the end of the reporting period. These include
bank overdrafts, income taxes, other non-trade payables and the current portion of interest-
bearing liabilities. Any interest-bearing liabilities that are used to finance working capital on a
long-term basis, and that are not due for settlement within 12 months, should be classed as non-
current liabilities. (IAS 1: para. 71)
A non-current financial liability due to be settled within 12 months of the end of the reporting
period should be classified as a current liability, even if (a) the original term was for a period
longer than 12 months and (b) an agreement to refinance, or to reschedule payments, on a long-
term basis is completed after the end of the reporting period and before the financial statements
are authorised for issue. (IAS 1: para. 72) An entity’s right to defer settlement must have substance
and must exist at the end of the reporting period. (IAS 1: para. 72A)
A non-current financial liability that is payable on demand because the entity breached a
condition of its loan agreement should be classified as current at the end of the reporting period,
even if the lender has agreed after the end of the reporting period, and before the financial
statements are authorised for issue, not to demand payment as a consequence of the breach.
However, if the lender has agreed by the end of the reporting period to provide a period of grace
ending at least 12 months after the end of the reporting period within which the entity can rectify
the breach, and during that time the lender cannot demand immediate repayment, the liability is
classified as non-current.
HB2022
404 Financial Reporting (FR)
20X7 20X6
$’000 $’000
Revenue XXX XXX
Cost of sales XXX XXX
Gross profit XXX XXX
Other income XXX XXX
Distribution costs XXX XXX
Administrative expenses XXX XXX
Finance costs XXX XXX
HB2022
17: Presentation of published financial statements 405
PER alert
One of the competences required to fulfil performance objective 7 of the PER is the ability to
prepare and review financial statements in accordance with legal and regulatory
requirements. You can apply the knowledge you obtain from this section of the Workbook to
help you demonstrate this competence.
4.1 Format
This is the format of the statement of changes in equity as per IAS 1. For clarity, columns relating
to items not in the Financial Reporting syllabus, as highlighted in Section 3 are omitted, and the
totals are amended accordingly. (IAS 1: Illustrative Guidance)
HB2022
406 Financial Reporting (FR)
capital
Retained
Share
earnings
Total equity
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Balance at 1 January
20X6 XXX XXX – XXX XXX
Dividends – (XXX) – – (XXX)
Total comprehensive
income for the year – XXX XXX XXX XXX
Balance at 31 December
20X6 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX
Changes in equity for
20X7
Issue of share capital XXX – – – XXX
Dividends – (XXX) – – (XXX)
Total comprehensive
income for the year – XXX XXX – XXX
Transfer to retained
earnings – XXX (XXX) – –
Balance at 31 December
20X7 XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX
Essential reading
The Essential reading includes an Illustration titled Wislon which demonstrates how a set of IAS 1
financial statements are prepared, which you may find a useful reminder of the accounts
preparation process.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
17: Presentation of published financial statements 407
Workings are
clearly labelled and
cross-referenced
Activity 1: Mandolin Co
Mandolin Co is a quoted manufacturing company. Its finished products are stored in a nearby
warehouse until ordered by customers. Mandolin Co has performed very well in the past, but has
been in financial difficulties in recent months and has been organising the business to improve
performance.
HB2022
408 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000 $’000
Sales 124,900
Cost of goods manufactured in the year to
31 March 20X3 (excluding depreciation) 94,000
Distribution costs 9,060
Administrative expenses 16,020
Restructuring costs 121
Interest received 1,200
Loan note interest paid 639
Land and buildings (including land $20,000,000) 50,300
Plant and equipment 3,720
Accumulated depreciation at 31 March 20X2:
Buildings 6,060
Plant and equipment 1,670
Investment properties (at market value) 24,000
Inventories at 31 March 20X2 4,852
Trade receivables 9,330
Bank and cash 1,190
Ordinary shares of $1 each, fully paid 20,000
Share premium 430
Revaluation surplus 3,125
Retained earnings at 31 March 20X2 28,077
Ordinary dividends paid 1,000
7% loan notes 20X7 18,250
Trade payables 8,120
Proceeds of share issue – 2,400
214,232 214,232
HB2022
17: Presentation of published financial statements 409
Solution
Notes to the financial statements are not required, but all workings must be clearly shown.
Mandolin Co
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 20X3
$’000
Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses
Other expenses
Finance income
Finance costs
HB2022
410 Financial Reporting (FR)
Other expenses represent the cost of a major restructuring undertaken during the period.
MANDOLIN CO
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 MARCH 20X3
$’000
Non-current assets
Investment properties
Current assets
Inventories
Trade receivables
Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Retained earnings
Revaluation surplus
Non-current liabilities
HB2022
17: Presentation of published financial statements 411
Current liabilities
Trade payables
Interest payable
HB2022
412 Financial Reporting (FR)
Dividends
Workings
1 Expenses
HB2022
17: Presentation of published financial statements 413
Cost b/d
Accumulated depreciation
b/d
Revaluation (balancing
figure)
3 Inventories
$’000
Defective batch:
Selling price
Cost to complete: repackaging required
NRV
Cost
Write-off required
4 Share issue
The proceeds have been recorded separately in the trial balance. This requires a transfer to the
appropriate accounts:
$’000 $’000
HB2022
414 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
17: Presentation of published financial statements 415
IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Key sections of the statement of Key sections of the statement of
Statements applies to the financial position profit or loss
preparation and presentation of • Non-current assets • Revenue
general purpose financial • Current assets • Cost of sales
statements in accordance with • Equity • Gross profit
IFRS • Non-current liabilities • Other income
• Current liabilities • Distribution costs
• Administrative expenses
• Other expenses
• Finance costs
• Income tax expense
HB2022
416 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
17: Presentation of published financial statements 417
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section A Q2
Section A Q3
Section C Q26 Polymer Co
Section C Q44(a)(b) Telenorth Co
HB2022
418 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 1: Mandolin Co
Notes to the financial statements are not required, but all workings must be clearly shown.
Mandolin Co
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH 20X3
$’000
Revenue 124,900
Other expenses represent the cost of a major restructuring undertaken during the period.
MANDOLIN CO
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 MARCH 20X3
$’000
Non-current assets
72,262
Current assets
HB2022
17: Presentation of published financial statements 419
15,685
87,947
Equity
59,962
Non-current liabilities
Current liabilities
9,735
87,947
HB2022
420 Financial Reporting (FR)
Workings
1 Expenses
Opening
inventories 4,852
Depreciation on
buildings (W2) 1,515
Depreciation on
P&E (W2) 513
Closing
inventories
(5,180 – (W3)
15) (5,165) – – –
HB2022
17: Presentation of published financial statements 421
Accumulated depreciation
b/d – (6,060) (1,670) (7,730)
• ($3,720 – $1,670) ×
25% – – (513) (513)
Revaluation (balancing
figure) 4,000 – – 4,000
3 Inventories
$’000
Defective batch:
Selling price 55
Cost to complete: repackaging required (20)
NRV 35
Cost (50)
Write-off required (15)
4 Share issue
The proceeds have been recorded separately in the trial balance. This requires a transfer to the
appropriate accounts:
$’000 $’000
DEBIT Proceeds of share issue 2,400
CREDIT Share capital (2,000 × $1) 2,000
CREDIT Share premium (2,000 × $0.20) 400
HB2022
422 Financial Reporting (FR)
18
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Define and account for non-current assets held for sale and B9(b)
discontinued operations.
Exam context
This chapter considers the IFRS Standards which deal with presentation issues, such as a change
in an accounting policy or the correction of a fundamental error which are both covered by IAS 8
Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors. Questions covering IAS 8 are
more likely to feature in Section A or B questions. However, it could also be covered as one of the
adjustments in an accounts preparation question, or it could be relevant when considering the
reasons for difference between two entities or between two periods in an interpretation question.
IFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations looks at how to deal with
business operations which have ceased in the year. You have already seen how to account for
non-current assets that the entity plans to continue to use. IFRS 5 considers the situation where
assets will be sold in the near future. You should note that there is a link between discontinued
operations and the disposal of a subsidiary which is covered in Chapter 11 of this Workbook. You
could be asked to prepare financial statements, or interpret financial statements, that contain a
held for sale asset or discontinued operation in Section C of the exam.
Some transactions take place in foreign currencies. IAS 21 The Effects of Changes in Foreign
Exchange Rates explains which exchange rates to use and how to translate transactions for
inclusion in the financial statements. You are likely to be asked about IAS 21 in Sections A or B,
HB2022
HB2022
424 Financial Reporting (FR)
Chapter overview
Reporting financial performance
Disclosure Disclosure
Disclosure
Disclosure
HB2022
18: Reporting financial performance 425
Accounting policies: The specific principles, bases, conventions, rules and practices applied by
KEY
TERM an entity in preparing and presenting the financial statements (IAS 8: para. 5).
An entity determines its accounting policies by applying the appropriate IFRS Standards.
In the absence of an IFRS Standard applying to a transaction, management uses its judgement to
develop and apply a policy that results in information that is relevant and that faithfully
represents what it purports to represent as outlined in the Conceptual Framework.
In making the judgement management also considers (in order of importance):
(a) IFRS Standards dealing with similar and related issues;
(b) The definitions, recognition criteria and measurement concepts outlined in the Conceptual
Framework; and
(c) The most recent pronouncements of other standard-setting bodies that use a similar
conceptual framework or accepted industry practices.
Accounting policies must be consistently applied for similar transactions, categories, other events
and conditions. The exception being if a standard requires or permits categorisation of items for
which different policies may be appropriate.
HB2022
426 Financial Reporting (FR)
An accounting policy may be measured in a way that involves measurement uncertainty – that is
amounts that cannot be observed directly and must be estimated.
Examples of estimates that may change include:
• Loss allowances for expected credit losses (IFRS 9)
• The net realisable value of inventory (IAS 2)
• The fair value of assets or liabilities (IFRS 13)
• The depreciation expense for items of property, plant and equipment (IAS 16)
• Provisions for warranty obligations (IAS 37)
(IAS 8: para. 32)
HB2022
18: Reporting financial performance 427
Prior period errors: Omissions from, and misstatements in, the entity’s financial statements for
KEY
TERM one or more prior periods arising from a failure to use, or misuse of, reliable information that:
(a) Was available when the financial statements for those periods were authorised for issue;
and
(b) Could reasonably be expected to have been obtained and taken into account in the
preparation and presentation of those financial statements.
(IAS 8: para. 5)
HB2022
428 Financial Reporting (FR)
IAS 8 Accounting Policies, Changes in Accounting Estimates and Errors provides guidance as to
how to account for prior period errors.
Required
Which of the following options describe a prior period error?
A material decrease in the valuation of the closing inventory resulting from a change in
legislation affecting the saleability of the company’s products.
The discovery of a significant fraud in a foreign subsidiary resulting in a write-down in the
valuation of its assets. The perpetrators have confessed to the fraud which goes back at least
five years.
The company has a material under provision for income tax arising from the use of incorrect
data by the tax advisers acting for the company.
A deterioration in sales performance has led to the directors restating their methods for the
calculation of the allowance for irrecoverable debts.
Essential reading
Chapter 18 Section 1 Reporting Financial Performance of the Essential reading covers additional
examples and activities on changes in accounting policies, estimates and errors. Do familiarise
yourself with them and practice the activities.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
2.1 Definition
Disposal group: A group of assets to be disposed of, by sale or otherwise, together as a group
KEY
TERM in a single transaction, and liabilities directly associated with those assets that will be
transferred in the transaction. (In practice a disposal group could be a subsidiary, a cash-
generating unit or a single operation within an entity.)
Cash-generating unit: The smallest identifiable group of assets for which independent cash
flows can be identified and measured (IFRS 5: App A).
Fair value: The price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an
orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.
Costs of disposal: The incremental costs directly attributable to the disposal of an asset (or
disposal group), excluding finance costs and income tax expense.
Recoverable amount: The higher of an asset’s fair value less costs of disposal and its value in
use.
Value in use: The present value of estimated future cash flows expected to arise from the
continuing use of an asset and from its disposal at the end of its useful life (IFRS 5: App A).
HB2022
18: Reporting financial performance 429
Tutorial note. Note the difference between the criteria in IFRS 5 and the criteria in IAS 36
(covered in Chapter 5 of this Workbook):
• Under IFRS 5, the carrying amount of the asset immediately before classification as held for
sale is compared to the fair value less costs of disposal.
• Under IAS 36 the carrying amount of the asset is compared to the recoverable amount
(which is the higher of fair value less costs of disposal and value in use).
If the fair value of an asset less costs of disposal is lower than the carrying amount, an
impairment loss is recorded.
• Immediately before initial classification as held for sale, the asset is measured in accordance
with the applicable IFRS Standard (eg property, plant and equipment held under the IAS 16
revaluation model is revalued).
• On classification of the non-current asset as held for sale, it is written down to fair value less
costs to sell (if less than carrying amount). Any impairment loss arising under IFRS 5 is
charged to profit or loss.
• Non-current assets classified as held for sale are not depreciated/amortised.
• Disclosure:
- As a single amount separately from other assets;
- On the face of the statement of financial position; and
- Normally as current assets
HB2022
430 Financial Reporting (FR)
Starlight Co has an asset with a carrying amount of $150,000 at 1 January 20X3 held under the
cost model (cost $200,000) and being depreciated straight line over an eight-year life to a nil
residual value. At 1 July 20X3, Starlight Co classifies the asset as held for sale (and all necessary
criteria is met). At that date, it is estimated that the asset could be sold for $135,000 and that it
would cost $1,000 to secure the sale.
Required
What is the amount charged to the profit or loss on 1 July 20X3 on classification of the asset as
held for sale?
$2,500
$3,500
$7,000
$9,000
2.4.1 Definition
IFRS 5 requires specific disclosures for components meeting the definition during the accounting
period. This allows users to distinguish between operations which will continue in the future and
those which will not, and makes it more possible to predict future results.
HB2022
18: Reporting financial performance 431
Essential reading
Chapter 18 Section 3 of the Essential reading has examples of proforma disclosure for
discontinued operations.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
Activity 3: Milligan Co
MILLIGAN CO STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE
YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X1
20X1
$’000
Revenue 3,000
Cost of sales (1,000)
Gross profit 2,000
Distribution costs (400)
Administrative expenses (900)
Profit before tax 700
Income tax expense (210)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 490
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 40
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR 530
During the year, Milligan Co ran down a material business operation with all activities ceasing on
26 December 20X1. The results of the operation for 20X1 were as follows:
20X1
$’000
Revenue 320
Cost of sales (150)
Gross profit 170
Distribution costs (120)
Administrative expenses (100)
Loss before tax (50)
Income tax expense 15
HB2022
432 Financial Reporting (FR)
Milligan Co recognised a loss of $30,000 on initial classification of the assets of the discontinued
operation as held for sale, followed by a subsequent gain of $120,000 on their disposal in 20X1.
These have been netted against administrative expenses. The income tax rate applicable to profits
on continuing operations and tax savings on the discontinued operation’s losses is 30%.
Required
Prepare the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year ended 31
December 20X1 for Milligan Co complying with the provisions of IFRS 5.
Solution
MILLIGAN CO STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE
YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X1
20X1
$’000
Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses
HB2022
18: Reporting financial performance 433
20X1
$’000
Revenue
Cost of sales
Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses
3 Foreign currency
An entity may trade with customers and suppliers overseas (foreign transactions). This may result
in invoices being denominated in a foreign currency. Therefore, the entity will need to translate
these invoices into its own currency in order to record the double entry in its accounting records.
HB2022
434 Financial Reporting (FR)
Foreign currency: Foreign currency is a currency other than the functional currency of the
KEY
TERM entity (IAS 21: para. 8).
Functional currency: Functional currency is the currency of the primary economic
environment in which the entity operates (IAS 21: para. 8).
Presentational currency: Presentation currency is the currency in which the financial
statements are presented (IAS 21: para. 8).
An entity can present its financial statements in any currency (or currencies) it chooses.
Its presentation currency will normally be the same as its functional currency (the currency of
the country in which it operates).
HB2022
18: Reporting financial performance 435
Non-monetary assets measured at fair value Retranslate at exchange rate when the fair
value was determined
San Francisco Co, a company whose functional currency is the dollar, entered into the following
foreign currency transaction:
31.10.X8 Purchased goods from Mexico SA for 129,000 Mexican pesos
31.12.X8 Payables have not yet been paid
31.1.X9 San Francisco Co paid its payables
The exchange rates are as follows:
Pesos to $1
31.10.X8 9.5
31.12.X8 10.0
31.1.X9 9.7
Required
How would this transaction be recorded in the books of San Francisco Co as at 31 December
20X8?
Solution
HB2022
436 Financial Reporting (FR)
Tinker Co operates in A-Land and its functional currency is the A$. On 1 January 20X3, Tinker Co
purchases some land in a foreign currency for B$5,600,000. Tinker Co chooses to hold its land
under the revaluation model. On 31 December 20X3, the land is revalued to B$7,000,000.
The following exchange rates are relevant:
Required
On 31 December 20X3, what is the accounting entry required to record the revaluation of the land
in Tinker Co’s records?
Solution
PER alert
One of the competences you require to fulfil Performance Objective 8 of the PER is the ability
to evaluate the effect of chosen accounting policies on the reported performance and position
of the company. Also, to demonstrate the ability to evaluate any underlying estimates on the
position of the entity.
HB2022
18: Reporting financial performance 437
HB2022
438 Financial Reporting (FR)
Disclosure
• Nature of the change
• Quantify the effect of the
change
HB2022
18: Reporting financial performance 439
Aids the users of the statements Discontinued operations • Functional currency: currency
to under the future of the • A major line of of the primary economic
company's operations business/geographical region environment in which the entity
of business; or operates
• Part of a single co-ordinated • Translated at spot rate at date
Non-current assets held for sale plan to dispose of a major of transaction.
To be classified as 'held for sale': line/geographical region of • Restatement at year end
business; or (closing rate) if: Monetary
(a) The asset must be available
• Subsidiary acquired for resale assets and liabilities
for immediate sale in its
• Exchange differences
present condition, subject
recognised in SOPL
only to usual and customary
Disclosure • Differences arising on items in
sales terms; and
OCI are also charged to OCI
(b) The sale must be highly • On the face of the SOPL: single
(eg revaluations)
probable amount of post-tax profit or
loss of discontinued operations
and post-tax gain/loss on any
Accounting treatment FV adjustments
• Write down NCA to FV less • On the face of the statement of
costs to sell (if less than CA) profit or loss and other
• Impairment loss charged to comprehensive income or in
SOPL the notes:
• NCA classified as 'Held for sale' – Revenue
and not depreciated/amortised – Expenses
– Profit before tax
– Income tax expense
Disclosure – Post-tax gain or loss on
• As a single amount separately disposal of assets or on
from other assets remeasurement to fair value
• On the face of the SOFP less costs to sell
• Normally as current assets
HB2022
440 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
18: Reporting financial performance 441
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section A Q7
Section B Q22(e)
Section C Q30 Hewlett Co
HB2022
442 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 1: IAS 8
The correct answer is: The discovery of a significant fraud in a foreign subsidiary resulting in a
write-down in the valuation of its assets. The perpetrators have confessed to the fraud which goes
back at least five years.
The discovery of a significant fraud A fraud dating back five years is a prior period error and
in a foreign subsidiary resulting in a will require to be accounted for retrospectively.
write-down in the valuation of its
assets. The perpetrators have
confessed to the fraud which goes
back at least five years.
The company has a material under This is an error in the estimated amount of income tax. It
provision for income tax arising from does not require to be adjusted retrospectively. Under
the use of incorrect data by the tax and over provisions of income tax are accounted for in
advisers acting for the company. the period in which they are first discovered.
Activity 2: Starlight Co
The correct answer is: $3,500
At 1 July 20X3, the carrying amount of the asset is $137,500 ($150,000 – $200,000/8 × 6/12). Its
fair value less costs to sell is $134,000.
Therefore, a loss of $3,500 is recognised in profit or loss.
Activity 3: Milligan Co
MILLIGAN CO STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE
YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X1
20X1
$’000
HB2022
18: Reporting financial performance 443
$’000
20X1
$’000
Revenue 320
$ $
31.10.X8 Purchases (129,000 / 9.50) 13,579
Payables 13,579
HB2022
444 Financial Reporting (FR)
Working
Payables
$
Payables as at 31.12.X8 (129,000 / 10) 12,900
Payables as previously recorded 13,579
Exchange gain 679
A$
Revalued amount (B$7,000,000 / 7) 1,000,000
Less: Carrying amount of land (700,000)
Revaluation surplus 300,000
$ $
DEBIT Land 300,000
CREDIT Revaluation surplus 300,000
Note that there is no need to separate out the exchange gain or loss when revaluing a foreign
currency asset.
HB2022
18: Reporting financial performance 445
Chapter overview
cess skills
Exam suc
r planning
Answe
c FR skills C
n Specifi o
tio
rr req
a
ec ui
of
m
t i rem
or
nt
inf
erp ents
ng
Approach to Application
reta
agi
tion
Spreadsheet Interpretation
l y si s
Go od
skills skills
ana
ti m
Approach
c al
em
to Case
e ri
OTQs
an
um
ag
tn
em
en
en
t ci
Effi
Effe cti
ve writing
a nd p r
esentation
Introduction
One of the Section C questions in the Financial Reporting exam will require you to interpret the
financial statements of a single entity or a group. The question will usually require the calculation
of ratios, but your focus should be on using the information provided in the scenario to interpret
those ratios and explain the change in performance and position of the single entity or group you
are presented with.
Given that the interpretation of financial statements will feature in Section C of every exam, it is
essential that you master the appropriate technique for analysing and interpreting information
and drawing relevant conclusions in order to maximise your chance of passing the exam.
HB2022
This is the information that was given in This is the blank answer space in which
the question and can't be changed you should type your adjustments
Candidates were then asked to calculate ratios using the adjusted financial statements. A pre-
formatted response area was not provided for this part of the question, but you should use the
table function within the word processing software to present your answers.
Note that there is no option to use the spreadsheet response area in the interpretations question
and therefore no formulae are available. You can bring up the calculator function to perform your
calculations, but the marker will not be able to see what you type in the calculator, so it is not a
replacement for writing out your workings clearly.
HB2022
448 Financial Reporting (FR)
The majority of the marks in an interpretation question will come from your commentary and
interpretation of the ratios calculated. You will not be provided with a pre-formatted response
area for this part of the question; however, you can copy key words or headings from the question
into the response area to help to give your answer structure and/or use the functions within the
word processing response area to format your answer in a professional manner that will help with
the structure and clarity to your answer. Consider adopting a format similar to the following:
4) The notes to the financial Operating profit margin Clear headings are used.
statements show that Cook Co
paid its directors total salaries • Dough Co has a significantly lower operating profit margin than Cook Co. This may be due to Dough Co
paying much higher salaries, which are likely to be presented in operating expenses, to its directors than
of $110,000 whereas Dough Cook Co.
Co paid its directors total
salaries of $560,000
Points made are concise,
relevant and use the information
provided in the question.
Candidates will be asked to comment on performance and position of the entity or group using
information provided in the scenario. The Financial Reporting examining team will expect you to
go beyond calculations and require you to explain your findings, offering reasons for the
movements and the results of any financial calculations with reference to the information in the
scenario. When you are interpreting the financial statements, you should consider whether
information relating to any of the following is provided in the question:
• Prices increases or decreases that may impact on margins
• The existence of competitors or new entrants to the market which puts pressure on sales or
requires promotions to be applied
• A change in supplier, wage rises for employees or new legislation which has increased cost of
sales or operating expenses and impacts on margins
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 5: Interpretation skills 449
HB2022
450 Financial Reporting (FR)
Skill Activity
STEP 1 Read the requirement carefully to see what calculations are required and how many marks are set for the
calculation and how many for the commentary.
Work out how many minutes you have available to answer each sub requirement.
Required
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 5: Interpretation skills 451
20X1 20X0
$’000 $’000
Revenue (Note 1) 25,500 17,250
Cost of sales (14,800) (10,350)
Gross profit (Note 2) 10,700 6,900
HB2022
452 Financial Reporting (FR)
Notes.
1 Increase in revenue 48%.
2 Increase in gross profit is 55%, compared to revenue, this is suggesting efficiency during production.
3 Rise in finance costs (there is a significant rise in loans on the SOFP too). Consider interest cover and
reasons why the loan may have been obtained.
4 Income tax increased by 125% in 20X1. Profit before tax increased by 50%. What could be the cause?
20X1 20X0
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 9,500 5,400
Intangible assets (Note 1) 6,200 -
15,700 5,400
Current assets
Inventories (Note 2) 3,600 1,800
Trade receivables 2,400 1,400
Cash and cash equivalents - 4,000
Non-current assets held for
sale 2,000 8,000 - 7,200
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 5: Interpretation skills 453
Notes.
1 What are the intangible assets? Why the significant rise year on year? Consider potential problems
here such as incorrect capitalisation of R&D costs.
2 Increase in inventories and trade receivables, suggesting possible liquidity issues. Compare increase in
receivables with increase in revenue.
3 Increase in shares, has this been from a bonus issue (no cash flow) or rights issue (cash flow)? Increase
in shares used to fund capital growth.
4 Increase in loans, again suggesting cash for capital growth.
5 Bank overdraft, possible liquidity issues?
Additional information:
Required
HB2022
454 Financial Reporting (FR)
Required
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 5: Interpretation skills 455
Besides the plan which generates ideas, you will need to ensure that you have a brief introduction
(because it is the shareholder who needs the question answering) and a conclusion to summarise
your findings.
STEP 4 Write your answer
As you write your answer, try wherever possible to apply your analysis to the scenario, instead of simply
writing about the financial topic in generic, technical terms. As you write your answer, explain what you
mean – in one (or two) sentence(s) – and then explain why this matters in the given scenario. This should
result in a series of short paragraphs that address the specific context of the scenario.
Required
(a) Overview
HB2022
456 Financial Reporting (FR)
Position/Gearing 24
Don’t just state that there is an
24 increase in loan capital, explain how it
The increase in loan capital does have significance for
affects their returns (or company profits,
shareholders. The interest charge has increased from such as increase in finance costs).
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 5: Interpretation skills 457
Fazit
HB2022
458 Financial Reporting (FR)
The drop down feature can help Bullet points or numbered lists can help to
you to quickly format headings present your work clearly. Ensure you write in
and sub-headings full sentences even when bullet points are used.
26
Ratios26 Ratios are kept in a separate appendix.
20X1 20X0
Net profit % (note) (3,000/25,500) / (2,500/17,250) 11.8% 14.5%
Net profit % (pre-tax) (5,250/25,500) / (3,500/17,250) 20.6% 20.3%
Gross profit % (10,700/25,500) / (6,900/17,250) 42% 40%
ROCE (5,900/18,500) / (3,600/9,250) 31.9% 38.9%
ROE (3,000/9,500) / (2,500/7,250) 31.6% 34.5%
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 5: Interpretation skills 459
Table
Column 4x8
Once you have created the table, ensure that you add
appropriate column headings and clearly label your
rows in order that the marker can understand your
calculations and how they have been arrived at.
Note. There are 9 ratios calculated here. You would only need 5 of these at most, as only 5 marks
are available. Do not waste your time providing ratios that are not asked for or are not relevant to
the scenario and the requirement as you will not score credit.
HB2022
460 Financial Reporting (FR)
Managing information Ensure you highlight or underline useful information and make
notes in the margins where appropriate.
Think about the impact of each issue or ratio on the
performance or position of the company.
Ensure you answer the query posed by the shareholder.
Answer planning Check that your plan covered all parts of the question.
Make sure you generate enough points to score a pass.
Correct interpretation of the Ensure you analyse the requirements and address all aspects
requirements in your answer.
Efficient numerical analysis Use the preformatted response area provided or create a table
in the spreadsheet response area to show your calculations,
including all workings, clearly.
Effective writing and Use headings and sub-headings, and consider using the drop
presentation down options within the word processing software to format
them.
Write in full sentences and use professional language.
Extended bullet points are acceptable.
Answer all the requirements.
Structure your answer with the assistance of a draft plan.
Most important action points to apply to your next question – Remember that you are asked
to interpret the ratios using the information in the scenario, not to explain what the ratio
means in generic terms.
Summary
For a question requiring you to explain the impact on a specified ratio, the key to success is to
think of the formula of the ratio. Then you need to think about the double entry and the impact it
has on the numerator and/or denominator and therefore the overall ratio.
However, this is a very broad syllabus area that could generate many different types of questions
so the approach in this Skills Checkpoint will have to be adapted to suit the specific requirements
and scenario in the exam. The basic five steps for answering any FR question will always be a
good starting point:
(a) Time (1.8 minutes per mark)
(b) Read and analyse the requirement(s)
HB2022
Skills Checkpoint 5: Interpretation skills 461
HB2022
462 Financial Reporting (FR)
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
• Explain why the trend of eps may be a more accurate C3(d)(i) and (ii)
indicator of performance than a company’s profit trend and
the importance of eps as a stock market indicator.
• Discuss the limitations of using eps as a performance
measure.
19
Exam context
Earnings per share (eps) is a commonly reported performance measure. It is widely used by
investors as a measure of a company’s performance and is of particular importance for
comparing the results of an entity over time and for comparing the performance of one entity
against another. It also allows investors to compare against the returns obtainable from loan stock
and other forms of investment. It is important in the Financial Reporting exam that you can
calculate basic and diluted eps, and that you can interpret why changes or differences in eps
may have occurred. You could be examined on eps as an OT question in Section A or B of the
exam, or in Section C of the exam you could be asked to calculate eps after preparing the
statement of profit or loss in an accounts preparation question or be asked to interpret eps in an
interpretation question.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Earnings per share
Basic eps
Objective Calculation
Presentation
Convertible debt
HB2022
464 Financial Reporting (FR)
Ordinary shares: ‘An equity instrument that is subordinate to all other classes of equity
KEY
TERM instruments’. (IAS 33: para. 5)
Potential ordinary share: ‘A financial instrument or other contract that may entitle its holder to
ordinary shares’. (IAS 33: para. 5)
Options, warrants and their equivalents: ‘Financial instruments that give the holder the right
to purchase ordinary shares’. (IAS 33: para. 5)
Financial instrument: ‘Any contract that gives rise to both a financial asset of one entity and a
financial liability or equity instrument of another entity’. (IAS 32: para. 11)
Equity instrument: ‘Any contract that evidences a residual interest in the assets of an entity
after deducting all of its liabilities’. (IAS 32: para. 11)
Dilution: ‘A reduction in earnings per share or an increase in loss per share resulting from the
assumption that convertible instruments are converted, that options or warrants are exercised,
or that ordinary shares are issued upon the satisfaction of specified conditions’. (IAS 33: para.
5)
1.2 Presentation
Both basic and diluted eps are shown on the face of the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income with equal prominence whether the result is positive or negative for each
class of ordinary shares and period presented.
1.3 Calculation
The basic eps calculation is:
Earnings
eps = cents
Weighted average no. of equity shares outstanding during the period
1.3.1 Earnings
Earnings is profit or loss for the period attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent,
which is the consolidated profit after deducting:
• Income taxes
• Non-controlling interests
• Preference dividends (on preference shares classified as equity)*
*As you may recall from Chapter 12, redeemable preference shares are treated as financial
liabilities and their dividends as a finance cost, which will already have been deducted in arriving
at the consolidated profit. (IAS 33: paras. 12–14)
HB2022
19: Earnings per share 465
An extract from Apricot’s consolidated statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December
20X9 is as follows:
$’000
Profit for the year attributable to:
Owners of the parent 7,000
Non-controlling interests 1,000
8,000
Share issues
HB2022
466 Financial Reporting (FR)
Murray Co has a year end of 31 December 20X2. On 1 October 20X2, it issued 300,000 shares at
full market price. The share capital before the share issue was 600,000 shares.
Required
Calculate the weighted average number of shares that should be used in the basic earnings per
share calculation for the year ended 31 December 20X2.
Solution
Weighted number of shares:
20X2 20X1
Assets (eg cash) $100,000 $100,000
Earnings $20,000 $20,000
Shares 200,000 100,000
eps 10c 20c
To make eps comparable, we need to restate the 20X1 figure as if it had the same share capital as
20X2, ie $20,000 / 100,000 × 2/1.
This is algebraically the same as restating the previous eps by the reciprocal of the bonus
fraction, ie 20c × 1/2 = 10c.
HB2022
19: Earnings per share 467
Greymatter Co has a year end of 31 December 20X2. It had 400,000 shares in issue until 30
September 20X2 when it made a bonus issue of 100,000 shares. Its earnings for 20X2 were
$80,000 and its eps 20X1 was $0.1875.
Required
Calculate the eps for 20X2 and the restated figure for 20X1.
Solution
A bonus fraction which must be applied in respect of the bonus shares is calculated as:
HB2022
468 Financial Reporting (FR)
Monty Co makes a rights issue on a 1 for 4 basis. Monty Co’s share price immediately before
exercise of rights is $10 and the rights price is $6.50.
Required
Calculate the bonus fraction.
Solution
$
4 @ 10 = 40.00
1 @ 6.50 6.50
5 46.50
Essential reading
Chapter 19, Section 2 of the Essential reading provides the procedure that you should apply when
a rights issue has been made in the year. It also includes an activity which gives another
opportunity to practise the rights issue calculations.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
19: Earnings per share 469
2 Diluted eps
2.1 The issue
Basic eps is calculated by comparing earnings with the number of shares currently in issue. If an
entity has a commitment to issue shares in the future, for example on the exercise of options or
the conversion of loan stock, this may result in a change to the basic eps. IAS 33 refers to such
commitments as ‘potential ordinary shares’, defined as ‘a financial instrument or other contract
that may entitle its holder to ordinary shares’ (IAS 33: para. 5).
Diluted eps shows how basic eps would change if potential ordinary shares (such as convertible
debt) become ordinary shares. It is therefore a ‘warning’ measure of what may happen in the
future for current ordinary shareholders.
When the potential shares are actually issued, the impact on basic eps will be twofold:
2.3.1 Earnings
Earnings is adjusted for the interest or preference dividends which would be ‘saved‘ if conversion
into ordinary shares took place. Interest on convertible debt attracts tax relief. This tax relief will
be lost on conversion of the debt into ordinary shares, therefore, the net increase in earnings
(which is an after-tax figure) is the interest less the tax relief.
HB2022
470 Financial Reporting (FR)
Diluted number X
Acorn Co had the same 10 million ordinary shares in issue on both 1 April 20X1 and 31 March
20X2. On 1 April 20X1, the company issued 1.2 million $1 units of 5% convertible loan stock. Each
unit of loan stock is convertible into four ordinary shares on 1 April 20X9 at the option of the
holder. The following is an extract from Acorn Co’s statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income for the year ended 31 March 20X2:
$’000
Profit before interest and tax 980
Finance cost on 5% convertible loan stock (60)
Profit before tax 920
Income tax at 30% (276)
Profit for the year 644
Required
What is the diluted earnings per share for the year ended 31 March 20X2?
4.76c
4.64c
4.35c
6.86c
HB2022
19: Earnings per share 471
Shares that would have been issued Shares that are treated as having
+
if the cash received on exercise of been issued for no consideration
the option / warrant had been used to
buy shares at average market price
for the period
2.4.1 Calculation
It is only the shares deemed to have been issued for no consideration which are added to the
number of shares in issue when calculating diluted eps (shares issued at full market price have no
dilutive effect). There is no impact on earnings.
Galaxy Co has a profit for the year of $3 million for the year. 1.4 million ordinary shares were in
issue during the year.
Galaxy Co also had 250,000 options outstanding for the whole year with an exercise price of $15.
The AMP of one ordinary share during the period was $20.
Required
What is the diluted eps?
$2.05
$1.89
$2.14
$1.88
Essential reading
Chapter 19, Section 3 of the Essential reading contains a further activity which will allow you to
practise calculating diluted eps.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
472 Financial Reporting (FR)
Essential reading
Chapter 19, Section 4 of the Essential reading provides further information relating to the
disclosure of eps and Section 5 on alternative ways of presenting the eps figure.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
19: Earnings per share 473
Basic eps
Objective Calculation
• Improve comparison between entities and over Earnings
• Basic EPS =
periods Weighted average no. of equity shares
• Applies to listed companies only outstanding during the period
• Earnings is profit attributable to ordinary
shareholders of the parent ie consolidated profit
Definitions after:
• Ordinary shares – equity instrument subordinate to – Income taxes
all other classes of equity instruments – Non-controlling interests
• Potential ordinary shares – financial instrument – Preference dividends on preference shares
that may entitle its holder to ordinary shares. classified as equity
• Financial instrument – contract that gives a
financial asset of one entity and a financial liability
or equity instrument of another entity. Weighted average number of shares outstanding
• Equity instrument – any contract that evidences a • Full market price:
residual interest in the assets of an entity after – Time apportion share issues in the year
deducting all of its liabilities. • Bonus issue:
• Dilution – A reduction in earnings per share or an Number of shares after bonus issue
increase in loss per share – Bonus fraction =
Number of shares before bonus issue
– Use bonus fraction retrospectively in current year
– Fraction = no shares after/no shares before
Presentation
– Use reciprocal to restate comparative
Basic and diluted EPS shown on face of SPLOCI with
• Rights issue:
equal prominence Fair value per share immediately
– Bonus fraction = before exercise of rights
for rights issue Theoretical ex-rights price (TERP)
– Use bonus fraction retrospectively in current year
– Fraction = FV before rights/TERP
– Use reciprocal to restate comparative
HB2022
474 Financial Reporting (FR)
No. of shares
Basic weighted average number of shares X
Add additional (max) shares on conversion X
Diluted number of shares X
Working 1
No. shares under option X
Less no. that would have been issued at average
market price X
No. of shares deemed issued for nil consideration X
HB2022
19: Earnings per share 475
1. Basic eps
Basic eps is calculated as earnings/weighted average number of equity shares outstanding during
the period.
Earnings is consolidated profit after tax, non-controlling interest and preference dividends (on
redeemable preference shares).
The weighted average number of shares is adjusted for issues in the period. Share issues may be:
• Issued at full market value – include pro-rata
• Bonus issues – calculate bonus fraction and apply it retrospectively
• Rights issue – separate into shares paid for at full value and bonus issue; calculate the bonus
fraction and apply it retrospectively
2. Diluted eps
Diluted eps represents a ‘warning’ measure of how eps would change if ‘potential ordinary shares’
were converted into shares. Both earnings and the number of shares are adjusted for the effects
of the conversion of debt into shares. The number of shares is adjusted for the effects of share
options/warrants into shares.
HB2022
476 Financial Reporting (FR)
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section A Q17
Section C Q41 Alpha Co
Section C Q44 Telenorth Co
Section C Q48 Pilum Co
HB2022
19: Earnings per share 477
$’000
Profit for the year attributable to the owners of the parent 7,000
Less: Preference dividends on preference shares classified as equity (500,000 × 6%) (30)
6,970
The irredeemable preference shares are classified as equity as there is no obligation to pay the
dividends or repay the principal. Therefore, the dividends on the preference shares need to be
deducted from the profit for the year attributable to the owners to the parent to arrive at earnings
relating to ordinary shareholders.
However, the redeemable preference shares are classified as a financial liability as there is an
obligation to pay the dividends and to repay the principal. Therefore, the dividends on these
shares are treated as a finance cost so have already been deducted in arriving at the profit for
the year figure. As such, there is no need to deduct them when calculating earnings.
20X2
Earnings $80,000
The number of shares for 20X1 must also be adjusted if the figures for eps are to remain
comparable.
The eps for 20X1 is therefore restated as:
$0.1875 × 400,000/500,000 = $0.15
Workings
1 Weighted average number of shares
Bonus Weighted
Date Narrative Shares Time fraction average
× (3.10/3.00
(W2)) ×
1.1.20X1 2,000,000 × (4/12) (21/20) 723,333
HB2022
478 Financial Reporting (FR)
2 TERP
$
10 @ $3.10 31.00
1 @ $2.00 2.00
11 33.00
33/11 = $3.00
2 The correct answer is: 16.5c
Eps for year ended 31.12.X1 = $400,000 / 2,431,508 (W) = 16.5c
3 The correct answer is: 17.1c
Restated eps for year ended 31.12.20X0
18.6c × 3.00/3.10 × 20/21 = 17.1c
$
Basic 644,000
Interest saving, net of tax 1,200,000 @ 5% × 70% 42,000
686,000
Number of shares
Basic 10,000,000
On conversion (1,200,000 × 4) 4,800,000
14,800,000
No that would have been issued at average market price [(250,000 × (187,500)
HB2022
19: Earnings per share 479
HB2022
480 Financial Reporting (FR)
20
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Discuss how the use of current values affects the interpretation of C2(f)
financial statements and how this would compare to using
historical cost.
Exam context
Interpretation questions can be examined in either Section A, B or C of the Financial Reporting
exam. One of the 20-mark questions in Section C of the exam will require you to interpret the
financial statements, and other information, of either a single entity or a group. The Financial
Reporting Examining team has stated that ‘although candidates will be expected to calculate
various accounting ratios, Financial Reporting places emphasis on the interpretation of what
particular ratios are intended to measure and the impact that consolidation adjustments may
have on any comparisons of group financial statements. The financial statements that require
interpretation will include the Statement of Profit or Loss, the Statement of Financial Position and
HB2022
HB2022
482 Financial Reporting (FR)
Chapter overview
Interpretation of financial statements
Profitability ratios
Interpretation questions
in the exam
Short term liquidity
and efficiency
Stakeholder perspectives
Long-term liquidity/gearing
Investors' ratios
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 483
1.1.2 Interpretation
Interpretation involves using the ratios calculated, the financial statements provided and
information within a scenario to explain your understanding of the performance and position of
an entity in the period.
For ratios to be useful, comparisons must be made – on a year-to-year basis, or between
companies. On their own, they are useless for any sensible decision-making. It is important that
you use information you are provided with about an entity to draw conclusions as to why a ratio
has changed or is different to another entity.
It is important that you understand what the ratio is intended to show in order to explain it
correctly.
HB2022
484 Financial Reporting (FR)
Formula to learn
PBIT
ROCE = × 100
Capital Employed
PBIT = profit before interest and tax. It is often referred to internationally as IBIT (income before
interest and tax) and may also be called operating profit.
Capital employed = debt + equity = TALCL (total assets less current liabilities). It represents the
debt and equity capital that is used by the company to generate profit.
Return on capital employed (ROCE) measures how efficiently a company uses its capital to
generate profits. A potential investor or lender should compare the return to a target return or a
return on other investments/loans. It is impossible to assess profits or profit growth properly
without relating them to the amount of funds (capital) that were employed in making the profits.
Therefore, ROCE is a very important profitability ratio as it allows the profitability of different
companies or time periods to be compared.
When considering changes in ROCE year to year or differences between entities, consider looking
PBIT and capital employed separately to understand if transactions or events that you are made
aware of in the scenario impact on both the numerator and denominator in the same way. If a
transaction only impacts profit, or only impacts capital employed, that would affect the ROCE for
that company/period.
The following are reasons why ROCE might differ between years or companies.
(a) Type of industry (a manufacturing company will typically have higher assets and therefore
lower ROCE than a services or knowledge-based company)
(b) Age of assets (old assets have a lower carrying amount resulting in low capital employed and
high ROCE)
(c) Leased assets versus asset purchased outright for cash (a leased asset results in recognition
of a lease liability, a proportion of which will appear as a non-current liability, increasing
capital employed and reducing ROCE; whereas an asset purchased with surplus cash will
have no impact on capital employed)
(d) Timing of the purchase of assets (eg if assets are purchased at the year-end, capital
employed will increase but there will have been no time to increase profits yet, so ROCE is
likely to fall).
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 485
Illustration 1: ROCE
Maroon Co has PBIT of $1.64 million and capital employed of $32.85 million at 31 December 20X5.
Its ROCE for 20X5 has, therefore, been calculated as 5.0%, a significant decrease on the ROCE
for 20X4 of 6.8%.
Further information has revealed that Maroon Co purchased $10 million of non-current assets on
20 December 20X5. Maroon Co fully financed the purchase using a bank loan taken out on the
same date.
Required
Discuss the reasons for the decrease in ROCE.
Solution
The timing of the purchase of the asset, just before the year-end means that the machine will not
have been able to impact profit/returns. We have the situation where the denominator (capital
employed) has increased by $10 million without any corresponding increase in the numerator
(return). Without the $10 million loan, the ROCE would have been 7.2% ($1.64m / ($32.65m –
$10m)), which is actually a slight improvement on the 20X4 ROCE.
It is important that you read the information given on the question carefully and consider the
interactions between increases and decreases to profit/return and capital employed in the light of
the business’s performance for the year. Taking ROCE as a standalone figure does not give the
user of the financial statements the whole picture.
We often sub‑analyse ROCE, to find out more about why the ROCE is high or low, or better or
worse than last year. There are two factors that contribute towards a return on capital employed:
Formula to learn
PBIT
Net profit margin = × 100
Revenue
Net (operating) profit margin considers how much of an entity’s sales are converted to profit.
There is no right or wrong net profit margin that an entity should achieve and what is ‘normal’ will
vary by industry and by company based on the target market of that company. It is important
that you consider volume of sales as well as the net profit margin. For example, a company that
makes a profit of 25c per $1 of sales is making a bigger return on its revenue than another
company making a profit of only 10c per $1 of sale. However, if the high margin is because sales
prices are high, there is a strong possibility that the volume of sales will be low and, therefore,
revenue may be depressed, and so the asset turnover will be lower.
HB2022
486 Financial Reporting (FR)
Formula to learn
Revenue
Asset turnover =
Capital employed
Asset turnover is a measure of how well the assets (total assets less current liabilities) of a business
are being used to generate sales. For example, if two companies each have capital employed of
$100,000 and Company A makes sales of $400,000 per annum whereas Company B makes sales
of only $200,000 per annum, Company A is making a higher revenue from the same amount of
assets (twice as much asset turnover as Company B) and this will help A to make a higher return
on capital employed than B. Asset turnover is expressed as ‘x times’ so that assets generate x
times their value in annual sales. Here, Company A’s asset turnover is four times and B’s is two
times.
Extracts from the financial statements of Burke for the year ended 31 December 20X1 are shown
below:
EXTRACT FROM THE STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS
$’000
Gross profit 300
Finance cost (10)
Profit before tax 230
Tax (70)
Profit for the year 160
$’000
Non-current assets 550
Equity
Share capital 200
Share premium 40
Retained earnings 500
Revaluation surplus 60
Required
Calculate Burke’s return on capital employed for the year ended 31 December 20X1. Give your
answer as a percentage to one decimal place.
%
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 487
Formula to learn
Whilst the return on capital employed looks at the overall return on the long-term sources of
finance, return on equity focuses on the return for the ordinary shareholders.
Return on equity gives a more restricted view of capital than ROCE, but it is based on the same
principles. ROE is not a widely used ratio, however, because there are more useful ratios that give
an indication of the return to shareholders, such as earnings per share, dividend per share,
dividend yield and earnings yield, which are described later.
Formula to learn
Gross profit
Gross profit margin = × 100
Revenue
The gross profit margin measures how well a company is running its core operations.
Depending on the format of the statement of profit or loss, you may be able to calculate the gross
profit margin as well as the net profit margin. Gross profit margin is a measure of the profit
generated from an entity’s sales. Looking at the two profit margins together can be quite
informative. If two entities have a similar net profit margin but a different gross profit margin, it
may be that they classify expenses differently which causes the inconsistency. For example, one
company might present the depreciation on its machinery in cost of sales, which will reduce the
gross profit margin. Another company might present the depreciation on its machinery as an
administrative expense and therefore report a higher gross profit margin. When it comes to
calculating the net profit margin, where the depreciation is presented does not make a difference.
HB2022
488 Financial Reporting (FR)
The following information is available for two potential acquisition targets. The entities have
similar capital structures and both operate in the manufacturing sector.
Fulton Hutton
Revenue $460m $420m
Gross profit margin 25% 14%
Net profit margin 10% 9%
Required
Which TWO of the following statements give realistic conclusions that could be drawn from the
above information? Tick the correct answers.
Hutton has sourced cheaper raw materials than Fulton.
Fulton operates its production process more efficiently than Hutton with less wastage and
more goods produced per machine hour.
Hutton operates in the low price end of the market but incurs similar manufacturing costs to
Fulton.
Fulton’s management exercises better cost control of the entity’s non-production overheads
than Hutton’s management.
Hutton has access to cheaper interest rates on its borrowings than Fulton.
Formula to learn
Current assets
Current ratio =
Current liabilities
Current ratio is a measure of a company’s ability to meet its short-term obligations using its
current assets. The idea behind this is that a company should have enough current assets that
give a promise of ‘cash to come’ to meet its future commitments to pay off its current liabilities.
Obviously, a ratio in excess of one should be expected. Otherwise, there would be the prospect
that the company might be unable to pay its debts on time. In practice, a ratio comfortably in
excess of one should be expected, but what is ‘comfortable’ varies between different types of
businesses.
Companies are not able to convert all their current assets into cash very quickly. In particular,
some manufacturing companies might hold large quantities of raw material inventories, which
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 489
Formula to learn
This ratio should ideally be at least one for companies with a slow inventory turnover. For
companies with a fast inventory turnover, a quick ratio can be comfortably less than one without
suggesting that the company could be in cash flow trouble.
Both the current ratio and the quick ratio offer an indication of the company’s liquidity position,
but the absolute figures should not be interpreted too literally. It is often theorised that an
acceptable current ratio is 1.5 and an acceptable quick ratio is 0.8, but these should only be used
as a guide. Different businesses operate in very different ways. A supermarket group for example
might have a current ratio of 0.52 and a quick ratio of 0.17. Supermarkets have low receivables
(people do not buy groceries on credit), low cash (good cash management), medium inventories
(high levels of inventories but quick turnover, particularly in view of perishability) and very high
payables. Contrast this with, for example, a luxury sofa manufacturer is likely to have a higher
current ratio (to cover the time to make the sofas as well as holding sufficient materials on hand).
What is important is the trend of these ratios. From this, one can easily ascertain whether liquidity
is improving or deteriorating. If a supermarket has traded for the last ten years (very successfully)
with current ratios of 0.52 and quick ratios of 0.17, then it should be supposed that the company
can continue in business with those levels of liquidity. If, in the following year, the current ratio
were to fall to 0.38 and the quick ratio to 0.09, then further investigation into the liquidity situation
would be appropriate. It is the relative position that is far more important than the absolute
figures.
Do not forget the other side of the coin either: A current ratio and a quick ratio can get bigger
than they need to be. A company that has large volumes of inventories and receivables might be
over‑investing in working capital, and so tying up more funds in the business than it needs to. This
would suggest poor management of receivables (credit) or inventories by the company.
Activity 3: Liquidity
Which of the following independent options is the most likely cause of the movement in Robbo’s
current ratio?
20X3 20X2
Current ratio 2.1 2.4
HB2022
490 Financial Reporting (FR)
Chapter 20 Section 1 of the Essential reading provides more information on liquidity and the cash
cycle.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
Formula to learn
Inventories
Inventory holding period = × 365 days
Cost of sales
This indicates the average number of days that items of inventory are held for. This is a measure
of how vigorously a business is trading. A lengthening inventory holding period from one year to
the next indicates:
(a) A slowdown in demand/trading; or
(b) A build-up in inventory levels, perhaps suggesting that the investment in inventories is
becoming excessive
Generally, the lower the inventory holding period (ie the fewer days that an entity holds its
inventory) the better, assuming the inventory is being sold at a profit, however several aspects of
inventory holding policy have to be balanced. An entity must hold enough inventory to satisfy
demand, and therefore must consider:
(a) Lead times
(b) Seasonal fluctuations in orders
(c) Alternative uses of warehouse space
(d) Bulk buying discounts
(e) Likelihood of inventory perishing or becoming obsolete
Formula to learn
Trade receivables
Receivables collection period = × 365 days
Credit revenue
The receivables collection period tells us how long, on average, it takes a company to collect
payment from credit customers. Note that any cash sales should be excluded from the revenue
denominator. This ratio only uses credit sales as they generate trade receivables. The trade
receivables are not the total figure for receivables in the statement of financial position, which
includes prepayments and non‑trade receivables. The trade receivables figure will be itemised in
an analysis of the receivable total, in a note to the accounts.
The estimate of the accounts receivable collection period is only approximate.
(a) The value of receivables in the statement of financial position might be abnormally high or
low compared with the ‘normal’ level the company usually has.
(b) Sales revenue in the statement of profit or loss is exclusive of sales taxes, but receivables in
the statement of financial position are inclusive of sales tax. We are not strictly comparing like
with like.
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 491
Formula to learn
Trade payables
Payables payment period = × 365 days
Credit purchases
The payables payment period tells us how long, on average, it takes a company to pay its credit
suppliers. The payables payment period It is rare to find purchases disclosed in published
accounts and so cost of sales serves as an approximation. The payment period often helps to
assess a company’s liquidity; an increase is often a sign of lack of long‑term finance or poor
management of current assets, resulting in the use of extended credit from suppliers, increased
bank overdraft and so on.
Payables Working
payment period capital cycle
Pay payables
HB2022
492 Financial Reporting (FR)
20X9 20X8
Current ratio 1.2 1.5
Receivables collection period 75 days 50 days
Payables payment period 30 days 45 days
Inventory holding period 42 days 35 days
Required
Which TWO of the following statements are correct?
Tungsten Co’s liquidity and working capital has improved in 20X9.
Tungsten Co is receiving cash more quickly from customers in 20X9 than in 20X8.
Tungsten Co is suffering from a worsening liquidity situation in 20X9.
Tungsten Co is paying its suppliers more quickly in 20X9 than in 20X8.
Formulas to learn
Debt
Gearing = × 100
Debt + Equity
Gearing or leverage is concerned with a company’s long‑term capital structure. We can think of
a company as consisting of non-current assets and net current assets (ie working capital, which is
current assets minus current liabilities). These assets must be financed by long‑term capital of the
company, which is one of two things:
(a) Issued share capital which can be divided into:
(i) Ordinary shares plus other equity (eg reserves)
(ii) Non-redeemable preference shares (unusual)
(b) Long-term debt including redeemable preference shares
Preference share capital is normally classified as a non-current liability in accordance with IAS 32
(AG35), and preference dividends (paid or accrued) are included in finance costs in profit or loss.
There is no absolute limit to what a gearing ratio ought to be. A company with a gearing ratio of
more than 50% is said to be high‑geared (whereas low gearing means a gearing ratio of less than
50%). Many companies are high geared, but if a high geared company is becoming increasingly
high geared, it is likely to have difficulty in the future when it wants to borrow even more, unless it
can also boost its shareholders’ capital, either with retained profits or by a new share issue.
Gearing is, amongst other things, an attempt to quantify the degree of risk involved in holding
equity shares in a company, risk both in terms of the company’s ability to remain in business and
in terms of expected ordinary dividends from the company. The problem with a highly geared
company is that by definition there is a lot of debt. Debt generally carries a fixed rate of interest
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 493
Activity 5: Gearing
The following is an extract from the statement of financial position of Fleck Co:
$’000
Equity
Share capital 200
Share premium 50
Retained earnings 400
Revaluation surplus 70
Total equity 720
Non-current liabilities
Long-term borrowings 300
Redeemable preference shares 100
Deferred tax 20
Warranty provision (not discounted) 60
Total non-current liabilities 480
Required
What is the gearing ratio for Fleck (calculated as interest bearing debt/(interest bearing debt +
equity))?
Give your answer as a percentage to one decimal place.
%
Essential reading
Chapter 20 Section 2 of the Essential reading provides discussion of the impact of a high or low
gearing ratio.
The debt ratio is another ratio that considers capital structure, though is less commonly used than
gearing. The debt ratio is also discussed in Chapter 20 Section 2 of the Essential reading.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
494 Financial Reporting (FR)
Formula to learn
PBIT
Interest cover =
Finance cost
The interest cover ratio shows whether a company is earning enough profits before interest and
tax to pay its interest costs comfortably, or whether its interest costs are high in relation to the size
of its profits, so that a fall in PBIT would then have a significant effect on profits available for
ordinary shareholders.
An interest cover of two times or less would be low, and should really exceed three times before the
company’s interest costs are to be considered within acceptable limits.
Formula to learn
Dividend yield is the return a shareholder is currently expecting on the shares of a company.
(a) The dividend per share is taken as the dividend for the previous year.
(b) If the share price is quoted ‘ex-div’, that means that the share price does not include the right
to the most recent dividend.
Shareholders look for both dividend yield and capital growth.
Formula to learn
Dividend cover shows the proportion of profit for the year that is available for distribution to
shareholders that has been paid (or proposed) and what proportion will be retained in the
business to finance future growth. A dividend cover of two times would indicate that the
company had paid 50% of its distributable profits as dividends, and retained 50% in the business
to help to finance future operations. Retained profits are an important source of funds for most
companies, and so the dividend cover can in some cases be quite high.
A significant change in the dividend cover from one year to the next would be worth looking at
closely. For example, if a company’s dividend cover were to fall sharply between one year and the
next, it could be that its profits had fallen, but the directors wished to pay at least the same
amount of dividends as in the previous year, so as to keep shareholder expectations satisfied.
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 495
Formula to learn
Share price
Price/Earnings (P/E) ratio =
Earnings per share
A high P/E ratio indicates strong shareholder confidence in the company and its future, eg in
profit growth, and a lower P/E ratio indicates lower confidence.
The P/E ratio of one company can be compared with the P/E ratios of:
• Other companies in the same business sector
• Other companies generally
It is often used in stock exchange reporting where prices are readily available.
3 Interpretation
3.1 Approach to interpretation
• Identify user and format required for solution
• Read question and analyse data
- Look for obvious changes/differences in the figures (no ratio calculations yet, but can
consider % movements year on year)
• Calculate key ratios as required by the question
• Write up your answer summarising performance and position:
- Structured using your categories
- Comment on main features first
- Then bring in relevant ratios to support your arguments
- Suggest reasons for key changes
- Use any information given in the question!
• Reach a conclusion
HB2022
496 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 497
Date of acquisition
Consolidated statement of CSPLOCI will include results CSPLOCI will not include the
profit or loss will include of subsidiary post acquisition results of subsidiary whereas
results of subsidiary for the whereas the CSFP will include the CSFP will include all
whole year and the all assets and liabilities of the assets and liabilities of the
consolidated statement of subsidiary. This means that subsidiary. As such, students
financial position will ratios that use elements of must reflect that the increase
include all assets and both performance (CSPLOCI) in assets and liabilities of the
liabilities of the subsidiary. and position (CSFP) will be group will not have
There is therefore complex to interpret. generated additional results
consistency between the Students should reflect on in the period, which will skew
CSPLOCI and CSFP and this within their interpretation. the ratios.
discussion can focus on For example, if a subsidiary is
the impact of the acquired six months into the
acquisition as above. year, then only six months
revenue will be included, but
the entire receivables balance
will be included within the
statement of financial
position. This would give a
false impression of the
receivables collection period.
HB2022
498 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 499
(c) Banks and capital providers • Ability to pay existing interest and loan capital
• Decision whether to grant further loans
1 This question has been adapted from the June 2015 exam.
Yogi Co is a public company and extracts from its most recent financial statements are
provided below:
STATEMENTS OF PROFIT OR LOSS FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 MARCH
20X5 20X4
$’000 $’000
Revenue 36,000 50,000
Cost of sales (24,000) (30,000)
Gross profit 12,000 20,000
Profit from sale of division (Note (a)) 1,000 -
Distribution costs (3,500) (5,300)
Administrative expenses (4,800) (2,900)
Finance costs (400) (800)
Profit before tax 4,300 11,000
Income tax expense (1,300) (3,300)
Profit for the year 3,000 7,700
20X5 20X4
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 16,300 19,000
- 2,000
16,300 21,000
HB2022
500 Financial Reporting (FR)
Notes.
1 On 1 April 20X4, Yogi Co sold the net assets (including goodwill) of a separately operated
division of its business for $8 million cash on which it made a profit of $1 million. Yogi Co
had to make some of the staff who worked in this division redundant from that date. This
transaction required shareholder approval and, in order to secure this, the management of
Yogi Co offered shareholders a dividend of 40 cents for each share in issue out of the
proceeds of the sale. The trading results of the division which are included in the statement
of profit or loss for the year ending 31 March 20X4 above are shown in the ‘Trading results
of the division’ table below.
2 A new competitor entered the market on 1 April 20X4 which is competing aggressively on
price. In response to the new competitor, Yogi Co applied discounts to select products and
undertook a major television advertising campaign to raise its brand awareness.
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 501
$’000
Revenue 18,000
Cost of sales (10,000)
Gross profit 8,000
Distribution costs (1,000)
Administrative expenses (1,200)
Profit before interest and tax 5,800
Required
Calculate the equivalent ratios for Yogi Co:
(1) For the year ended 31 March 20X4, after excluding the contribution made by the division
that has been sold; and
(2) For the year ended 31 March 20X5, excluding the profit on the sale of the division. You
should ignore the effects of taxation on the profit on the sale.
2 Comment on the comparative financial performance and position of Yogi Co for the year
ended 31 March 20X5.
Solution
HB2022
502 Financial Reporting (FR)
Below are extracts from the consolidated statement of profit or loss for the Advent Group for the
year ended 31 December 20X4 and individual statement of profit or loss for Advent Co for the
year ended 31 December 20X3. Advent Co operates as an online-only book retailer, which is a
highly competitive market in which customers expect books to be sold at a discount to their
recommended retail price. During 20X4, it ceased advertising on TV and instead relies on social
media and word of mouth.
20X4 20X3
(Advent Group) (Advent Co individual)
$’000 $’000
Revenue 24,280 19,924
Cost of sales (13,740) (11,814)
Gross profit 10,540 8,110
Operating expenses (3,100) (6,010)
Profit from operations 7,440 2,100
Finance costs (890) (810)
Profit before tax 6,550 1,290
$m
Revenue 8.25
Cost of sales 3.75
Operating expenses 3.00
Finance costs 0.66
During the period from 1 January 20X4 to 1 September 20X4, Advent Co sold $0.64 million of
books to Elf Co after applying a reduced mark-up of 25% on cost. Elf Co had sold all of these
goods on to third parties by 1 September 20X4. The sales continued in the period after disposal
with Advent Co applying its normal arms’ length mark-up of 40%.
Elf Co previously used space in Advent Co’s warehouse, which Advent Co did not charge Elf Co
for. Since the disposal of Elf Co, Advent Co has begun to charge Elf Co the market rate to rent the
space, recording the rental income in operating expenses.
The following ratios have been correctly calculated based on the above financial statements:
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 503
Required
1 Remove the results of Elf Co and the gain on disposal of the subsidiary to prepare a revised
statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31 December 20X4 for Advent Co only.
2 Calculate the equivalent ratios to those given for Advent Co for 20X4 based on the revised
statement of profit or loss.
3 Using the ratios calculated in part (2) and those provided in the question, comment on the
performance of Advent Co for the years ended 31 December 20X3 and 20X4.
Solution
HB2022
504 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 505
HB2022
506 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 507
2. Financial ratios
It is important that you learn the categories of ratio (profitability, short-term liquidity and
efficiency, long-term liquidity/gearing, investors’ ratios), understand the ratio definitions and what
the ratio is trying to tell you, learn the formulae and know how to apply them in questions.
3. Interpretation
You must use the information in the scenario to suggest possible reasons why a ratio has moved in
the period or is different to another entity. You should not simply describe the ratio, nor simply
state that a ratio is good or bad. Try to find relevant points that help you explain the performance
and position.
Interpretation of group financial statements requires you to consider the impact of an acquisition
or disposal on the ratios. Consider that there may be inconsistency between the information in
the consolidated statement of profit or loss and the consolidated statement of financial position
depending on the timing of the acquisition or sale.
Each section of the statement of cash flows should be interpreted separately. You should avoid
saying a cash inflow is good and a cash outflow is bad without understanding the reason for the
cash flow.
HB2022
508 Financial Reporting (FR)
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section C Q35 Hever Co
Section C Q49 Biggerbuys Co
Section C Q50 Webster Co
Section C Q51 Xpand Co
Further reading
There are articles in the Exam Resources section of the ACCA website which are relevant to the
topics covered in his chapter and would be useful to read:
Tell me a story
Performance appraisal
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 509
Activity 3: Liquidity
The correct answer is: A significant write down of obsolete inventory
This would cause inventory and, therefore, current assets to decrease, which would cause the
current ratio to decrease. The other answers result in the current ratio being unchanged or
increasing.
Replacement of an overdraft with a long-term loan would increase current assets (more cash) and
decrease current liabilities (no overdraft) which would increase the current ratio.
A decrease in the length of credit offered would result in a decrease in trade payables and a
corresponding decrease in cash, so no overall impact on the current ratio.
Issuing bonds would result in a cash inflow (increase of current assets) which would also increase
the current ratio.
Activity 5: Gearing
35.7 %
HB2022
510 Financial Reporting (FR)
The capital employed in the division sold at 31 March 20X4 was $7 million ($8 million sale
proceeds less $1 million profit on sale).
The figures for the calculations of 20X4’s adjusted ratios (ie excluding the effects of the sale of
the division) are given in brackets; the figures for 20X5 are derived from the equivalent figures
in the question, however, the operating profit margin and ROCE calculations exclude the profit
from the sale of the division (as stated in the requirement) as it is a ‘one off’ item.
2 The most relevant comparison is the 20X5 results (excluding the profit on disposal of the
division) with the results of 20X4 (excluding the results of the division), otherwise like is not
being compared with like.
Profitability
Although comparative sales have increased (excluding the effect of the sale of the division) by
$4 million (36,000 – 32,000), equivalent to 12.5%, the gross profit margin has fallen
considerably (from 37.5% in 20X4 down to 33.3% in 20X5) and this deterioration has been
compounded by the sale of the division, which was the most profitable part of the business
(which earned a gross profit margin of 44.4% (8/18)). The increase in sales indicates that Yogi
Co has responded well to the threat created by the new competitor entering the market. This
may be due to the advertising campaign or the discounts offered on specific products. The
discounts will partially explain the decrease in the gross profit margin, as does the write off of
inventory which would cause an increase in cost of sales without a corresponding increase in
revenue. The deterioration of the operating profit margin (from 18.8% in 20X4 down to 13.1% in
20X5) is largely due to poor gross profit margins, but operating expenses are proportionately
higher (as a percentage of sales) in 20X5 (23.0% compared to 18.8%) which has further
reduced profitability. The higher operating expenses are likely to be the result of the
redundancy costs associated with the sale of the division and the costs associated with the
advertising campaign. The gain made on the sale of the division will however offset against
these additional operating costs and without having all of the information regarding the
amount of the costs, it is difficult to conclude on the impact of each on the operating
expenses.
Yogi Co’s performance as measured by ROCE has deteriorated dramatically from 40.0% in
20X4 (as adjusted) to only 27.6% in 20X5. As the net asset turnover has remained broadly the
same at 2.1 times (rounded), it is the fall in the operating profit which is responsible for the
overall deterioration in performance. If Yogi Co was to revalue its property at the start of the
following year, all else being equal, the ROCE will decline further. This is due to the additional
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 511
$’000
Revenue (24,280 – 5,500 (8,250 × 8/12) + 640 (intra-group)) 19,420
Cost of sales (13,740 – 2,500 (3,750 × 8/12)) [see Note] (11,240)
Gross profit 8,180
Operating expenses (3,100 – 2,000 (3,000 × 8/12) + 1,260 profit on disposal) (2,360)
Profit from operations 5,820
Finance costs (890 – 440 (660 × 8/12)) (450)
Profit before tax 5,370
Tutorial note. Originally, the intra-group sale resulted in $0.64 million sales and $0.512
million costs of sales. These amounts were recorded in the individual financial statements of
Advent Co. On consolidation, the $0.64 million turnover was eliminated – this needs to be
added back. The corresponding $0.512 million COS consolidation adjustment is technically
made to Elf Co’s financial statements and so can be ignored here.
2 Ratios of Advent Co, eliminating impact of Elf Co and the disposal during the year
20X4
recalculate Working (see
d P/L above) 20X4 original 20X3
Gross profit margin 42.1% 8,180/19,420 43.4% 40.7%
Operating margin 30.0% 5,820/19,420 30.6% 10.5%
Interest cover 12.9 times 5,820/450 8.4 times 2.6 times
HB2022
512 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
20: Interpretation of financial statements 513
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Discuss the limitations in the use of ratio analysis for assessing C3(a)
corporate performance.
Discuss the effect that changes in accounting policies or the use C3(b)
of different accounting polices between entities can have on the
ability to interpret performance.
21
Exam context
In Chapter 20, we looked at how the calculation of ratios and the interpretation of financial
statements is useful for understanding the position and performance of an entity. In this chapter,
we will consider the reasons why relying on the financial statements can be problematic. Financial
statements are intended to give a fair presentation of the financial performance of an entity over
a period and its financial position at the end of that period. The Conceptual Framework and the
IFRS Standards are there to ensure, as far as possible, that they do. However, there are a number
of reasons why the information in financial statements should not just be taken at face value. The
content of this chapter is important when attempting a Section C question that requires the
interpretation of a single entity or a group.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Limitations of financial statements and interpretation techniques
HB2022
516 Financial Reporting (FR)
Lanark Co holds its property, which was purchased 20 years ago, at a cost of £100,000. The
property has been depreciated on the straight line basis and has a remaining useful life of five
years. Lanark Co’s competitor is Alloa Co which acquired new property in the current year at a
cost of £1,000,000. The property has an estimated useful life of 40 years. Alloa Co used a loan to
finance the purchase of the property.
Required
Discuss the impact of measuring property at historical cost on the financial statements of Lanark
Co and Alloa Co.
Solution
The impact on the statement of financial position is likely to be relatively easy to arrive at. Lanark
Co will have a much lower asset value of $20,000 ($100,000 × 5/25 years remaining) due to
having an aged asset that is carried at historical cost. When considering a ratio such as return on
assets, Lanark Co would report a better return than that of Alloa Co due to the low carrying
amount of the property. Alloa Co had to acquire appropriate funding to make the purchase, and
the large loan increases capital employed and therefore decreases Alloa Co’s ROCE.
The impact on the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income can be more
difficult to determine. Lanark Co will have depreciation of just $4,000 per annum ($100,000/25
years) whereas Alloa Co will have depreciation of $25,000 per annum ($1,000,000 / 40 years).
This will impact on operating profit and therefore decrease Alloa Co’s margins and ROCE. Alloa
Co will also have a finance cost in respect of the loan which will impact on interest cover. The
information provided about the property held by each company is therefore essential to
understanding a number of ratios that could be calculated for each company.
HB2022
21: Limitations of financial statements and interpretation techniques 517
Essential reading
In Chapter 20, we discussed the importance of taking account of issues such as intragroup
trading, seasonal trading and the timing of asset acquisitions when interpreting changes or
differences in ratios. Chapter 21, Section 1 of the Essential reading covers these issues in more
detail.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
2.1 Definitions
Related party (IAS 24): A person or entity that is related to the entity that is preparing its
KEY
TERM financial statements (the ’reporting entity’).
(a) A person or a close member of that person’s family is related to a reporting entity if that
person:
(i) Has control or joint control over the reporting entity;
(ii) Has significant influence over the reporting entity; or
(iii) Is a member of the key management personnel of the reporting entity or of a parent
of the reporting entity
(b) An entity is related to a reporting entity if any of the following conditions apply:
(i) The entity and the reporting entity are members of the same group (which means
that each parent, subsidiary and fellow subsidiary is related to the others).
HB2022
518 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
21: Limitations of financial statements and interpretation techniques 519
HB2022
520 Financial Reporting (FR)
Which THREE are valid limitations of ratio analysis of published financial statements?
Published financial statements are frequently unreliable as a result either of fraud or of error
on the part of management.
Published financial statements contain estimates such as depreciation.
There are no prior year figures to compare to current year figures.
Accounting policies may vary between companies, making comparisons difficult.
The nature and character of a business may change over time, making strictly numerical
comparisons misleading.
The nature of the industry may be volatile, making intercompany comparison within the
industry misleading.
An analyst is comparing the non-current asset turnover ratios of two listed businesses engaged in
similar activities. The non-current asset turnover ratio of one entity is almost 50% higher than that
of the other entity, and she concludes that the entity with the higher non-current asset turnover
ratio is utilising its assets far more effectively.
HB2022
21: Limitations of financial statements and interpretation techniques 521
PER alert
One of the competences you require to fulfil Performance Objective 8 of the PER is the ability
to identify inconsistencies between information in the financial statements of an entity and
accompanying narrative reports. You can apply the knowledge you obtain from this chapter
to help to demonstrate this competence.
HB2022
522 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
21: Limitations of financial statements and interpretation techniques 523
HB2022
524 Financial Reporting (FR)
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section C Q41 Alpha Co
Further reading
Performance appraisal
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
21: Limitations of financial statements and interpretation techniques 525
HB2022
526 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
21: Limitations of financial statements and interpretation techniques 527
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Prepare a statement of cash flows for a single entity (not a group) D1(c)
in accordance with relevant IFRS Standards using the indirect
method.
Exam context
You should be familiar with how to prepare a statement of cash flows from your previous studies.
Financial Reporting builds on your previous knowledge by looking in more depth at some of the
key calculations and introducing the interpretation of the statement of cash flows. In the Financial
Reporting exam, you may be asked to prepare extracts from the statement of cash flows of a
single entity or interpret a statement of cash flows in a Section C question. The 2022–23 syllabus
emphasises the importance of being able to analyse and interpret a statement of cash flows and
therefore you must be prepared for an interpretation question in this area. The calculation of key
cash flows or insights gained from interpretation may be tested in the OT Questions in Section A
or B of the exam.
22
HB2022
HB2022
530 Financial Reporting (FR)
2 Introduction
The purpose of the statement of cash flows is to show the effect of a company’s commercial
transactions on its cash balance.
It is thought that users of accounts can readily understand cash flows, as opposed to statements
of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and statements of financial position which are
subject to the effects of accounting policy choices and accounting estimates.
It has been argued that ‘profit’ does not always give a useful or meaningful picture of a
company’s operations. Readers of a company’s financial statements might even be misled by a
reported profit figure.
Shareholders might believe that if a company makes a profit for the period, of say, $100,000 then
this is the amount which it could afford to pay as a dividend. Unless the company has sufficient
cash in the business which is available to make a dividend payment, the shareholders’
expectations would be wrong.
Cash flows are used in investment appraisal methods such as net present value and hence a
statement of cash flows gives potential investors the chance to evaluate a business.
2.2 Scope
A statement of cash flows is a primary financial statement. All types of entity can provide useful
information about cash flows as the need for cash is universal, whatever the nature of their
revenue-producing activities. Therefore, all entities are required by the IAS 7 to produce a
statement of cash flows.
2.4 Definitions
The standard provides the following definitions.
HB2022
22: Statement of cash flows 531
3 Formats
IAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows allows two possible layouts for the statement of cash flows in
respect of operating activities:
(a) The indirect method, where profit before tax is reconciled to operating cash flow
(b) The direct method, where the cash flows themselves are shown
You will only be examined on the indirect method in your Financial Reporting exam.
Essential reading
Chapter 22 Sections 1 and 2 of the Essential reading recap your knowledge of the preparing a
statement of cash flows with an Activity on this topic using the indirect method.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
532 Financial Reporting (FR)
$m $m
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before taxation 3,390
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 380
Amortisation 75
HB2022
22: Statement of cash flows 533
HB2022
534 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 1: Thorstved Co
Below are the statements of financial position for Thorstved Co at 31 December 20X7 and 31
December 20X8 and the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year
ended 31 December 20X8.
20X8 20X7
$’000 $’000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 798 638
Development costs 110 92
908 730
Current assets
Inventories 313 280
Trade receivables 208 186
Cash 111 4
632 470
Total assets 1,540 1,200
Non-current liabilities
4% loan notes 250 100
Deferred tax 76 54
HB2022
22: Statement of cash flows 535
$’000
Revenue 1,100
Cost of sales (750)
Gross profit 350
Expenses (247)
Finance costs (10)
Profit on sale of equipment 7
Profit before tax 100
Income tax expense (30)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 70
Other comprehensive income:
Gain on property revaluation 60
Income tax relating to gain on property revaluation (18)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 42
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR 112
Notes.
1 Depreciation of property, plant and equipment during 20X8 was $54,000 and deferred
development expenditure amortised was $25,000.
2 Proceeds from the sale of equipment were $58,000, giving rise to a profit of $7,000. No other
items of property, plant and equipment were disposed of during the year.
3 Finance costs represent interest paid on the loan notes. New loan notes were issued on 1
January 20X8.
4 The company revalued its property at the year end. Company policy is to treat revaluations
as realised profits when the asset is retired or disposed of.
Required
1 Calculate the cash paid to acquire property, plant and equipment for inclusion in the investing
activities section of the statement of cash flows.
2 Prepare the financing activities section for inclusion in the statement of cash flows.
HB2022
536 Financial Reporting (FR)
b/d
Depreciation/amortisation
SPLOCI – OCI
Non-cash additions
Disposals
Cash paid/(rec’d) β
c/d
Workings
1 Equity
Profit or loss
Non-cash
HB2022
22: Statement of cash flows 537
2 Loan notes
$’000
b/d
SPLOCI – P/L
– OCI
Non-cash
Cash (paid)/rec’d β
c/d
Essential reading
An activity which requires the preparation of the full statement of cash flows for Thorstved Co is
included in the Essential Reading.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
538 Financial Reporting (FR)
As has been seen, the statement of cash flows consists of three main areas. It is important to
understand what the cash flows from operating activities, investing activities and financing
activities tell us about the business’ activities.
Operating The cash flow from operating activities figure should ideally be positive. If it is
activities positive then the business will be generating funds from its core activities, which
suggests that it is more likely to be a viable entity. The ‘quality’ of profit it
considered to be better (in that profit will turn to cash in the short term) if the
cash generated from operating activities figure is equal to or greater than to
the operating profit in the statement of profit or loss.
A healthy business would also expect to pay the interest and tax charge from
the cash generated from operations. Any cash inflow that remains after the
payment of interest and tax is considered ‘free cash’ which can be used, for
example, to purchase property, plant and equipment or pay dividends.
When you are analysing the cash flows relating to operating activities, it is
important to consider the movements in working capital.
• An increase in trade receivables may result in cash flow problems for an
entity. Consider whether there are genuine reasons for an increase in trade
receivables that may help to explain an increase, such as taking on a major
new customer on extended credit terms. A decrease in trade receivables is
favourable if it is the result of better credit management but not if it is a
result of decreased amounts of revenue.
• An increase in inventories is also generally problematic in terms of cash
flows, but again consider whether there are specific reasons for this such as
bulk buying close to the year end to take advantage of a discount offered
by a supplier.
• An increase in trade payables is positive from a cash flow perspective, but
the reasons must be understood. If an entity is simply taking advantage of
supplier credit terms, it makes sense from a working capital perspective to
increase payables. However, if the increase is due to poor working capital
management or a lack of cash available to make payments, this is a
concern and may cause problems for the going concern of the entity and
for supplier relations.
HB2022
22: Statement of cash flows 539
Financing Again, to understand cash flows from or used in financing activities requires an
activities understanding of an entity’s challenges and aims. An entity that is growing and
investing in assets may require to raise cash flows by issuing new shares or
receiving loans from its bank. Whilst cash inflows from the proceeds of
financing are positive in the year they are received, you should reflect on the
impact on the entity of having to pay interest and make capital repayments in
the longer term.
An entity that has acquired right of use assets through lease agreements
rather than purchasing assets using cash will have an outflow in respect of the
payment of lease obligations. An entity with a surplus of cash may use it to pay
back any borrowings.
Illustration 1: Tabba Co
Here is an example of how the position and performance of a company can be analysed using the
statement of financial position, profit or loss extracts and the statement of cash flows.
The following draft financial statements relate to Tabba Co, a private company:
HB2022
540 Financial Reporting (FR)
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS EXTRACT FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 SEPTEMBER 20X5
$’000
Operating profit before interest and tax 270
Interest expense (260)
Interest receivable 40
Profit before tax 50
Income tax credit 50
Profit for the year 100
Note. The interest expense includes interest payable in respect of lease liabilities.
HB2022
22: Statement of cash flows 541
$’000 $’000
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before taxation 50
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 2,200
Profit on disposal of PPE (Note (a)) (4,600)
Release of grant (250)
Increase in insurance claim receivable (300)
Interest expense 260
Investment income (40)
(2,680)
(Increase) decrease in inventories (700)
(Increase) decrease in trade & other receivables (500)
Increase (decrease) in trade payables 1,100
Cash used in operations (2,780)
Interest paid (260)
Income taxes paid (1,350)
Net cash outflow from operating activities (4,390)
Cash flows from investing activities
Interest received 40
Proceeds of grants 950
Proceeds of disposal of property 12,000
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (2,900)
Net cash from investing activities 10,090
Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds of loan (6% loan received) 800
Repayment of loan (10% loan repaid) (4,000)
Payments under leases (1,100)
Net cash used in financing activities (4,300)
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 1,400
Opening cash and cash equivalents (550)
Closing cash and cash equivalents 850
Additional information
(1) Tabba Co sold its factory for its fair value $12 million on 30 September 20X5. The transaction
met the criteria to be recognised as a sale of IFRS 15. Under the terms of the sale, Tabba Co
will immediately lease the factory back over a period of 10 years. The accountant of Tabba
Co has derecognised the factory and has recorded the gain on sale in profit or loss. They
HB2022
542 Financial Reporting (FR)
Solution
Changes in Tabba Co’s financial position
The statement of cash flows reveals a healthy overall increase in cash of $1.4 million. However,
Tabba Co has a net cash outflow from its operating activities and therefore its going concern
status must be in doubt.
To survive and thrive, businesses must generate cash from their operations, but Tabba Co used
cash in its operations totalling $2.78 million despite reporting an operating profit of $270,000. The
main reason Tabba Co was able to report a profit was because of the one-off $4.6 million surplus
on disposal of the factory. The sale of the factory appears to meet the criteria of a sale and
leaseback transaction and therefore has not been accounted for correctly. An adjustment is
required to recognise the right of use asset in respect of the rights retained, the lease liability and
to adjust the gain on the sale to reflect only the gain on the rights transferred. The cash proceeds
would not change and are stated correctly in the statement of cash flows. The fact that the
transaction took place immediately before the year end and the incorrect accounting treatment
implies that the ‘sale’ is an attempt to window dress the financial statements. The gain on rights
retained and the cash inflow are non-recurring transactions which in the future will be replaced
by interest expenses and repayments of lease liabilities which will have a negative impact on cash
flows.
Furthermore, were it not for the disposal proceeds of $12 million from the sale of its factory, Tabba
Co would be reporting a $10.6 million net decrease in cash. Tabba Co will not be able to sell the
factory for cash in the coming year, therefore, it seems likely that the forthcoming period will see
a large outflow of cash unless Tabba Co’s trading position improves.
Despite the apparent downturn in trade, Tabba Co’s working capital balances (inventories, trade
receivables and trade payables) have all increased in the year. We must consider the reasons for
this and the potential implications for the company in the longer term. The receivables and
inventory have both increased but appear to be due to the new contract with the supermarket
chain. The supermarket chain has been offered extended credit terms and the company has
begun to store inventory to meet future demands. This has a negative impact on cash flow in the
short term, but is likely to generate future profit and positive cash flows in the future. The increase
in trade payables is an indication that the directors are managing a lack of short-term cash
inflows by delaying their payments to suppliers. This policy is not sustainable, as is evidenced by
the letter from the supplier suggested that it will cease to supply. The ongoing viability of Tabba
Co relies on managing its working capital to allow it to make payments to supplies when they fall
due.
The income tax paid of $1.35 million in relation to the previous period is high. This suggests that
Tabba Co’s fall from profitability has been swift and steep. It is important to note that a company
would expect its cash flow from operations to cover its mandatory payments of interest and tax.
HB2022
22: Statement of cash flows 543
$’000
Revenue 2,553
Cost of sales (1,814)
Gross profit 739
Other income: interest received 25
Distribution costs (125)
Administrative expenses (264)
Finance costs (75)
Profit before tax 300
Income tax expense (140)
Profit for the year 160
HB2022
544 Financial Reporting (FR)
20X2 20X1
$’000 $’000
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 630 505
Investments – 25
Current assets
Inventories 150 102
Trade receivables 390 315
Short-term investments 50 –
Cash and cash equivalents 2 1
Total assets 1,222 948
20X2 20X1
Equity and liabilities $’000 $’000
Equity
Share capital ($1 ordinary shares) 200 150
Share premium account 160 150
Revaluation surplus 100 91
Retained earnings 260 180
Non-current liabilities
Long-term loan 130 50
Environmental provision 40 -
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 127 119
Bank overdraft 85 98
Taxation 120 110
Total equity and liabilities 1,222 948
HB2022
22: Statement of cash flows 545
$’000 $’000
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before tax 300
Depreciation charge 90
Loss on sale of property, plant and equipment 13
Profit on sale of non-current asset investments (5)
Interest expense (net) 50
(Increase)/decrease in inventories (48)
(Increase)/decrease in trade receivables (75)
Increase/(decrease) in trade payables 8
333
Interest paid (75)
Dividends paid (80)
Tax paid (130)
Net cash from operating activities 48
Cash flows from investing activities
Payments to acquire property, plant and equipment (161)
Payments to acquire intangible non-current assets (50)
Receipts from sales of property, plant and equipment 32
Receipts from sale of non-current asset investments 30
Interest received 25
Net cash flows from investing activities (124)
Cash flows from financing activities
Issue of share capital 60
Long-term loan 80
Net cash flows from financing 140
Increase in cash and cash equivalents 64
Cash and cash equivalents at 1.1.X2 (97)
Cash and cash equivalents at 31.12.X2 (33)
HB2022
546 Financial Reporting (FR)
Required
Refer to the financial statements and additional information relating to Emma Co.
Using the information referenced above, and calculating any relevant ratios, comment on the
change in the financial position of Emma Co during the year ended 30 September 20X5.
Solution
The following is an extract from the statement of cash flows of Quebec Co for the year ended 31
December 20X1:
$m
Cash flows from operating activities 600
Cash flows from investing activities (800)
Cash flows from financing activities (200)
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents (400)
Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the period 100
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the period (300)
HB2022
22: Statement of cash flows 547
For the year ended 31 December 20X2, Emma Co’s net cash inflow is $48,000 and its total debt is
$502,000.
Required
Calculate Emma Co’s cash flow ratio as at 31 December 20X2. State your answer to 1 decimal
place.
Solution
Net cash inflow from operating activities 48,000
= × 100 = 9.6%
Total debt 502,000
Note. Note that to provide useful information in respect of the company, this ratio would need to
be compared to the cash flow ratio calculated using prior year financial information, budget
and/or industry benchmarks.
HB2022
548 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
22: Statement of cash flows 549
HB2022
550 Financial Reporting (FR)
2. Formats
There are two methods of presenting statements of cash flows, the indirect method (which
reconciles profit to operating cash flows) and the direct method (which shows actual operating
cash flows). Only the indirect method is examined in your Financial Reporting studies.
HB2022
22: Statement of cash flows 551
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section A, Q18
Section C, Q52 Dundee Co
Section C, Q53 Elmgrove Co
Further reading
ACCA has prepared a useful technical article on analysing a statement of cash flows, which is
available on its website:
Analysing cash flows
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
552 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 1: Thorstved Co
1
Workings
1 Equity
2 Loan notes
$’000
b/d (54 + 24 = 78) 100
SPLOCI – P/L
– OCI
Non-cash –
Cash (paid)/rec’d β 150
HB2022
22: Statement of cash flows 553
HB2022
554 Financial Reporting (FR)
Learning objectives
On completion of this chapter, you should be able to:
Exam context
In the Financial Reporting exam, you are likely to get an OT Question on the types of performance
indicator used by not-for-profit companies. You may also get asked to analyse a set of not-for-
profit company financial statements, commenting on any differences between the profit and
not-for-profit ratios and performance indicators used in each case.
HB2022
Chapter overview
Specialised, not-for-profit and public sector entities
Non-profit focused IFRS Standards form the basis Three Es: Economy, efficiency,
for accounting standards effectiveness
HB2022
556 Financial Reporting (FR)
2 Regulatory framework
IFRS Standards are designed ‘to help participants in the various capital markets of the world and
other users of the information to make economic decisions’ (IASB, IASB Objectives).
The world’s capital markets tend to focus on profit and fair value (buy; hold; sell decisions) which
are concepts that are not so relevant to not-for-profit and public sector entities.
However, accountability is still very important for these entities as they often handle public funds.
The use of IFRS Standards, which are designed for ‘general purpose financial statements’, would
make the performance of not-for-profit and public sector entities more accountable and
comparable.
Accounting regimes that apply IFRS Standards do not normally require the use of IFRS Standards
for these entities.
Other international or national bodies publish specific standards for these entities which are
applicable in some national regimes, eg:
(a) The International Federation of Accountants (IFAC) publishes International Public Sector
Accounting Standards (IPSAS), based on IFRS Standards, but adapted to the public sector.
National governments can choose to apply them.
(b) The UK publishes a Statement of Recommended Practice (SORP) for charities which, while
not compulsory, is seen as best practice.
3 Performance measurement
Profit is clearly not the key objective of a ‘not-for-profit’ organisation.
However, such organisations produce budgets, which their performance can be assessed against
and many of the performance indicators relating to efficiency (eg inventory management) will be
relevant to a not-for-profit organisation.
HB2022
23: Specialised, not-for-profit and public sector entities 557
HB2022
558 Financial Reporting (FR)
Public sector entities have performance measures laid down by government, based on KPIs.
Which FOUR of the following are likely to be financial KPIs for a local council?
Rent receipts outstanding
Interest paid
P/E ratio
Interest cover
Dividend cover
Financial actuals against budget
Return on capital employed
Essential reading
There are additional activities and information available in Chapter 23 of the Essential reading.
The Essential reading is available as an Appendix of the digital edition of the Workbook.
HB2022
23: Specialised, not-for-profit and public sector entities 559
Non-profit focused IFRS Standards form the basis Three Es: Economy, efficiency,
• Government departments for accounting standards effectiveness
• Local councils • IPSAS 42 standards in issue • KPIs will be dependent on the
• Public funded bodies • SORP in the UK (non type of entity and the sector in
• Educational institutions compulsory) which they operate
• Charities • Problems with reporting can be
• Sporting bodies caused by:
– Multiple objectives
– Difficult of non-financial
indicators
– Comparison may be difficult
– Financial constraints
– Social, political and legal
barriers
HB2022
560 Financial Reporting (FR)
2. Regulatory framework
IFAC produces a framework, based upon IFRS Standards, but which has additional guidance on
topics which are covered only in the not-for-profit and public sector (such as guidance on
governmental reporting).
3. Performance measurement
• The Three Es (economy, efficiency and effectiveness)
• Wide range of KPIs available which will be reported on dependent on the main objectives of the
entity
• Problems in reporting the performance include external issues such as political and legal
barriers, problems with comparison between different charities and the often limited resources
of the entity restricting the achievement of the objectives
HB2022
23: Specialised, not-for-profit and public sector entities 561
Question practice
Now try the following from the Further question practice bank (available in the digital edition of
the Workbook):
Section C Q25 Standard setters
Section C Q54 Measurement
Section C Q55 Not for profit
Further reading
ACCA has useful articles online, including two which are Performance Management articles, but
relevant to the FR qualification:
Not for profit organisations (part 1)
Not for profit organisations (part 2)
Performance appraisal (Financial Reporting article)
www.accaglobal.com
HB2022
562 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
23: Specialised, not-for-profit and public sector entities 563
HB2022
1.2 Definitions
Entity specific value: The present value of the cash flows an entity expects to arise from the
KEY
TERM continuing use of an asset and from its disposal at the end of its useful life or expects to incur
when settling a liability.
Impairment loss: The amount by which the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its
recoverable amount.
Bearer plant: A living plant that:
• Is used in the production or supply of agricultural produce;
• Is expected to bear produce for more than one period; and
• Has a remote likelihood of being sold as agricultural produce, except for incidental scrap
sales
(IAS 16: para. 6)
HB2022
566 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
3: Essential Reading 567
1.8 Derecognition
An entity is required to derecognise the carrying amount of an item of property, plant or
equipment that it disposes of on the date the criteria for the sale in IFRS 15 Revenue from
Contracts with Customers would be met. This also applies to parts of an asset (IAS 16: para. 68A).
An entity cannot classify as revenue a gain it realises on the disposal of an item of property,
plant and equipment (IAS 16: para. 68).
1.9 Disclosure
The standard has a long list of disclosure requirements, for each class of property, plant and
equipment.
(a) Measurement bases for determining the gross carrying amount (if more than one, the gross
carrying amount for that basis in each category)
(b) Depreciation methods used
(c) Useful lives or depreciation rates used
(d) Gross carrying amount and accumulated depreciation (aggregated with accumulated
impairment losses) at the beginning and end of the period
(e) Reconciliation of the carrying amount at the beginning and end of the period showing:
(i) Additions
(ii) Disposals
(iii) Acquisitions through business combinations
(iv) Increases/decreases during the period from revaluations and from impairment losses
(v) Impairment losses recognised in profit or loss
(vi) Impairment losses reversed in profit or loss
(vii) Depreciation
(viii) Net exchange differences (from translation of statements of a foreign entity)
(ix) Any other movements
The financial statements should also disclose the following:
HB2022
568 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
3: Essential Reading 569
2 Depreciation
2.1 Property, plant and equipment
If an asset’s life extends over more than one accounting period, it earns profits over more than one
period. It is a non-current asset.
With the exception of land, every non-current asset eventually wears out over time. Machines,
cars and other vehicles, fixtures and fittings, and even buildings do not last forever. When a
business acquires a non-current asset, it will have some idea about how long its useful life will be,
and it might decide what to do with it.
(a) Keep on using the non-current asset until it becomes completely worn out, useless, and
worthless.
(b) Sell off the non-current asset at the end of its useful life, either by selling it as a second‑hand
item or as scrap.
Since a non-current asset has a cost, and a limited useful life, and its value eventually declines, it
follows that a charge should be made in profit or loss to reflect the use that is made of the asset
by the business. This charge is called depreciation.
2.2 Depreciation
IAS 16 requires the depreciable amount of a depreciable asset to be allocated on a systematic
basis to each accounting period during the useful life of the asset. Every part of an item of
property, plant and equipment with a cost that is significant in relation to the total cost of the
item must be depreciated separately (IAS 16: para. 44).
One way of defining depreciation is to describe it as a means of spreading the cost of a non-
current asset over its useful life, and so matching the cost against the full period during which it
earns profits for the business. Depreciation charges are an example of the application of the
accrual assumption to calculate profits.
The need for depreciation of non-current assets arises from the accruals assumption. If money is
expended in purchasing an asset, then the amount expended must at some time be charged
HB2022
570 Financial Reporting (FR)
Bashful Co acquired a non-current asset on 1 January 20X2 for $80,000. It had no residual value
and a useful life of ten years.
On 1 January 20X5, the remaining useful life was reviewed and revised to four years.
Required
What will be the depreciation charge for 20X5?
Solution
$
Original cost 80,000
Depreciation 20X2 – 20X4 (80,000 × 3/10) (24,000)
HB2022
3: Essential Reading 571
2.6 Disclosure
An accounting policy note should disclose the valuation bases used for determining the amounts
at which depreciable assets are stated, along with the other accounting policies.
IAS 16 also requires the following to be disclosed for each major class of depreciable asset.
• Depreciation methods used
• Useful lives or the depreciation rates used
• Total depreciation allocated for the period
• Gross amount of depreciable assets and the related accumulated depreciation
(IAS 16: paras. 73–78)
Fair value model: After initial recognition, an entity that chooses the fair value model should
KEY
TERM measure all of its investment property at fair value, except in the extremely rare cases where
this cannot be measured reliably. In such cases, it should apply the IAS 16 cost model.
HB2022
572 Financial Reporting (FR)
The fair value model for investment property is not the same as a revaluation, where increases in
carrying amount above a cost-based measure are recognised as revaluation surplus. Under the
fair-value model, all changes in fair value are recognised in profit or loss.
The standard elaborates on issues relating to fair value.
(a) Fair value is not the same as ‘value in use’ as defined in IAS 36 Impairment of Assets. Value in
use reflects factors and knowledge specific to the entity, while fair value reflects factors and
knowledge relevant to the market.
(b) In determining fair value, an entity should not double count assets. For example, elevators or
air conditioning are often an integral part of a building and should be included in the
investment property, rather than recognised separately.
(c) When a lessee uses the fair value model to measure an investment property that is held as a
right-of-use asset, it shall measure the right-of-use asset, and not the underlying property,
at fair value.
(d) In those rare cases where the entity cannot determine the fair value of an investment
property reliably, the cost model in IAS 16 must be applied until the investment property is
disposed of. The residual value must be assumed to be zero.
(e) When lease payments are at market rates, the fair value of an investment property held by a
lessee as a right-of-use asset, net of all expected lease payments, should be zero (IAS 40:
paras. 50–55).
4 Borrowing costs
4.1 Commencement of capitalisation
Three events or transactions must be taking place for capitalisation of borrowing costs to be
started.
(a) Expenditure on the asset is being incurred
(b) Borrowing costs are being incurred
(c) Activities are in progress that are necessary to prepare the asset for its intended use or sale
Expenditure must result in the payment of cash, transfer of other assets or assumption of interest-
bearing liabilities. Deductions from expenditure will be made for any progress payments or grants
received in connection with the asset. IAS 23 allows the average carrying amount of the asset
during a period (including borrowing costs previously capitalised) to be used as a reasonable
approximation of the expenditure to which the capitalisation rate is applied in the period.
Presumably, more exact calculations can be used.
Activities necessary to prepare the asset for its intended sale or use extend further than physical
construction work. They encompass technical and administrative work prior to construction, eg
HB2022
3: Essential Reading 573
HB2022
574 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
2.1 Research
Research activities by definition do not meet the criteria for recognition under IAS 38. This is
because, at the research stage of a project, it cannot be certain that future economic benefits will
HB2022
576 Financial Reporting (FR)
2.2 Development
Development costs may qualify for recognition as intangible assets provided that the following
strict ‘PIRATE’ criteria can be demonstrated.
Probable future economic benefits for the entity. The entity should demonstrate the existence of a
market for the output of the intangible asset or the intangible asset itself or the usefulness of the
intangible asset to the business.
Intention to complete the intangible asset and use or sell it.
Resources (technical, financial and other) are available to complete the development and to use
or sell the intangible asset.
Ability to use or sell the intangible asset.
Technical feasibility of the project and the ability to complete the project to generate an asset for
use or sale.
Expenditure attributable to the intangible asset during its development can be measured reliably.
In contrast with research costs, development costs are incurred at a later stage in a project, and
the probability of success should be more apparent. Examples of development costs include:
(a) The design, construction and testing of pre-production or pre-use prototypes and models
(b) The design of tools, jigs, moulds and dies involving new technology
(c) The design, construction and operation of a pilot plant that is not of a scale economically
feasible for commercial production
(d) The design, construction and testing of a chosen alternative for new or improved materials,
devices, products, processes, systems or services
(IAS 38: paras. 57–62)
HB2022
4: Essential Reading 577
HB2022
2 Further activities
Activity 5: Impairment loss individual asset
Grohl Co, a company that extracts natural gas and oil, has a drilling platform in the Caspian
Sea. It is required by legislation of the country concerned to remove and dismantle the platform at
the end of its useful life. Accordingly, Grohl Co has included an amount in its accounts for
removal and dismantling costs and is depreciating this amount over the platform’s useful life.
Grohl Co is carrying out an exercise to establish whether there has been an impairment of the
platform.
(1) Its carrying amount in the statement of financial position is $3 million.
(2) The company has received an offer of $2.8 million for the platform from another oil company.
The bidder would take over the responsibility (and costs) for dismantling and removing the
platform at the end of its life.
(3) The value in use of the estimated cash flows from the platform’s continued use is $3.3 million
(before adjusting for dismantling costs of $0.6 million).
Required
What should be the carrying amount of the drilling platform in the statement of financial position,
and what, if anything, is the impairment loss?
HB2022
5: Essential Reading 579
Biscuit Co has acquired another business for $4.5 million: non-current assets are valued at $4.0
million and goodwill at $0.5 million.
An asset with a carrying amount of $1 million is destroyed in a terrorist attack. The asset was not
insured. The loss of the asset, without insurance, has prompted the company to assess whether
there has been an impairment of assets in the acquired business and what the amount of any
such loss is.
The recoverable amount of the business (a single cash-generating unit) is measured as $3.1
million.
Required
Calculate the impairment loss and revised carrying amounts of the tangible assets and goodwill
in the revised financial statements.
Note. Extracts are not required.
Solution
HB2022
580 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
582 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
Arturo Co receives a government grant representing 50% of the cost of a depreciating asset which
costs $40,000. How will the grant be recognised if Arturo Co depreciates the asset:
1 Over four years straight line; or
2 At 40% reducing balance?
Note. The residual value is nil. The useful life is four years.
Solution
HB2022
584 Financial Reporting (FR)
StarStruck Co receives a 20% grant towards the cost of a new item of machinery, which cost
$100,000. The machinery has a useful life of four years and a nil residual value. The expected
profits of Starstruck Co, before accounting for depreciation on the new machine or the grant,
amount to $50,000 per annum in each year of the machinery’s life.
Required
Show the effect on profit and the accounting treatment if the grant is accounted for by
1 Offsetting the grant income against the cost of the asset
2 Treating the grant as deferred income
Solution
HB2022
6: Essential Reading 585
Straight line
Reducing balance
*The depreciation charge on a straight line basis, for each year, is ¼ of $(100,000 - 20,000) =
$20,000.
$ $ $ $
Non-current asset 80,000 80,000 80,000 80,000
Depreciation 25% 20,000 40,000 60,000 80,000
Carrying amount 60,000 40,000 20,000 –
HB2022
586 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
6: Essential Reading 587
HB2022
2 Goodwill
2.1 What is goodwill?
Goodwill is created by good relationships between a business and its customers.
(a) By building up a reputation (by word of mouth perhaps) for high quality products or high
standards of service
(b) By responding promptly and helpfully to queries and complaints from customers
(c) Through the personality of the staff and their attitudes to customers
The value of goodwill to a business might be considerable. However, goodwill is not usually valued
in the accounts of a business at all, and we should not normally expect to find an amount for
goodwill in its statement of financial position. For example, the welcoming smile of the bar staff
may contribute more to a bar’s profits than the fact that a new electronic cash register has
recently been acquired. Even so, whereas the cash register will be recorded in the accounts as a
non-current asset, the value of staff would be ignored for accounting purposes.
On reflection, we might agree with this omission of goodwill from the accounts of a business.
(a) The goodwill is inherent in the business but it has not been paid for, and it does not have an
‘objective’ value. We can guess at what such goodwill is worth, but such guesswork would be
a matter of individual opinion, and not based on hard facts.
(b) Goodwill changes from day to day. One act of bad customer relations might damage
goodwill and one act of good relations might improve it. Staff with a favourable personality
might retire or leave to find another job, to be replaced by staff who need time to find their
feet in the job, etc. Since goodwill is continually changing in value, it cannot realistically be
recorded in the accounts of the business.
HB2022
7: Essential Reading 589
HB2022
590 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
7: Essential Reading 591
HB2022
Example
The parent acquired 75% of the subsidiary’s 80 million $1 shares on 1 January 20X6. It paid $3.50
per share and agreed to pay a further $108 million on 1 January 20X7.
The parent company’s cost of capital is 8%.
In the financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X6, the cost of the combination will be:
$m
80m shares × 75% × $3.50 210
Deferred consideration: $108m × 1/1.08 100
Total consideration 310
At 31 December 20X6, $8 million will be charged to finance costs, being the unwinding of the
discount on the deferred consideration. The deferred consideration was discounted by $8 million
to allow for the time value of money. At 1 January 20X7, the full amount becomes payable.
HB2022
8: Essential Reading 593
Example
Assume the parent has acquired 12,000 $1 shares in the subsidiary by issuing five of its own $1
shares for every four shares in the subsidiary. The market value of the parent company’s shares is
$6.
Consideration:
$
12,000 × 5/4 × $6 90,000
Note that this is credited to the share capital and share premium of the parent company as
follows:
$ $
Level 1 Quoted prices in active markets for identical assets that the entity can access
HB2022
594 Financial Reporting (FR)
Level 2 Inputs other than quoted prices that are directly or indirectly observable for the
asset (IFRS 13: para. 81)
Level 3 Unobservable inputs for the asset (IFRS 13: para. 86)
We will look at the requirements of IFRS 3 regarding fair value in more detail below. First, let us
look at a practical example.
Illustration 6: Land
Anscome Co has acquired land in a business combination. The land is currently developed for
industrial use as a site for a factory. The current use of land is presumed to be its highest and best
use unless market or other factors suggest a different use. Nearby sites have recently been
developed for residential use as sites for high-rise apartment buildings. On the basis of that
development and recent zoning and other changes to facilitate that development, Anscome
determines that the land currently used as a site for a factory could be developed as a site for
residential use (ie for high-rise apartment buildings) because market participants would take into
account the potential to develop the site for residential use when pricing the land.
Required
How would the highest and best use of the land be determined?
Solution
The highest and best use of the land would be determined by comparing both of the following:
(1) The value of the land as currently developed for industrial use (ie the land would be used in
combination with other assets, such as the factory, or with other assets and liabilities).
(2) The value of the land as a vacant site for residential use, taking into account the costs of
demolishing the factory and other costs (including the uncertainty about whether the entity
would be able to convert the asset to the alternative use) necessary to convert the land to a
vacant site (ie the land is to be used by market participants on a stand-alone basis).
The highest and best use of the land would be determined on the basis of the higher of those
values.
2.1 IFRS 3
IFRS 3 sets out general principles for arriving at the fair values of a subsidiary’s assets and
liabilities (IFRS 3: para. 18). The acquirer should recognise the acquiree’s identifiable assets,
liabilities and contingent liabilities at the acquisition date only if they satisfy the following criteria.
(a) In the case of an asset other than an intangible asset, it is probable that any associated
future economic benefits will flow to the acquirer, and its fair value can be measured
reliably.
(b) In the case of a liability other than a contingent liability, it is probable that an outflow of
resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation, and its fair
value can be measured reliably.
(c) In the case of an intangible asset or a contingent liability, its fair value can be measured
reliably.
The acquiree’s identifiable assets and liabilities might include assets and liabilities not previously
recognised in the acquiree’s financial statements. For example, a tax benefit arising from the
acquiree’s tax losses that was not recognised by the acquiree may be recognised by the group if
the acquirer has future taxable profits against which the unrecognised tax benefit can be applied.
HB2022
8: Essential Reading 595
HB2022
596 Financial Reporting (FR)
The draft statements of financial position of Ping Co and Pong Co on 30 June 20X8 were as
follows:
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 30 JUNE 20X8
Ping Co Pong Co
$ $
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 50,000 40,000
20,000 ordinary shares in Pong Co at cost 30,000
80,000
Current assets
Inventories 3,000 8,000
Owed by Ping Co 10,000
Trade receivables 16,000 7,000
Cash and cash equivalents 2,000 –
HB2022
8: Essential Reading 597
Ping Co acquired its investment in Pong Co on 1 July 20X7 when the retained earnings of Pong Co
stood at $6,000. The agreed consideration was $30,000 cash and a further $10,000 on 1 July
20X9. Ping Co’s cost of capital is 7%. Pong Co has an internally-developed brand name – ‘Pongo’
– which was valued at $5,000 at the date of acquisition. There have been no changes in the share
capital or revaluation surplus of Pong Co since that date. At 30 June 20X8, Pong Co had invoiced
Ping Co for goods to the value of $2,000 and Ping Co had sent payment in full but this had not
been received by Pong Co.
There is no impairment of goodwill. It is group policy to value NCI at full fair value. At the
acquisition date the NCI was valued at $9,000.
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position of Ping Co as at 30 June 20X8.
Solution
HB2022
598 Financial Reporting (FR)
On 1 September 20X7, Tyzo Co acquired six million $1 shares in Kono Co at $2.00 per share. At
that date Kono Co produced the following interim financial statements:
$m $m
Property, plant and equipment Trade payables 3.2
(note (i)) 16.0 Taxation 0.6
Inventories (note (ii)) 4.0 Bank overdraft 3.9
Receivables 2.9 Long-term loans 4.0
Cash in hand 1.2 Share capital ($1 shares) 8.0
–––––– Retained earnings 4.4
24.1 24.1
Notes.
1 The following information relates to the property, plant and equipment of Kono Co at 1
September 20X7 (see table below).
2 The inventories of Kono Co which were shown in the interim financial statements are raw
materials at cost to Kono Co of $4 million. They would have cost $4.2 million to replace at 1
September 20X7.
3 On 1 September 20X7, Tyzo Co took a decision to rationalise the group to integrate Kono Co.
The costs of the rationalisation were estimated to total $3 million and the process was due to
start on 1 March 20X8. No provision for these costs has been made in the financial statements
given above.
4 It is group policy to recognise NCI at full (fair) value.
$m
Gross replacement cost 28.4
Net replacement cost (gross replacement cost less depreciation) 16.6
Economic value 18.0
Net realisable value 8.0
Required
Compute the goodwill on consolidation of Kono Co that will be included in the consolidated
financial statements of the Tyzo Co group for the year ended 31 December 20X7, explaining your
treatment of the items mentioned above. You should refer to the provisions of relevant accounting
standards.
HB2022
8: Essential Reading 599
HB2022
600 Financial Reporting (FR)
$000 $000
Consideration ($4.50 × 80,000) 360,000
Fair value of net assets acquired:
Share capital 100,000
Pre-acquisition reserves 220,000
Less contingent liability (80,000)
(240,000)
Goodwill 120,000
Group
$
Consideration transferred (W2) 38,734
Fair value of NCI 9,000
Net assets acquired as represented by:
Ordinary share capital 25,000
Revaluation surplus on acquisition 5,000
Retained earnings on acquisition 6,000
Intangible asset – brand name 5,000
(41,000)
Goodwill 6,734
$
Cash paid 30,000
Fair value of deferred consideration (10,000 × 1/(1.072*)) 8,734
38,734
*Note that the deferred consideration has been discounted at 7% for two years (1 July 20X7 to 1
July 20X9).
HB2022
8: Essential Reading 601
$
(10,000 × 1/1.07) – 8,734 612
This amount will be charged to finance costs in the consolidated financial statements and the
deferred consideration under liabilities will be shown as $9,346 ($8,734 + $612).
(3) Calculate consolidated reserves
Consolidated revaluation surplus
$
Ping Co 12,000
Share of Pong Co’s post acquisition revaluation surplus –
12,000
Ping Pong
$ $
Retained earnings per question 26,000 28,000
Less pre-acquisition (6,000)
22,000
Discount unwound – finance costs (612)
Share of Pong: 80% × $22,000 17,600
42,988
$
Fair value of NCI 9,000
Share of post-acquisition retained earnings (22,000 × 20%) 4,400
13,400
HB2022
602 Financial Reporting (FR)
$ $
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (50,000 + 40,000) 90,000
Intangible assets: Goodwill (W1) 6,734
Brand name (W1) 5,000
Current assets
Inventories (3,000 + 8,000) 11,000
Trade receivables (16,000 + 7,000) 23,000
Cash and cash equivalents (2,000 + 2,000) 4,000
38,000
Total assets 139,734
Equity and liabilities
Equity
Ordinary shares of $1 each 45,000
Revaluation surplus (W3) 12,000
Retained earnings (W3) 42,988
99,988
NCI (W4) 13,400
113,388
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables (10,000 + 7,000) 17,000
Deferred consideration (W2) 9,346
Total equity and liabilities 139,734
$m $m
Consideration transferred ($2.00 × 6m) 12.0
NCI ($2.00 × 2m) 4.0
Fair value of net assets acquired
Share capital 8.0
Pre-acquisition reserves 4.4
Fair value adjustments
Property, plant and equipment (16.6 – 16.0) 0.6
HB2022
8: Essential Reading 603
Notes.
1 Share capital and pre-acquisition profits represent the carrying amount of the net assets of
Kono Co at the date of acquisition. Adjustments are then required to this book value in order to
give the fair value of the net assets at the date of acquisition. For short-term monetary items,
fair value is their carrying value on acquisition.
2 IFRS 3 states that the fair value of property, plant and equipment should be determined by
market value or, if information on a market price is not available (as is the case here), then by
reference to depreciated replacement cost, reflecting normal business practice. The net
replacement cost (ie $16.6 million) represents the gross replacement cost less depreciation
based on that amount, and so further adjustment for extra depreciation is unnecessary.
3 IFRS 3 also states that raw materials should be valued at replacement cost. In this case, that
amount is $4.2 million.
4 The rationalisation costs cannot be reported in pre-acquisition results under IFRS 3 as they are
not a liability of Kono Co at the acquisition date.
HB2022
604 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
Dougal Co acquired 60% of the $100,000 equity of Ted Co on 1 April 20X5. The statements of
profit or loss of the two companies for the year ended 31 December 20X5 are set out below:
$ $
Dividends (paid 31 December) 12,000 6,000
Profit retained 30,600 18,000
Retained earnings brought forward 81,000 40,000
Retained earnings carried forward 111,600 58,000
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of profit or loss and the retained earnings and non-controlling
interest extracts from the statement of changes in equity.
HB2022
606 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
9: Essential Reading 607
$
Revenue (170 + 60) 230,000
Cost of sales (65 + 27) (92,000)
Gross profit 138,000
Administrative expenses (43 + 9) (52,000)
Profit before tax 86,000
Income tax expense (23 + 6) (29,000)
Profit for the year 57,000
Profit attributable to:
Owners of the parent (balancing figure) 49,800
Non-controlling interest (18 × 40%) 7,200
57,000
Non-controlling
Retained earnings interest
$ $
Balance at 1 January 20X5 81,000 –
Dividends paid (NCI: 6,000 × 40%) (12,000) (2,400)
Total comprehensive income for the year 49,800 7,200
Added on acquisition of subsidiary (W) – 58,400
Balance at 31 December 20X5 118,800 63,200
Note that all of Ted Co’s profits brought forward are pre‑acquisition.
Working
NCI on acquisition of subsidiary
$
Added on acquisition of subsidiary:
Share capital 100,000
Retained earnings brought forward 40,000
Profits Jan-March 20X5 (24,000 – 18,000) 6,000
146,000
HB2022
608 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
9: Essential Reading 609
HB2022
The statements of financial position of John Co and its investee companies, Paul Co and George
Co, at 31 December 20X5 are shown below.
STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 31 DECEMBER 20X5
HB2022
11: Essential Reading 611
Additional information
(1) John Co acquired 600,000 ordinary shares in Paul Co on 1 January 20X0 for $1,000,000
when the retained earnings of Paul Co were $200,000.
(2) At the date of acquisition of Paul Co, the fair value of its freehold property was considered to
be $400,000 greater than its value in Paul Co’s statement of financial position. Paul Co had
acquired the property in January 20W0 and the buildings element (comprising 50% of the
total value) is depreciated on cost over 50 years.
(3) John Co acquired 225,000 ordinary shares in George Co on 1 January 20X4 for $500,000
when the retained earnings of George Co were $150,000.
(4) Paul Co manufactures a component, the Ringo, used by both John Co and George Co.
Transfers are made by Paul Co at cost plus 25%. John Co held $100,000 inventory of the
Ringo at 31 December 20X5. In the same period, John Co sold goods to George Co, of which
George Co had $80,000 in inventory at 31 December 20X5. John Co had marked these
goods up by 25%.
(5) The goodwill in Paul Co is impaired and should be fully written off. An impairment loss of
$92,000 is to be recognised on the investment in George Co.
(6) Non-controlling interest is valued at full fair value. Paul Co shares were trading at $1.60 just
prior to the acquisition by John Co.
Required
Prepare, using the proformas below, in a format suitable for inclusion in the annual report of the
John Group, the consolidated statement of financial position at 31 December 20X5.
HB2022
612 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000
Non-current assets
Current assets
Inventories (W3)
Receivables
Total assets
Equity
Share capital
Non-current liabilities
Current liabilities
HB2022
11: Essential Reading 613
Paul Co George Co
2 Freehold property
$’000
John Co
Paul Co
Additional depreciation
3 Inventory
$’000
John Co
Paul Co
PUP
(
) (W4)
$’000
HB2022
614 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000 $’000
Property
Additional depreciation:
6 Goodwill
$’000 $’000
Paul Co
Consideration transferred
Non-controlling interest
Share capital
Retained earnings
Goodwill at acquisition
Impairment loss
7 Investment in associate
$’000
Cost of investment
HB2022
11: Essential Reading 615
Less PUP
8 Retained earnings
Adjustments
Paul Co:
George Co:
$’000
HB2022
616 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000
Non-current assets
5,215.20
Current assets
1,645.00
Equity
3,792.20
4,670.20
Non-current liabilities
Workings
1 Group structure
John Co
1.1.X0 1.1.X4
60% 30%
(6 years ago) (2 years ago)
Paul Co George Co
HB2022
11: Essential Reading 617
$’000
John Co 1,950
Paul Co 1,250
3,570
3 Inventory
$’000
John Co 575
Paul Co 300
PUP
(100 × 25/125) (W4) (20)
855
$’000
$’000 $’000
400 370
HB2022
618 Financial Reporting (FR)
Paul Co
1,640
(1,600)
Goodwill at acquisition 40
7 Investment in associate
$’000
Less PUP
475.20
8 Retained earnings
Adjustments
795.0 390.0
HB2022
11: Essential Reading 619
(200.0) (150.0)
1,792.20
$’000
878.00
HB2022
620 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
Ishmail Co issues $20 million of 4% convertible loan notes at par on 1 January 20X7. The loan
notes are redeemable for cash or convertible into equity shares on the basis of 20 shares per $100
of debt at the option of the loan note holder on 31 December 20X9. Similar but non-convertible
loan notes carry an interest rate of 9%.
The present value of $1 receivable at the end of the year, based on discount rates of 4% and 9%,
can be taken as:
4% 9%
$ $
End of year:
1 0.96 0.92
2 0.93 0.84
3 0.89 0.77
Cumulative 2.78 2.53
Required
Show how these loan notes should be accounted for in the financial statements at 31 December
20X7.
HB2022
622 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
12: Essential Reading 623
In February 20X8, Bonce Co purchased 20,000 $1 listed equity shares at a price of $4 per share.
Transaction costs were $2,000. At the year end of 31 December 20X8, these shares were trading
at $5.50. A dividend of 20c per share was received on 30 September 20X8.
Required
Show the financial statement extracts of Bonce Co at 31 December 20X8 relating to this
investment on the basis that:
1 The shares were bought for trading (conditions for FVTOCI have not been met)
2 Conditions for FVTOCI have been met
Solution
On 1 January 20X1, Abacus Co purchases a debt instrument for its fair value of $1,000. The debt
instrument is due to mature on 31 December 20X5. The instrument has a principal amount of
$1,250 and the instrument carries fixed interest at 4.72% that is paid annually. The effective rate
of interest is 10%.
Required
How should Abacus Co account for the debt instrument over its five-year term?
HB2022
624 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
12: Essential Reading 625
$’000
Finance costs (W2) 1,568
Statement of financial position
Equity – option to convert (W1) 2,576
Non-current liabilities
4% convertible loan notes (W2) 18,192
Workings
1 Equity and liability elements
$’000
3 years interest (20,000 × 4% × 2.53) 2,024
Redemption (20,000 × 0.77) 15,400
Liability element 17,424
Equity element (β) 2,576
Proceeds of loan notes 20,000
$’000
Liability element (W1) 17,424
Interest for the year at 9% 1,568
Less interest paid (20,000 × 4%) (800)
Carrying amount at 31 December 20X7 18,192
$
Statement of profit or loss
Investment income (20,000 × (5.5 – 4.0)) 30,000
Dividend income (20,000 × 20c) 4,000
Transaction costs (2,000)
Statement of financial position
Investments in equity instruments (20,000 × 5.5) 110,000
HB2022
626 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Statement of profit or loss
Dividend income 4,000
Other comprehensive income
Gain on investment in equity instruments
(20,000 × 5.5) – ((20,000 × 4) + 2,000) 28,000
Statement of financial position
Investments in equity instruments (20,000 × 5.5) 110,000
Each year, the carrying amount of the financial asset is increased by the interest income for the
year, and reduced by the interest actually received during the year.
This is a financial asset that has passed the cash flow test for measurement at amortised cost. If
Abacus Co was also holding this instrument for trading, the IFRS 9 business model would allow it
to be carried at fair value through other comprehensive income.
In this case, fair value changes will go through other comprehensive income; interest charges will
be measured at amortised cost and go through profit or loss.
For instance, if at 1 January 20X2 the fair value of the debt instrument was $1,080, the difference
of $39 (1,080 – 1,041) would go to OCI and the asset would be shown in the statement of financial
position at $1,080.
HB2022
12: Essential Reading 627
HB2022
YES
YES
NO
YES
Broketown Council has recently made substantial cuts to its community transport service. It will
now provide such services only in cases of great need, assessed on a case-by-case basis. It has
entered into a two-year contract with Fleetcar Co for the use of one of its minibuses for this
purpose. The minibus must seat ten people, but Fleetcar Co can use any of its ten-seater
minibuses when required.
HB2022
13: Essential Reading 629
Solution
This is not a lease. There is no identifiable asset. Fleetcar can exchange one minibus for another.
Therefore, Broketown Council should account for the rental payments as an expense in profit or
loss.
Illustration 3: Lion Co
Lion Co enters into a five-year lease of a building, which has a remaining useful life of ten years.
Lease payments are $50,000 per annum, payable at the beginning of each year.
Lion Co incurs initial direct costs of $20,000 and receives lease incentives of $5,000. There is no
transfer of the asset at the end of the lease and no purchase option.
The interest rate implicit in the lease is not immediately determinable but the lessee’s incremental
borrowing rate is 5%, with the value of $1 having a cumulative present value in four years’ time of
$3.546. The value of $1 has a cumulative present value in five years’ time of $4.329.
At the commencement date, Lion Co pays the initial $50,000, incurs the direct costs and receives
the lease incentives.
Required
Calculate and show the transactions to be reflected in the financial statements.
Solution
Step 1: Calculate the lease liability
The lease liability is measured at the present value of the remaining four payments:
$50,000 × $3.546 = $177,300
Step 2: Calculate the initial carrying amount of the right-of-use asset
$
Initial payment 50,000
PV of future lease payments 177,300
Initial direct costs 20,000
Incentives received (5,000)
242,300
HB2022
630 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Opening balance 177,300
Interest 5% 8,865
186,165
The right-of-use asset will be depreciated over five years, being the shorter of the lease term and
the useful life of the underlying asset.
Now we will see how this would work out if the lease payments were made in arrears.
At the commencement date, the lessee would incur the direct costs and receive the lease
incentives.
Step 1: Calculate the lease liability
The lease would be measured at the present value in five years:
$50,000 × $4.329 = $216,450
Step 2: Calculate the value of the right-of-use asset
$
PVFLP 216,450
Direct costs 20,000
Lease incentives (5,000)
231,450
Debit Credit
$ $
Right-of-use asset 231,450
Lease liability 216,450
Cash (20,000 – 5,000) - 15,000
231,450 231,450
HB2022
13: Essential Reading 631
$
Opening balance 216,450
Interest 5% 10,823
Lease payment year 1 (50,000)
Year-end balance 177,273
In order to ascertain the split between non-current and current liabilities, we work out the balance
at the end of year 2:
$
Opening balance 177,273
Interest 5% 8,864
Lease payment year 2 (50,000)
Year-end balance 136,137
$
Non-current liability 136,137
Current liability (177,273 – 136,137) 41,136
177,273
Note that when payments are made in arrears, the next instalment due will contain interest, so
this is effectively deducted to arrive at the capital repayment.
Activity 7: Sidcup Co
On 1 January 20X6, Sidcup Co sold its head office building to Eltham Co for $3 million and
immediately leased it back on a 10-year lease. On that date, the carrying amount of the building
was $2.6 million and its fair value was $3 million. The present value of the lease payments was
calculated as $2.1 million. The remaining useful life of the building at 1 January 20X6 was 15
years. The transaction constituted a sale in accordance with IFRS 15.
Required
A right-of-use asset must be recognised in respect of the leased building. At what amount should
this right-of-use asset be recognised on 1 January 20X6 in the financial statements of Sidcup Co?
$2,100,000
$1,820,000
$3,000,000
$280,000
$400,000
Nil
$280,000
$120,000
HB2022
632 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 7: Sidcup Co
The correct answer is: $120,000
IFRS 16 requires that, at the start of the lease, Sidcup should measure the right-of-use asset
arising from the leaseback of the building at the proportion of the previous carrying amount of
the building that relates to the right of use retained. This is calculated as carrying amount ×
discounted lease payments/fair value. The discounted lease payments were given in the question
as $2.1 million.
Sidcup only recognises the amount of gain that relates to the rights transferred.
Stage 1: Gain is $3,000,000 – $2,600,000 = $400,000
Stage 2: Gain relating to rights retained $(400,000 × 2,100,000/3,000,000) = $280,000
Stage 3: Gain relating to rights transferred $(400,000 – 280,000) = $120,000
HB2022
13: Essential Reading 633
HB2022
1.2 Issue
Prior to the introduction of IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets in 1998,
there was little meaningful guidance on when a provision must (and must not) be made.
This caused problems with companies choosing to make then release provisions in order to smooth
profits.
Which of the following best describes a provision according to IAS 37 Provisions, Contingent
Liabilities and Contingent Assets?
A provision is a liability of uncertain timing or amount.
A provision is a possible obligation of uncertain timing or amount.
A provision is a credit balance set up to offset a contingent asset so that the effect on the
statement of financial position is nil.
A provision is a possible asset that arises from past events.
Solution
HB2022
14: Essential Reading 635
Start
YES
YES
NO
YES
HB2022
636 Financial Reporting (FR)
(1) Proviso Co issued a one-year guarantee for faulty workmanship on an item of specialist
equipment that it delivered to its customer. At the company’s year-end, the company is being
sued by the customer for refusing to replace or repair the item of equipment within the
guarantee period, as Proviso Co believes the fault is not covered by the guarantee, but
instead has arisen because of the customer not following the operating instructions.
The company’s lawyer has advised Proviso Co that it is more likely than not that they will be
found liable. This would result in the company being forced to replace or repair the
equipment plus pay court costs and a fine amounting to approximately $10,000.
Based on past experience with similar items of equipment, the company estimates that there
is a 70% chance that the central core would need to be replaced which would cost $40,000
and a 30% chance that the repair would only cost about $15,000.
(2) The company also manufactures small items of equipment which it sells via a retail network.
The company sold 12,000 items of this type this year, which also have a one-year guarantee
if the equipment fails. Based on past experience, 5% of items sold are returned for repair or
replacement. In each case, one-third of the items returned are able to be repaired at a cost of
$50, while the remaining two-thirds are scrapped and replaced. The manufacturing cost of a
replacement item is $150.
Required
1 What is a constructive obligation?
An obligation whereby past practice has created a valid expectation that the entity will
discharge its responsibilities
An obligation whereby the entity is legally required to discharge its responsibilities
An obligation whereby the entity commits to construct an asset
An obligation whereby past policies commit the entity to continue to discharge its
responsibilities
2 How much should be provided for the equipment guarantee?
$
3 State whether the following statements regarding the legal claim are true or false.
TRUE OR FALSE
A present obligation exists
No provision is required
1.5 Measurement
In the core Chapter of the Workbook, Activity 1 discounts the provision. This can be a trickier
concept to understand, but this more detailed explanation will take you through the main steps,
including the double entry and reviewing the overall impact on the financial statements.
HB2022
14: Essential Reading 637
$ $
DR PPE cost of the asset 3,105,000
CR Provision 3,105,000
Note. If the provision was not related to the cost of an asset, it would have been debited to the
statement of profit or loss as an expense.
Subsequent recognition: As time passes, and it gets closer to making the payment of the
environmental clean-up costs, the present value of the provision will go up. This is referred to as
‘unwinding the discount’ which is calculated as:
Carrying amount of the provision × Discount rate
The unwinding of the discount is accounted for as a finance cost in the statement of profit or loss.
At 31 December 20X6, the provision to be recognised is calculated as:
*The c/fwd provision could also have been calculated using the four-year discount factor: $5m ×
0.683 = $3,415,000
The change in the provision for the year ended 31 December 20X6 is recorded by:
$ $
DR Finance cost 310,500
CR Provision 310,500
The resulting provision of $3,415,500 is carried as a liability in the books of Cambridge Co.
This is repeated throughout the five-year period, so the entries for the whole period will look like
this:
HB2022
638 Financial Reporting (FR)
At the end of Year 5, there will be a provision held on the statement of financial of $5 million.
Treatment of capitalised provision: Usually a provision is debited to the statement of profit or loss
on initial recognition. However, if the provision relates to an asset, as in this case, it is capitalised
as part of the cost of the asset. Subsequently it is debited to the statement of profit or loss, as
part of the depreciation charge, over the life of the asset.
$ $
DR Amortisation/Depreciation expense (3.105m/5 years) 621,000
CR Accumulated depreciation/amortisation 621,000
Over the five-year period, there will be a finance charge and a depreciation charge in the
statement of profit or loss each year relating to the provision. The cost of the provision is spread
across the five years rather than incurring the cost just in year five. This supports the accrual
concept whereby income and the expenses are matched across the period of the economic
benefit.
$ $
DR Provision 5,000,000
CR Cash 5,000,000
Extraction Co prepares its financial statements to 31 December each year. During the years
ended 31 December 20X0 and 31 December 20X1, the following event occurred:
Extraction Co is involved in extracting minerals in a number of different countries. The process
typically involves some contamination of the site from which the minerals are extracted.
Extraction Co makes good this contamination only where legally required to do so by legislation
passed in the relevant country.
HB2022
14: Essential Reading 639
Solution
HB2022
640 Financial Reporting (FR)
2.2 Recognition
A contingent liability is not recognised. A contingent liability is disclosed unless the possibility of
an outflow of economic benefits is remote.
After a wedding in 20X8, ten people died possibly as a result of food poisoning from products sold
by Callow Co. Legal proceedings are started seeking damages from Callow but it disputes
liability. Up to the date of approval of the financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X8,
Callow’s lawyers advise that it is probable that it will not be found liable. However, when Callow
prepares the financial statements for the year to 31 December 20X9, its lawyers advise that,
owing to developments in the case, it is probable that it will be found liable.
Required
What is the required accounting treatment?
1 At 31 December 20X8
2 At 31 December 20X9
Solution
HB2022
14: Essential Reading 641
3.2 Recognition
• A contingent asset is not recognised because it could result in the recognition of profits that
may never be realised. However, where the realisation of profit is virtually certain, then the
related asset is not a contingent asset and recognition is appropriate.
• A contingent asset is disclosed where an inflow of economic benefits is probable.
4.1 Definition
Events occurring after the reporting period are those events, both favourable and unfavourable,
that occur between the end of the reporting period and the date on which the financial
statements are authorised for issue. Two types of events can be identified:
• Those that provide evidence of conditions that existed at the end of the reporting period –
adjusting
• Those that are indicative of conditions that arose after the reporting period – non-adjusting
(IAS 10: para. 3)
HB2022
642 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
14: Essential Reading 643
5 Additional activities
You are likely to be asked a question on IAS 37 or IAS 10 as part of an objective test question in
either Section A or section B. You may also be asked to adjust a set of financial statements for
errors, post year-end information, or be able to explain the impact of a provision or event after the
end of the reporting period as part of the interpretation question in Section C.
Ergonomic Co prepares its financial statements to 31 December each year. During the years
ended 31 December 20X0 and 31 December 20X1, the following event occurred:
Ergonomic Co is involved in extracting minerals in a number of different countries. The process
typically involves some contamination of the site from which the minerals are extracted.
Ergonomic Co makes good this contamination only where legally required to do so by legislation
passed in the relevant country.
The company has been extracting minerals in Golden Sands since January 20W8 and expects its
site to produce output until 31 December 20X5. On 23 December 20X0, it came to the attention of
the directors of Ergonomic Co that the government of Golden Sands was virtually certain to pass
legislation requiring the making good of mineral extraction sites. The legislation was duly passed
on 15 March 20X1. The directors of Ergonomic Co estimate that the cost of making good the site in
Golden Sands will be $2 million. This estimate is of the actual cash expenditure that will be
incurred on 31 December 20X5.
Required
Summarise the criteria that Ergonomic Co need to satisfy before a provision in respect of the
environmental clean-up costs is recognised.
Solution
HB2022
644 Financial Reporting (FR)
Toad Co’s year-end is 30 December 20X4 and the following potential liabilities have been
identified.
Which TWO of the following should Toad Co recognise as liabilities as at 30 December 20X4?
The signing of a non-cancellable contract in December 20X4 to supply goods in the following
year on which, due to a pricing error, a loss will be made.
The cost of a reorganisation which was communicated to interested parties or announced
publicly, and approved by the board in November 20X4. However, it has not yet been
implemented.
An amount of deferred tax relating to the gain on the revaluation of a property during the
current year. Toad Co has no intention of selling the property in the foreseeable future.
The balance on the warranty provision which related to products for which there are no
outstanding claims and whose warranties had expired by 30 December 20X4.
HB2022
14: Essential Reading 645
1 The correct answer is: An obligation whereby past practice has created a valid expectation
that the entity will discharge its responsibilities
2 $ 70,000
A present obligation exists at the end of the reporting period based on historical evidence of
items being repaired under the guarantee agreement.
Here, a large population of items is involved. A provision is therefore made for the expected
value of the outflow:
12,000 × 5% × 1/3 × $50 = $10,000
12,000 × 5% × 2/3 × $150 = $60,000
$70,000
TRUE OR FALSE
A present obligation exists TRUE
At the end of the reporting period, Proviso Co disputes the liability (and therefore whether a
present obligation exists).
However, given that it is more likely than not that Proviso will be found guilty, a present
obligation is assumed to exist (IAS 37: paras. 15–16).
Given that a single obligation is being measured, a provision is made for the outflow of the
most likely outcome (IAS 37: para. 40).
Consequently, a provision is recognised for $10,000 + $40,000 = $50,000.
HB2022
646 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
14: Essential Reading 647
HB2022
648 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
3 Biological assets
Biological assets are the core income-producing assets of agricultural activities, held for their
transformative capabilities. Biological transformation leads to various different outcomes (IAS 41:
para. 7):
• Asset changes:
- Growth: increase in quantity and or quality
- Degeneration: decrease in quantity and/or quality
HB2022
650 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
15: Essential Reading 651
HB2022
Activity 9: Cyclon Co
Cyclon Co purchased land on 1 January 20X7 for $400,000. On 31 December 20X8, the land was
revalued to $500,000. In the tax regime in which the company operates, revaluations do not
affect either the tax base of the asset or taxable profits.
The income tax rate is 30%.
Required
Prepare the accounting entry to record the deferred tax in relation to this revaluation for the year
ended 31 December 20X8.
Solution
Zebra Co owns a property which has a carrying amount at the beginning of 20X9 of $1.5 million.
At the year-end, it has entered into a contract to sell the property for $1,800,000. The tax rate is
30%.
Required
How will this gain on the property revaluation be shown in the financial statements?
HB2022
16: Essential Reading 653
Ginger Co has an asset with a carrying amount of $80,000 and a tax base of $50,000. The
current tax rate is 30% and the rate is being reduced to 25% in the next tax year. Ginger Co plans
to dispose of the asset for its carrying amount and will do so after the tax rate falls.
Required
What is the deferred tax arising in relation to this asset?
Solution
HB2022
654 Financial Reporting (FR)
For the year ended 31 July 20X4, Norman Kronkest Co made taxable trading profits of $1.2 million
on which income tax is payable at 30%.
(1) A transfer of $20,000 will be made to the deferred taxation account. The balance on this
account was $100,000 before making any adjustments for items listed in this paragraph.
(2) The estimated tax on profits for the year ended 31 July 20X3 was $80,000, however tax has
now been agreed at $84,000 and fully paid.
(3) Tax on profits for the year to 31 July 20X4 is payable on 1 May 20X5.
(4) In the year to 31 July 20X4 the company made a capital gain of $60,000 on the sale of some
property. This gain is taxable at a rate of 30%.
Required
1 Calculate the tax charge for the year to 31 July 20X4.
2 Prepare extracts from the statement of profit or loss of Norman Kronkest for the year ended 31
July 20X4.
3 Calculate the tax liabilities in the statement of financial position of Norman Kronkest as at 31
July 20X4.
Solution
HB2022
16: Essential Reading 655
Activity 9: Cyclon Co
Working
Deferred tax
$
Carrying amount of asset 500,000
Less tax base (400,000)
Temporary difference 100,000
Deferred tax (liability) (30% × 100,000) (30,000)
$’000
Profit for the year X
Other comprehensive income:
Gains on property revaluation 300
Income tax relating to components of other comprehensive income (300 × 30%) (90)
Other comprehensive income for the year net of tax 210
Debit Credit
$’000 $’000
Property, plant and equipment 300
Deferred tax 90
210
Revaluation surplus
In this case, the deferred tax has been deducted from the revaluation surplus rather than being
charged to profit or loss.
HB2022
656 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Tax on trading profits (30% of 1,200,000) 360,000
Tax on capital gain (30% of 60,000) 18,000
Deferred taxation 20,000
398,000
Underprovision of taxation in previous years $(84,000 – 80,000) 4,000
Tax charge on profit for the period 402,000
$
Profit before tax (1,200,000 + 60,000) 1,260,000
Income tax expense (402,000)
Profit for the year 858,000
3 Deferred taxation
$
Balance brought forward 100,000
Transferred from profit or loss 20,000
Deferred taxation in the statement of financial position 120,000
$
Payable on 1 May 20X5
Tax on profits (30% of $1,200,000) 360,000
Tax on capital gain (30% of $60,000) 18,000
Due on 1 May 20X5 378,000
Summary
$
Current liabilities
Tax, payable on 1 May 20X5 378,000
Non-current liabilities
Deferred taxation 120,000
HB2022
16: Essential Reading 657
$ $
DEBIT Tax charge (statement of profit or loss) 402,000
CREDIT Tax payable *382,000
Deferred tax liability 20,000
*This account will show a debit balance of $4,000 until the under provision is recorded, since
payment has already been made: (360,000 + 18,000 + 4,000). The closing balance will
therefore be $378,000.
HB2022
658 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
1.2.1 Materiality
If items are material, the entity must disclose their nature and amount separately. Such items
may include:
• Write downs of inventories to net realisable value
• Disposals of property, plant and equipment or investments
• Discontinued operations
• Legal claims
Materiality and disclosure in the financial statements has been a focus of the Board for a number
of years under the heading of the Disclosure Initiative. The Disclosure Initiative commenced in
2013 to address a number of perceived problems with disclosure in the financial statements.
The
disclosure problem
HB2022
660 Financial Reporting (FR)
1.5 Timeliness
If the publication of financial statements is delayed too long after the reporting period, their
usefulness will be severely diminished. An entity with consistently complex operations cannot use
this as a reason for its failure to report on a timely basis. Local legislation and market regulation
imposes specific deadlines on certain entities.
IAS 1 looks at the statement of financial position and statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income. We will not give all the detailed disclosures, as some are outside the scope
of the Financial Reporting syllabus. Instead, we will look at a proforma set of accounts based on
the Standard.
HB2022
17: Essential Reading 661
2.3 Dividends
IAS 1 also requires disclosure of the amount of dividends paid during the period covered by the
financial statements. This is shown either in the statement of changes in equity or in the notes.
(IAS 1: para. 107)
HB2022
662 Financial Reporting (FR)
3.2 Structure
The notes to the financial statements should perform the following functions:
(a) Present information about the basis on which the financial statements were prepared and
which specific accounting policies were chosen and applied to significant transactions/events
(b) Disclose any information, not shown elsewhere in the financial statements, which is required
by IFRSs
(c) Show any additional information that is relevant to understanding which is not shown
elsewhere in the financial statements
(IAS 1: para. 112)
The way the notes are presented is important. They should be given in a systematic manner and
cross-referenced back to the related figure(s) in the statement of financial position, statement of
comprehensive income or statement of cash flows. (IAS 1: para. 113)
Notes to the financial statements will amplify the information shown therein by giving the
following:
(a) More detailed analysis or breakdowns of figures in the statements
(b) Narrative information explaining figures in the statements
(c) Additional information, eg contingent liabilities and commitments
IAS 1 suggests a certain order for notes to the financial statements. This will assist users when
comparing the statements of different entities.
(a) Statement of compliance with IFRSs
(b) Statement of the measurement basis (bases) and accounting policies applied
(c) Supporting information for items presented in each financial statement in the same order as
each line item and each financial statement is presented
(d) Other disclosures, eg:
(i) Contingent liabilities, commitments and other financial disclosures
(ii) Non-financial disclosures
HB2022
17: Essential Reading 663
The accountant of Wislon Co has prepared the following list of account balances as at 31
December 20X7.
$’000
50c ordinary shares (fully paid) 450
10% loan notes (secured) 200
Retained earnings 1.1.X7 242
Other components of equity 1.1.X7 171
Land and buildings 1.1.X7 (cost) 430
Plant and machinery 1.1.X7 (cost) 830
Accumulated depreciation
Buildings 1.1.X7 20
Plant and machinery 1.1.X7 222
Inventory 1.1.X7 190
Sales 2,695
HB2022
664 Financial Reporting (FR)
Additional information:
(1) Sundry expenses include $9,000 paid in respect of insurance for the year ending 1 September
20X8. Light and heat does not include an invoice of $3,000 for electricity for the three
months ending 2 January 20X8, which was paid in February 20X8. Light and heat also
includes $20,000 relating to sales commission.
(2) The suspense account is in respect of the items shown in table ‘Suspense account’
(3) The net assets of Mary & Co were purchased on 3 March 20X7. Assets were valued as shown
in table ‘Asset value’. All the inventory acquired was sold during 20X7. The equity investments
were still held by Wislon at 31.12.X7. Goodwill has not been impaired in value.
(4) The property was acquired some years ago. The buildings element of the cost was estimated
at $100,000 and the estimated useful life of the assets was 50 years at the time of purchase.
As at 31 December 20X7, the property is to be revalued at $800,000.
(5) The plant, which was sold, had cost $350,000 and had a carrying amount of $274,000 as on
1.1.X7. $36,000 depreciation is to be charged on plant and machinery for 20X7.
(6) The management wish to provide for:
(i) Loan note interest due
(ii) A transfer from other components of equity to retained earnings of $16,000 in respect of
a previous revaluation surplus
(iii) Audit fees of $4,000
(7) Inventory as at 31 December 20X7 was valued at $220,000 (cost).
(8) Taxation is to be ignored.
Suspense account
$’000
Proceeds from the issue of 100,000 ordinary shares 120
Proceeds from the sale of plant 300
420
Less consideration for the acquisition of Mary & Co 285
135
HB2022
17: Essential Reading 665
$’000
Equity investments 231
Inventory 34
265
Required
Prepare the financial statements of Wislon Co as at 31 December 20X7. You do not need to
produce notes to the statements.
Solution
For ease of reference, we will first address the adjustments and then prepare the financial
statements proformas. Both the adjustments and figures per the trial balance that do not require
adjustment are posted to the proformas.
(1) Normal adjustments are needed for accruals and prepayments (insurance, light and heat,
loan note interest and audit fees). The loan note interest accrued is calculated as follows:
$’000
Charge needed in profit or loss (10% × $200,000) 20
Amount paid so far, as shown in list of account balances 10
Accrual: presumably six months’ interest now payable 10
$’000
Loan note interest 10
Light and heat 3
Audit fee 4
17
The misposting of $20,000 to light and heat is also adjusted, by reducing the light and heat
expense, but charging $20,000 to sales commission.
(2) Depreciation on the building is calculated as $100,000/50 = $2,000.
The carrying amount of the building is then $430,000 – $20,000 – $2,000 = $408,000 at the
end of the year. When the property is revalued, a revaluation surplus of $800,000 –
$408,000 = $392,000 is then recognised within other components of equity.
(3) The profit on disposal of plant is calculated as proceeds $300,000 (per suspense account)
less carrying amount $274,000, ie $26,000. The cost of the remaining plant is calculated at
$830,000 – $350,000 = $480,000. The depreciation provision at the year end is:
$’000
Balance 1.1.X7 222
Charge for 20X7 36
Less depreciation on disposals (350 – 274) (76)
182
HB2022
666 Financial Reporting (FR)
This is shown as an asset in the statement of financial position. The equity investments, being
owned by Wislon Co at the year end, are also shown on the statement of financial position,
whereas Mary & Co’s inventory, acquired and then sold, is added to the purchases figure for the
year.
(5) The other item in the suspense account is dealt with as follows:
$’000
Proceeds of issue of 100,000 ordinary shares 120
Less nominal value 100,000 × 50c 50
Excess of consideration over par value (= share premium) 70
(6) The transfer from other components of equity results in an other components of equity
balance of $171,000 (b/f) + $392,000 (Note 3) – $16,000 = $547,000.
$’000
Revenue 2,695
Cost of sales (W1) (2,156)
Gross profit 539
Other income (profit on disposal of plant) 26
Administrative expenses (W2) (437)
Finance costs (20)
Profit for the year 108
Other comprehensive income:
Gain on property revaluation 392
Total comprehensive income for the year 500
Workings
1 Cost of sales
$’000
Opening inventory 190
Purchases (2,152 + 34) 2,186
Closing inventory (220)
2,156
HB2022
17: Essential Reading 667
$’000
Wages, salaries and commission (254 + 20) 274
Sundry expenses (113 – 6) 107
Light and heat (31 – 20 + 3) 14
Depreciation: buildings 2
plant 36
Audit fees 4
437
$’000 $’000
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Property at valuation 800
Plant: cost 480
accumulated depreciation (182)
298
Goodwill 20
Equity investments 231
Current assets
Inventories 220
Trade accounts receivable 179
Prepayments 6
Cash and cash equivalents 126
531
Total assets 1,880
Equity and liabilities
Equity
50c ordinary shares 500
Share premium 70
Other components of equity 547
Retained earnings 351
1,468
Non-current liabilities
10% loan stock (secured) 200
Current liabilities
HB2022
668 Financial Reporting (FR)
WISLON CO STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY FOR THE YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X7
Other
Share Share Retained components
capital premium earnings of equity Total
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Balance at 1.1.X7 450 – 242 171 863
Issue of share capital 50 70 120
Dividends (15) (15)
Total comprehensive
income for the year 108 392 500
Transfer to other
components of equity – – 16 (16) –
HB2022
17: Essential Reading 669
HB2022
Activity 6: Tabby Co
Tabby Co has always valued inventory on a first in, first out (FIFO) basis. In 20X9, it decides to
switch to the weighted average method of valuation. Gross profit in the 20X8 financial statements
was calculated as follows:
$’000 $’000
Revenue 869
Cost of sales:
Opening inventory 135
Purchases 246
Closing inventory (174) (207)
Gross profit 662
Required
Restate the 20X8 comparative figures to show the effect of the change in accounting policy.
Solution
$’000 $’000
Revenue
Cost of sales:
Opening inventory
Purchases
Closing inventory
HB2022
18: Essential Reading 671
During 20X7, Global Co discovered that certain items had been included in inventory at 31
December 20X6, valued at $4.2 million, which had in fact been sold before the year-end. The
following figures for 20X6 (as reported) and 20X7 (draft) are as follows:
Retained earnings at 1 January 20X6 were $13 million. The cost of goods sold for 20X7 includes
the $4.2 million error in opening inventory. The income tax rate was 30% for 20X6 and 20X7. No
dividends have been declared or paid.
Required
Show the statement of profit or loss for 20X7, with the 20X6 comparative, and retained earnings.
Solution
HB2022
672 Financial Reporting (FR)
On 1 December 20X3, ManiCo became committed to a plan to sell a manufacturing facility and
has already found a potential buyer. ManiCo does not intend to discontinue the operations
currently carried out in the facility. At 31 December 20X3, there is a backlog of uncompleted
customer orders. The company will not be able to transfer the facility to the buyer until after it
ceases to operate the facility and has eliminated the backlog of uncompleted orders. This is not
expected to occur until spring 20X4.
Required
Can the manufacturing facility be classified as ‘held for sale’ at 31 December 20X3?
Solution
20X3 20X2
$’000 $’000
Revenue X X
Cost of sales (X) (X)
Gross profit X X
HB2022
18: Essential Reading 673
20X3 20X2
$’000 $’000
Revenue X X
Cost of sales (X) (X)
Gross profit X X
Other income X X
Distribution costs (X) (X)
Administrative expenses (X) (X)
Other expenses (X) (X)
Finance costs (X) (X)
Loss before tax (X) (X)
Income tax expense X X
Loss after tax (X) (X)
Post-tax gain on remeasurement and disposal of assets X X
LOSS FOR THE YEAR (X) (X)
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax X X
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR X X
HB2022
674 Financial Reporting (FR)
Continuing Discontinued
operations operations Entity as a whole
20X3 20X2 20X3 20X2 20X3 20X2
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Revenue X X X X X X
Cost of sales (X) (X) (X) (X) (X) (X)
Gross profit X X X X X X
Other income X X X X X X
Distribution costs (X) (X) (X) (X) (X) (X)
Administrative expenses (X) (X) (X) (X) (X) (X)
Other expenses (X) (X) (X) (X) (X) (X)
Finance costs (X) (X) (X) (X) (X) (X)
Profit/(loss) before tax X X (X) (X) X X
Income tax expense (X) (X) X X (X) (X)
Profit/(loss) after tax X X (X) (X) X X
Post-tax gain on
remeasurement and disposal
of assets and disposal
groups – – X – X –
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE
INCOME FOR THE YEAR X X X X X X
On 20 October 20X3, the directors of Largo Co made a public announcement of plans to close a
steel works. The closure means that the group will no longer carry out this type of operation,
which until recently has represented about 10% of its total revenue. The works will be gradually
shut down over a period of several months, with complete closure expected in July 20X4. At 31
December, output had been significantly reduced and some redundancies had already taken
place. The cash flows, revenues and expenses relating to the steel works can be clearly
distinguished from those of the subsidiary’s other operations.
Required
How should the closure be treated in the financial statements for the year ended 31 December
20X3?
HB2022
18: Essential Reading 675
HB2022
676 Financial Reporting (FR)
Activity 6: Tabby Co
In order to prepare comparative figures for 20X8 showing the change of accounting policy, it is
necessary to recalculate the amounts for 20X7, so that the opening inventory for 20X8 is valued
on a weighted average basis.
It is established that opening inventory for 20X8 based on the weighted average method would be
$122,000 and closing inventory would be $143,000. So, the 20X8 gross profit now becomes:
$’000 $’000
Revenue 869
Cost of sales:
Purchases 246
644
This shows $18,000 lower gross profit for 20X8 which will reduce net profit and retained earnings
by the same amount. The opening inventory for 20X9 will be $143,000 rather than $174,000 and
the statement of changes in equity for 20X9 will show an $18,000 adjustment to opening retained
earnings.
20X6 20X7
$’000 $’000
Revenue 47,400 67,200
Cost of sales (W1) (38,770) (51,600)
Profit before tax 8,630 15,600
Income tax (W2) (2,620) (4,660)
Profit for the year 6,010 10,940
HB2022
18: Essential Reading 677
20X6 20X7
$’000 $’000
As stated in question 34,570 55,800
Inventory adjustment 4,200 (4,200)
38,770 51,600
2 Income tax
20X6 20X7
$’000 $’000
As stated in question 3,880 3,400
Inventory adjustment (4,200 × 30%) (1,260) 1,260
2,620 4,660
HB2022
678 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
Flame Co is a company with a called up and paid up capital of 100,000 ordinary shares of $1
each and 20,000 10% redeemable preference shares of $1 each.
The gross profit was $200,000 and trading expenses were $50,000. Flame Co paid the required
preference share dividend and an ordinary dividend of 42c per share. The tax charge for the year
was estimated at $40,000.
Required
Calculate basic eps for the year.
Solution
HB2022
680 Financial Reporting (FR)
Marcoli Co has produced the following net profit figures for the years ending 31 December:
$m
20X6 1.1
20X7 1.5
20X8 1.8
On 1 January 20X7, the number of shares outstanding was 500,000. During 20X7, the company
announced a rights issue with the following details.
Rights: 1 new share for each 5 outstanding (100,000 new shares in total)
Exercise price is $5.00.
Last date to exercise rights: 1 March 20X7.
The market (fair) value of one share in Marcoli Co immediately prior to exercise on 1 March 20X7 =
$11.00.
Required
Calculate the eps for 20X6, 20X7 and 20X8.
Solution
HB2022
19: Essential Reading 681
Ardent Co has five million ordinary shares of 25 cents each in issue, and also had in issue in 20X4:
(1) $1 million of 14% convertible loan stock, convertible in three years’ time at the rate of two
shares per $10 of loan stock
(2) $2 million of 10% convertible loan stock, convertible in one year’s time at the rate of three
shares per $5 of loan stock
The total earnings in 20X4 were $1.75 million.
The rate of income tax is 35%.
Required
Calculate the basic eps and diluted eps.
Solution
Brand Co has the following results for the year ended 31 December 20X7:
Required
Calculate both basic and diluted earnings per share.
HB2022
682 Financial Reporting (FR)
4 Disclosure
An entity should disclose the following:
(a) The amounts used as the numerators in calculating basic and diluted eps, and a
reconciliation of those amounts to the net profit or loss for the period
(b) The weighted average number of ordinary shares used as the denominator in calculating
basic and diluted eps, and a reconciliation of these denominators to each other
(IAS 33: para. 70)
HB2022
19: Essential Reading 683
$
Gross profit 200,000
Expense (50,000 + 2,000 preference dividend) (52,000)
Profit before tax 148,000
Income tax expense (40,000)
Profit for the year 108,000
Basic eps
= $108,000 / 100,000 = $1.08 per share
$1,100,000
500,000 2.20
20X6 eps restated for rights issue
$1,100,000 10 10
× (or 2.20 × )
500,000 11 11
2.00
20X7 eps including effects of rights issue
$1,500,000
(500,000 × 2/12 × 11/10) + (600,000 × 10/12)
2.54
$1,800,000
eps =
20X8 600,000 3.00
HB2022
684 Financial Reporting (FR)
*The earnings have not been increased as the total number of shares has been increased only by
the number of shares (25,000) deemed for the purpose of the computation to have been issued
for no consideration.
HB2022
19: Essential Reading 685
HB2022
HB2022
20: Essential Reading 687
Now suppose that each company makes a profit before interest and tax of $50,000, and the rate
of tax on company profits is 30%. Amounts available for distribution to equity shareholders will be
as follows.
If in the subsequent year profit before interest and tax falls to $40,000, the amounts available to
ordinary shareholders will become as follows.
HB2022
688 Financial Reporting (FR)
The more highly geared the company, the greater the risk that little (if anything) will be
available to distribute by way of dividend to the ordinary shareholders. The example clearly
displays this fact in so far as the more highly geared the company, the greater the percentage
change in profit available for ordinary shareholders for any given percentage change in profit
before interest and tax. The relationship similarly holds when profits increase, and if PBIT had risen
by 20% rather than fallen, you would find that once again the largest percentage change in profit
available for ordinary shareholders (this means an increase) will be for the highly geared
company. This means that there will be greater volatility of amounts available for ordinary
shareholders, and presumably therefore greater volatility in dividends paid to those shareholders,
where a company is highly geared. That is the risk: you may do extremely well or extremely badly
without a particularly large movement in the PBIT of the company.
The risk of a company’s ability to remain in business was referred to earlier. Gearing or leverage is
relevant to this. A highly geared company has a large amount of interest to pay annually
(assuming that the debt is external borrowing rather than preference shares). If those borrowings
are ‘secured’ in any way (and loan notes in particular are secured), then the holders of the debt
are perfectly entitled to force the company to realise assets to pay their interest if funds are not
available from other sources. Clearly the more highly geared a company the more likely this is to
occur when and if profits fall.
Debt ratio: The ratio of a company’s total debts to its total assets.
KEY
TERM (a) Assets consist of non-current assets at their carrying amount, plus current assets
(b) Debts consist of all payables, whether they are due within one year or after more than
one year
You can ignore other non-current liabilities, such as deferred taxation.
There is no absolute guide to the maximum safe debt ratio, but as a very general guide, you might
regard 50% as a safe limit to debt. In practice, many companies operate successfully with a
higher debt ratio than this, but 50% is nonetheless a helpful benchmark. In addition, if the debt
ratio is over 50% and getting worse, the company’s debt position will be worth looking at more
carefully.
In the exam, it is important to look at the reasons for the changes which are specific to the
information given in the question and to consider the logic of whether an increase in one element
is justified by a reason in another.
HB2022
20: Essential Reading 689
The following information has been extracted from the recently published accounts of Doolittle
Co.
EXTRACTS FROM THE STATEMENTS OF PROFIT OR LOSS TO 30 APRIL
20X9 20X8
$’000 $’000
Revenue 11,200 9,750
Cost of sales 8,460 6,825
Net profit before tax 465 320
This is after charging:
Depreciation 360 280
Loan note interest 80 60
Interest on bank overdraft 15 9
Audit fees 12 10
20X9 20X8
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Assets
Non-current assets 1,850 1,430
Current assets
Inventories 640 490
Trade receivables 1,230 1,080
Cash and cash equivalents 80 120
1,950 1,690
Total assets 3,800 3,120
Equity and liabilities
Equity
Ordinary share capital 800 800
Retained earnings 1,310 930
2,110 1,730
Non-current liabilities
10% loan stock 800 600
Current liabilities
Bank overdraft 110 80
Trade and other payables 750 690
HB2022
690 Financial Reporting (FR)
The following ratios are those calculated for Doolittle Co, based on its published accounts for the
previous year, and also the latest industry average ratios:
Industry
Doolittle Co average
30 April 20X8
ROCE (capital employed = equity and debentures) 16.30% 18.50%
Net profit margin 3.90% 4.73%
Asset turnover 4.18 times 3.91 times
Current ratio 2.10 1.90
Quick ratio 1.52 1.27
Gross profit margin 30.00% 35.23%
Accounts receivable collection period 40 days 52 days
Accounts payable payment period 37 days 49 days
Inventory turnover 13.90 times 18.30 times
Gearing 25.75% 32.71%
Required
1 Calculate comparable ratios (to two decimal places where appropriate) for Doolittle Co for the
year ended 30 April 20X9. All calculations must be clearly shown.
2 Write a report to your board of directors analysing the performance of Doolittle Co,
comparing the results against the previous year and against the industry average.
Solution
HB2022
20: Essential Reading 691
Below are the summarised financial statements for the year to 31 March 20X5 and 20X6 of
Heywood Bottles Co, a company which manufactures bottles for many different drinks
companies.
The statements for the year to 31 March 20X6 have not been audited.
HEYWOOD BOTTLES CO – STATEMENTS OF PROFIT OR LOSS OR THE YEARS ENDED 31 MARCH
20X6 20X5
$m $m $m $m
Revenue 300 120
Manufacturing costs 261 83
Depreciation 9 7
Costs of sales (270) (90)
Gross profit 30 30
Other expenses (28) (10)
Profit before interest and tax 2 20
Finance costs (10) (2)
Profit/(loss) before tax (8) 18
Income tax expense (4) (6)
PROFIT/(LOSS) FOR THE
YEAR (12) 12
Dividends paid 8 8
20X6 20X5
$m $m
Non-current assets
Land and buildings 5 5
Plant and equipment 18 10
Right-of-use asset 40 28
63 43
Current assets
Inventories 18 12
Receivables 94 25
Other receivables 6 –
Bank – 8
HB2022
692 Financial Reporting (FR)
The directors were disappointed in the profit for the year to 31 March 20X5 and held a board
meeting in April 20X5 to discuss future strategy. The Managing Director was insistent that the way
to improve the company’s results was to increase sales and market share. As a result, the
following actions were implemented.
(1) An aggressive marketing campaign costing $12 million was undertaken during the year. All
advertisements had been placed in the year to 31 March 20X5. Due to expected long-term
benefits $6 million of this has been included as a current asset in the statement of financial
position at 31 March 20X6.
(2) A ‘price promise’ to undercut any other supplier’s price was announced in the advertising
campaign.
(3) A major contract with Koola Drinks Co was signed that accounted for a substantial
proportion of the company’s output. This contract was obtained through very competitive
tendering.
(4) The credit period for receivables was extended from two to three months.
A preliminary review by the board of the accounts to 31 March 20X6 concluded that the
company’s performance had deteriorated rather than improved. There was particular concern
over the prospect of renewing the bank facility because the maximum agreed level of $30 million
had been exceeded. The board decided that it was time to seek independent professional advice
on the company’s situation.
Required
In the capacity of a business consultant, prepare a report for the board of Heywood Bottles Co
based on a review of the company’s performance for the year to 31 March 20X6 in comparison
with the previous year. Particular emphasis should be given to the effects of the implementation
of the actions referred to in points (1) to (4) above.
HB2022
20: Essential Reading 693
Tutorial note. The above Activity is not representative of the style of question you may face in
the FR exam. It contains more calculations that you would be expected to produce. It is
however a useful learning tool and covers a good range of ratios that you should be
comfortable with calculating and analysing.
HB2022
694 Financial Reporting (FR)
2 REPORT
HB2022
20: Essential Reading 695
Introduction
This report was commissioned in order to assess the financial performance of Heywood Bottles Co
for the year to 31 March 20X6 in the light of the strategic actions taken in April 20X5.
Specific areas addressed include profitability, liquidity and solvency. An appendix sets out the
calculations of selected ratios used.
Financial performance
Growth
Heywood Bottles Co revenue has grown by approximately 150% in the year. This appears to be
due to increased sales volume as a result of:
• The marketing campaign undertaken during the year successfully attracting new customers
• The ‘price promise’ to undercut other suppliers winning customers from competitors
• The new contract won with Koola Drinks
• Extending the credit period from two to three months, so attracting new customers
Profitability
Return on capital employed has deteriorated from 31.7% to 3.6% implying a decline in efficiency in
the use of assets to generate profit. This is as a result of the decline in margins (explained below)
and also because Heywood Bottles has purchased and leased new assets during the current year.
Depending on the date on which the new assets were acquired, Heywood Bottles Co may not
have been able to take advantage of these assets to generate additional profit this year.
The improvement in asset turnover implies that Heywood Bottles is successfully using its assets to
generate revenue but has been unable to convert that into improved profitability.
The gross margin has deteriorated from 25% in 20X5 to 10% in 20X6. This is because increased
sales volume has been achieved at the cost of profit margins. The two main causes of this appear
to be:
• Lowering the sales price as a result of the ‘price promise’
HB2022
696 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
20: Essential Reading 697
HB2022
698 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
HB2022
700 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
21: Essential Reading 701
HB2022
$
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before taxation X
Adjustments for:
Depreciation X
Investment income (X)
Finance cost X
X
Increase in trade receivables (X)
Decrease in inventories X
Decrease in trade payables (X)
Cash generated from operations X
Interest paid (X)
Income taxes paid (X)
Net cash from operating activities X
It is important to understand why certain items are added and others subtracted. Note the
following.
(a) Depreciation is not a cash expense, but is deducted in arriving at profit. It makes sense,
therefore, to eliminate it by adding it back.
(b) By the same logic, a loss on a disposal of a non-current asset (arising through underprovision
of depreciation) needs to be added back and a profit deducted.
HB2022
22: Essential Reading 703
Activity 4: Thorstved Co
Below are the statements of financial position for Thorstved Co at 31 December 20X7 and 31
December 20X8 and the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income for the year
ended 31 December 20X8.
HB2022
704 Financial Reporting (FR)
Non-current liabilities
4% loan notes 250 100
Deferred tax 76 54
Provision for warranties 30 26
356 180
Current liabilities
Trade payables 152 146
Current tax payable 26 24
Interest payable 5 –
183 170
Total equity and liabilities 1,540 1,200
$’000
Revenue 1,100
Cost of sales (750)
Gross profit 350
Expenses (247)
Finance costs (10)
HB2022
22: Essential Reading 705
Notes.
1 Depreciation of property, plant and equipment during 20X8 was $54,000 and deferred
development expenditure amortised was $25,000.
2 Proceeds from the sale of equipment were $58,000, giving rise to a profit of $7,000. No other
items of property, plant and equipment were disposed of during the year.
3 Finance costs represent interest paid on the loan notes. New loan notes were issued on 1
January 20X8.
4 The company revalued its property at the year end. Company policy is to treat revaluations
as realised profits when the asset is retired or disposed of.
Required
Prepare a statement of cash flows for Thorstved Co for the year ended 31 December 20X8, using
the indirect method in accordance with IAS 7.
Solution
THORSTVED CO
STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS FOR YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X8
(INDIRECT METHOD)
$’000 $’000
Adjustments for:
Depreciation
Amortisation
Interest expense
HB2022
706 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
22: Essential Reading 707
$’000 $’000
b/d
Depreciation/amortisation
SPLOCI – OCI
Non-cash additions
Disposals
Cash paid/(rec’d) β
c/d
2 Equity
$’000 $’000
b/d
SPLOCI
Non-cash
Cash (paid)/rec’d β
c/d
HB2022
708 Financial Reporting (FR)
Income tax
Loan notes payable Interest payable
b/d
SPLOCI – P/L
– OCI
Non-cash
Cash (paid)/rec’d β
c/d
Trade Trade
Inventories receivables payables Provisions
b/d
Increase/ (decrease) β
c/d
HB2022
22: Essential Reading 709
Activity 4: Thorstved Co
THORSTVED CO
STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS FOR YEAR ENDED 31 DECEMBER 20X8
(INDIRECT METHOD)
$’000 $’000
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 54
Amortisation 25
Interest expense 10
182
HB2022
710 Financial Reporting (FR)
Workings
1 Assets
$’000 $’000
b/d 638 92
SPLOCI – OCI 60
Non-cash additions – –
2 Equity
$’000 $’000
SPLOCI 70
Non-cash – –
HB2022
22: Essential Reading 711
Income tax
Loan notes payable Interest payable
SPLOCI – P/L 30 10
– OCI 18
Non-cash – – –
Trade Trade
Inventories receivables payables Provisions
Increase/ (decrease) β 33 22 6 4
HB2022
712 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
2 Regulatory framework
Regulation of public not-for-profit entities, principally local and national governments and
governmental agencies, is undertaken by the International Public Sector Accounting Standards
Board (IPSASB), which comes under IFAC.
HB2022
714 Financial Reporting (FR)
Users and user groups • The primary user group for not-for-profit entities is
providers of funds.
• In the case of public bodies, such as government
departments, this primary group will consist of taxpayers.
• In the case of private bodies such as charities it will be
financial supporters, and also potential future financial
supporters.
• Another user group will be the recipients of the goods and
services provided by the not-for-profit entity
Cash flow focus • The resources the entity has available to deliver future
goods and services
• The cost and effectiveness of the objectives the entity has
delivered in the past
• The degree to which the entity is meeting its objectives
• The financial statements of not-for-profit entities need to
provide information which will enable users to assess an
entity’s ability to generate net cash inflows.
HB2022
23: Essential Reading 715
3 Performance measurement
Not-for-profit and public sector entities produce financial statements in the same way as profit-
making entities do but, while they are expected to remain solvent, their performance cannot be
measured simply by the bottom line.
A public sector entity is not expected to show a profit or to underspend its budget. In practice,
central government and local government departments know that if they underspend the budget,
next year’s allocation will be correspondingly reduced. This pressure to meet a target can lead to
sub-optimal decision-making, for example, activity designed to ensure that spending or saving
targets are met just before the date at which performance is assessed. This leads to a rash of
digging up the roads and other expenditure just before the end of the financial year as councils
strive to spend any remaining funds.
Private and public sector entities are sometimes judged principally on the basis of what they have
achieved, not how much or how little they have spent in achieving it.
Which ONE of the following is a potential problem when analysing the performance of the
financial statements of a charity?
Lack of consistent accounting standards
Inability to see how restricted funds have been used by the charity
Difficulty in comparing similarly sized charities, for example a charity supporting homeless
people, and one supporting hospice care
As the charity is non-profit making, it is not a going concern
The Royal Charlotte Hospital files financial statements with details of its key performance
indicators. Which of the following key performance indicators are expected to be found in its
financial statements?
Return on capital employed
Dividend yield
Interest cover
PE ratio
HB2022
716 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
23: Essential Reading 717
HB2022
718 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
2 Which one of the following is not an item which is required to be shown on the face of the
statement of financial position according to IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements?
Inventories
Biological assets
Irrecoverable debt allowance
Investment property
3 What is the correct treatment of equity dividends paid under IAS 1 Presentation of Financial
Statements?
Dividends paid are shown on the face of the statement of profit or loss
Dividends paid are deducted from retained earnings
Dividends paid are included in administrative expenses
Dividends paid are deducted from ‘other comprehensive income’
4 Watson Co acquired a property on 1 January 20X1 for $250,000, being $200,000 for the building
and $50,000 for the land. The building was estimated to have a useful life of 50 years. On 1
January 20X6 the property was independently valued which resulted in an increase of $100,000
to the carrying amount of the building and $50,000 to the carrying amount of the land. The
useful life is unchanged.
Required
What is the depreciation charge for the year ended 31 December 20X6?
$5,520
$6,222
$6,273
$6,818
HB2022
720 Financial Reporting (FR)
7 A discontinued operation was disposed of in the current year. How should this be presented in the
statement of profit or loss?
A one-line entry showing post-tax profit or loss of the operation and the post-tax gain or loss
on disposal
A separate column showing the results of the discontinued operation, with the gain or loss on
disposal included under ‘other income’
A one-line entry showing the pre-tax profit or loss of the operation and the pre-tax gain or loss
on disposal included under ‘other income’. Tax effects included in ‘income tax expense’
A one-line entry showing pre-tax profit or loss of the operation and pre-tax gain or loss on
disposal, with tax effects included under ‘income tax expense’
8 Mammoth Co acquired 80% of the 100,000 $1 equity shares of Minor Co on 1 January 20X7. The
consideration consisted of one Mammoth Co share for each two shares in Minor Co and
$300,000 cash. The market price of a Mammoth Co share at 1 January 20X7 was $2.50 and the
market price of a Minor Co share on the same date was $1.75. Mammoth Co measure non-
controlling interest at fair value based on share price. At the acquisition date Minor Co had
retained earnings of $85,000 and $100,000 in revaluation surplus. Its head office building had a
fair value $60,000 in excess of its carrying amount.
Required
What was the goodwill on acquisition?
$190,000
$55,000
$90,000
$75,000
9 Catfish Co has owned 75% of Shark Co for a number of years. During the year to 31 December
20X8 Shark Co sold goods to Catfish Co for $75,000. Catfish Co had resold 40% of these goods
by the year end. Shark Co applies a 25% mark-up on all sales.
Required
By what amount should the consolidated retained earnings of Catfish Co at 31 December 20X8
be reduced in respect of these intragroup sales?
$33,750
$6,750
$8,438
$9,000
10 Frog Co acquired 80% of Tadpole Co on 1 April 20X7. The individual financial statements of Frog
Co and Tadpole Co for the year ended 31 December 20X7 showed revenue of $280,000 and
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 721
11 Python Co obtained 30% of the equity shares of Cobra Co on 1 June 20X8 for $700,000. It is able
to exercise significant influence over Cobra Co. During the year to 31 May 20X9 Python Co made
sales of $200,000 to Cobra Co, priced at cost plus 25% mark-up. Cobra Co still had 50% of these
goods in inventory at the year end. Cobra Co’s statement of profit or loss for the year ended 31
May 20X9 shows profit for the year of $650,000.
Required
What amount should be shown as ‘Investment in associate’ in the consolidated statement of
financial position of Python Co as at 31 May 20X9?
$889,000
$895,000
$901,000
$875,000
13 A contract in which performance obligations are satisfied over time was commenced on 1 April
20X7 for a price of $2.5 million. At 31 December 20X7 the contract was certified as 40% complete
and costs incurred to date amounted to $0.8 million. The contract is expected to be profit making
overall.
Invoices amounting to $300,000 have been issued but no payment has yet been received.
Required
What amount should be shown in the statement of financial position as at 31 December 20X7 in
respect of ‘contract asset/liability’?
$700,000 contract liability
$700,000 contract asset
$100,000 contract liability
$100,000 contract asset
HB2022
722 Financial Reporting (FR)
15 How are financial assets initially measured under IFRS 9 Financial Instruments (excluding assets
held for trading or subject to a specific designation)?
Fair value
Fair value plus transaction costs
Fair value minus transaction costs
Amortised cost
16 On 1 April 20X7 Lastgo Co rents a warehouse under a ten-month lease for $24,000 per month and
elects to use the short term lease exemption under IFRS 16 Leases. As an incentive to sign the
contract it is given the first month rent-free.
Required
What amount in respect of lease rental should be charged to profit or loss for the quarter ended
30 June 20X7?
$64,800
$48,000
$72,000
$43,200
17 Tangier Co had 200,000 shares in issue at 1 January 20X4. On 1 April 20X4 it made a 1 for 4 rights
issue at a price of $1.20. The market value immediately prior to the issue was $1.80. Profit for the
year ended 31 December 20X4 was $560,000.
Required
What is EPS for the year?
$2.32
$2.24
$2.61
$2.80
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 723
HB2022
724 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 725
HB2022
726 Financial Reporting (FR)
Euro to dollar rates for the last two months of 20X7 were:
10.11.20X7 €1.13 : $
10.12.20X7 €1.18 : $
31.12.20X7 €1.12 : $
Required
(a) What amount should be charged as depreciation on the building in (1) for the year ended 31
December 20X7?
$22,300
$22,128
$22,000
$21,176
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 727
$
Goodwill 20,000
Factory building 440,000
Plant and machinery 160,000
Net current assets 100,000
720,000
Required
What will be the carrying amount of plant and machinery when the impairment loss has been
allocated?
$129,000
$130,000
$144,000
$114,000
(e) What should be the total amount of exchange gain or loss recognised during the year to 31
December 20X7 in respect of the transaction in (3) above?
$592 loss
$2,813 gain
$2,221 gain
$1,186 gain
HB2022
728 Financial Reporting (FR)
(b) Explain in general terms what the IASB’s Conceptual Framework is trying to achieve.
(4 marks)
(Total = 10 marks)
(b) Discuss whether or not the financial statements of not-for-profit entities should be subject to
regulation. (5 marks)
(Total = 10 marks)
$ $
Authorised and issued 300,000 ordinary shares of $1 each, fully
paid 300,000
100,000 8.4% cumulative redeemable preference shares of $1
each, fully paid 100,000
Revaluation surplus 50,000
Share premium 100,000
Other components of equity 50,000
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 729
Additional information:
(1) Inventories at 31 May 20X8 were:
$
Raw materials 112,600
Finished goods 275,350
Work in progress 37,800
HB2022
730 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Solicitors’ fees for purchase of freehold land during year 5,000
(4) Provision is to be made for a full year’s interest on the loan notes.
(5) Income tax on the profits for the year is estimated at $40,000 and is due for payment on 28
February 20X9.
(6) The directors recommended on 30 June that a dividend of 3.5c per share be paid on the
ordinary share capital. No ordinary dividend was paid during the year ended 31 May 20X7.
Required
From the information given above, prepare the statement of profit or loss and other
comprehensive income of Polymer for the year to 31 May 20X8 and a statement of financial
position at that date for publication in accordance with IFRS Standards.
(Total = 25 marks)
$’000
Profit before interest and tax 792
Finance income 24
Finance cost (10)
Profit before tax 806
Income tax expense (240)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 566
Other comprehensive income:
Gain on property revaluation 120
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR 686
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 731
Gains Co has been following paragraph 41 of IAS 16 which allows a reserve transfer of the realised
revaluation surplus (the difference between depreciation based on revalued amount and
depreciation based on cost) as the asset is used to retained earnings.
Revaluations during the year related to land.
$
Original cost 120,000
Revaluation surplus 40,000
Value at 1.1.20X9 160,000
The properties had a valuation on 31 December 20X9 of $110,000. Gains Co previously accounted
for its investment properties by crediting gains to a revaluation surplus as allowed by local GAAP.
Gains Co now wishes to apply the fair value model of IAS 40 which states that gains and losses
should be accounted for in profit or loss. The elimination of the previous revaluation surplus is to
be treated as a change in accounting policy in accordance with IAS 8. No adjustment has yet
been made for the change in accounting policy or subsequent fall in value.
(3) Share capital
During the year the company had the following changes to its capital structure:
- An issue of 200,000 $1 ordinary bonus shares capitalising its share premium
- An issue of 400,000 $1 ordinary shares (issue price $1.40 per share)
(4) Equity
The carrying amount of equity at the start of the year was as follows:
$
Share capital 2,800,000
Share premium 1,150,000
Retained earnings 2,120,000
Revaluation surplus 750,000
6,820,000
(5) Dividends
Dividends paid during the year amounted to $200,000.
Required
Using the information above prepare the Statement of changes in equity for Gains Co for the
year ended 31 December 20X9.
(Total = 10 marks)
HB2022
732 Financial Reporting (FR)
(b) Prepare extracts from the statement of financial position of Biogenics Co at 31 December
20X9 relating to the above items and summarise the costs to be included in the statement of
profit or loss for that year. (7 marks)
(Total = 10 marks)
$’000
Goodwill 200
Operating licence 1,200
Property – train stations and land 300
Rail track and coaches 300
Two steam engines 1,000
Purchase consideration 3,000
The operating licence is for ten years. It was renewed on 1 January 20X0 by the transport
authority and is stated at the cost of its renewal. The carrying amount of the property and rail
track and coaches are based on their value in use. The engines are valued at their net selling
prices.
On 1 February 20X0 the boiler of one of the steam engines exploded, completely destroying the
whole engine. Fortunately, no one was injured, but the engine was beyond repair. Due to its age a
replacement could not be obtained. Because of the reduced passenger capacity, the estimated
value in use of the whole of the business after the accident was assessed at $2 million.
Passenger numbers after the accident were below expectations even allowing for the reduced
capacity. A market research report concluded that tourists were not using the railway because of
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 733
Hewlett Co’s trial balance from the general ledger at 31 December 20X2 showed the following
balances:
$m $m
Revenue 2,648
Purchases 1,669
Inventories at 1 January 20X2 444
Distribution costs 514
Administrative expenses 345
Loan note interest paid 3
Rental income 48
Land and buildings: – cost (including $90m land) 840
– accumulated depreciation at 1 January 20X2 120
Plant and equipment: – cost 258
– accumulated depreciation at 1 January 20X2 126
Investment property at 1 January 20X2 548
Trade receivables 541
Cash and cash equivalents 32
50c ordinary shares 100
Share premium 244
Retained earnings at 1 January 20X2 753
Interim dividend paid 6
Other components of equity 570
4% loan note repayable 20X8 (issued 20X0) 150
Trade and other payables 434
Proceeds from sale of equipment 7
5,200 5,200
HB2022
734 Financial Reporting (FR)
Hewlett Co’s accounting policy is to charge a full year’s depreciation in the year of an asset’s
purchase and none in the year of disposal. Hewlett Co’s buildings were eight years old on 1
January 20X2.
(4) On 31 December 20X2 the company revalued its land and buildings to $760 million (including
$100 million for the land). The company follows the revaluation model of IAS 16 for its land
and buildings, but no revaluations had previously been necessary. The company wishes to
treat the revaluation surplus as being realised on disposal of the assets. The company has
previously undertaken no revaluations.
(5) Due to a change in Hewlett Co’s product portfolio plans, an item of plant with a carrying
amount $22 million at 31 December 20X2 (after adjusting for depreciation for the year) may
be impaired due to a change in use. An impairment test conducted at 31 December, revealed
its fair value less costs of disposal to be $16 million. The asset is now expected to generate an
annual net income stream of $3.8 million for the next five years at which point the asset
would be disposed of for $4.2 million. An appropriate discount rate is 8%. Five-year discount
factors at 8% are:
Simple Cumulative
0.677 3.993
(6) The income tax charge (current and deferred tax) for the year is estimated at $45 million (of
which $17 million relates to future payable tax on the revaluation, to be charged to other
comprehensive income (and the revaluation surplus)).
(7) An interim dividend of 3c per share was paid on 30 June 20X2. A final dividend of 1.5c per
share was declared by the directors on 28 January 20X3. No dividends were paid or declared
in 20X1.
(8) During the year on 1 July 20X2, Hewlett Co made a 1 for 4 bonus issue, capitalising its other
components of equity. This transaction had not yet been accounted for. The fair value of the
company’s shares on the date of the bonus issue was $7.50 each.
(9) Hewlett uses the fair value model of IAS 40. The fair value of the investment property at 31
December 20X2 was $588 million.
Required
Prepare the statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and statement of
changes in equity for Hewlett Co for the year to 31 December 20X2 and a statement of financial
position at that date in accordance with IFRS Standards insofar as the information permits.
Notes.
1 Notes to the financial statements are not required, but all workings should be clearly shown.
2 Work to the nearest $1m. Comparative information is not required.
(Total = 25 marks)
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 735
Barcelona Co Madrid Co
$m $m
Non-current assets
Property, plant & equipment 2,848 354
Patents 45 –
Investment in Madrid 159 –
3,052 354
Current assets
Inventories 895 225
Trade and other receivables 1,348 251
Cash and cash equivalents 212 34
2,455 510
5,507 864
Equity
Share capital (20c ordinary shares) 920 50
Retained earnings 2,861 440
3,781 490
Non-current liabilities
Long-term borrowings 558 168
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 1,168 183
Current portion of long-term borrowings – 23
1,168 206
5,507 864
At the date of acquisition the fair values of some of Madrid Co’s assets were greater than their
carrying amounts. One line of Madrid Co’s inventory had a fair value of $8 million above its
carrying amount. This inventory had all been sold by 30 September 20X6. Madrid Co’s land and
buildings had a fair value $26 million above their carrying amount. $20 million of this is
attributable to the buildings, which had a remaining useful life of ten years at the date of
acquisition.
It is group policy to value non-controlling interests at full (or fair) value. The fair value of the non-
controlling interests at acquisition was $86 million.
Annual impairment tests have revealed cumulative impairment losses relating to recognised
goodwill of $20 million to date.
HB2022
736 Financial Reporting (FR)
Reprise Co Encore Co
$’000 $’000
Non-current assets
Investment in Encore 2,000 –
Land and buildings 3,350 –
Plant and equipment 1,010 2,210
Motor vehicles 510 345
6,870 2,555
Current assets
Inventories 890 352
Trade receivables 1,372 514
Cash and cash equivalents 89 51
2,351 917
9,221 3,472
Equity
Share capital – $1 ordinary shares 1,000 500
Retained earnings 4,225 2,610
Revaluation surplus 2,500 –
7,725 3,110
Non-current liabilities
10% debentures 500 –
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 996 362
9,221 3,472
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 737
Fallowfield Co Rusholme Co
$ $
Revenue 403,400 193,000
Cost of sales (201,400) (92,600)
Gross profit 202,000 100,400
Distribution costs (16,000) (14,600)
Administrative expenses (24,250) (17,800)
Dividends from Rusholme 15,000
Profit before tax 176,750 68,000
Income tax expense (61,750) (22,000)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 115,000 46,000
Fallowfield Co Rusholme Co
Retained Retained
earnings earnings
$ $
Balance at 1 July 20X7 163,000 61,000
Dividends (40,000) (25,000)
Profit for the year 115,000 46,000
Balance at 30 June 20X8 238,000 82,000
Additional information:
During the year Rusholme Co sold some goods to Fallowfield Co for $40,000, including 25%
mark-up. Half of these items were still in inventories at the year end.
Required
Produce the consolidated statement of profit or loss of Fallowfield Co and its subsidiary for the
year ended 30 June 20X8, and an extract from the statement of changes in equity, showing
retained earnings. Goodwill is to be ignored.
(Total = 15 marks)
HB2022
738 Financial Reporting (FR)
The statements of profit or loss and other comprehensive income of Panther Co and Sabre Co
for the year ended 31 December 20X4 are:
Panther Co Sabre Co
$’000 $’000
Revenue 22,800 4,300
Cost of sales (13,600) (2,600)
Gross profit 9,200 1,700
Distribution costs (2,900) (500)
Administrative expenses (1,800) (300)
Finance costs (200) (70)
Finance income 50 –
Profit before tax 4,350 830
Income tax expense (1,300) (220)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 3,050 610
Other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 1,600 180
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR 4,650 790
Historically, Sabre Co had been a significant trading partner of Panther Co. During 20X4,
Panther Co purchased $640,000 of goods from Sabre Co. Of these, $60,000 remained in
inventories at the year end. Sabre Co makes a mark-up on cost of 20% under the transfer pricing
agreement between the two companies. The fair value of the identifiable net assets of Sabre Co
on purchase were $200,000 greater than their carrying amounts. The difference relates to
properties with a remaining useful life of 20 years.
On 1 January 20X4 (to protect its supply lines), Panther Co had advanced a loan to Sabre Co
amounting to $800,000 at a market interest rate of 5%. The loan is due for repayment in 20X9.
Panther Co Sabre Co
Reserves Reserves
$’000 $’000
Balance at 1 January 20X4 12,750 2,480
Dividend paid (900) –
Total comprehensive income for the year 4,650 790
Balance at 31 December 20X4 16,500 3,270
Panther Co and Sabre Co had $400,000 and $150,000 of share capital in issue throughout the
period respectively.
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of profit or loss and other comprehensive income and
statement of changes in equity (extract for reserves) for the Panther Group for the year ended 31
December 20X4.
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 739
HB2022
740 Financial Reporting (FR)
Depreciation arising on the fair value adjustment to non-current assets since this date is $5,000.
(4) During the year, Hever Co sold inventories to Spiro Co for $16,000, which originally cost Hever
Co $10,000. Three‑quarters of these inventories have subsequently been sold by Spiro Co.
(5) No impairment losses on goodwill had been necessary by 31 December 20X4.
(6) It is group policy to value non-controlling interests at full (or fair) value. The fair value of the
non-controlling interests at acquisition was $90,000.
Required
Prepare the consolidated statement of financial position for the Hever group (incorporating the
associate).
(Total = 20 marks)
Highveldt Co Samson Co
$m $m $m $m
Tangible non-current assets (note(1)) 420 320
Development costs (note (4)) nil 40
Investments (note (2)) 300 20
720 380
Current assets 133 91
Total assets 853 471
Equity and liabilities
Ordinary shares of $1 each 270 80
Reserves:
Share premium 80 40
Revaluation surplus 45 nil
Retained earnings – 1 April 20X4 160 134
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 741
(b) Explain why consolidated financial statements are useful to the users of financial statements
(as opposed to just the parent company’s separate (entity) financial statements). (5 marks)
(Total = 25 marks)
HB2022
742 Financial Reporting (FR)
The company receives a 2.5% trade discount from its suppliers and it also takes advantage of
a 2% discount for prompt payment.
Required
Calculate the total value of products Arctic, Brassy and Chilly which should be shown in
inventory in the statement of financial position.
(b) Explain the difference that changing from a weighted average to FIFO method of inventory
valuation is likely to have on an entity’s profit or loss.
(Total = 10 marks)
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 743
(b) On 1 January 20X3 Dashing Co issued $600,000 loan notes. Issue costs were $200. The loan
notes do not carry interest, but are redeemable at a premium of $152,389 on 31 December
20X4. The effective finance cost of the loan notes is 12%.
Required
What is the finance cost in respect of the loan notes for the year ended 31 December 20X4?
(3 marks)
(c) On 1 January 20X1, Flustered Co issued 10,000 5% convertible bonds at their par value of
$50 each. The bonds will be redeemed on 1 January 20X6. Each bond is convertible to equity
shares at the option of the holder at any time during the five year period. Interest on the
bond will be paid annually in arrears.
The prevailing market interest rate for similar debt without conversion options at the date of
issue was 6%.
The discount factor for 6% at year 5 is 0.747.
The cumulative discount factor for years 1–5 at 6% is 4.212.
Required
At what value should the equity element of the hybrid financial instrument be recognised in
the financial statements in Flustered Co at the date of issue? (4 marks)
(Total = 10 marks)
(b) Explain with examples how IFRS seeks to limit creative accounting in each of the following
areas of accounting.
(i) Group accounting
(ii) Measurement and disclosure of current assets (8 marks)
(c) Alpha Co, a public listed corporation, is considering how it should raise $10m of finance
which is required for a major and vital non-current asset renewal scheme that will be
undertaken during the current year to 31 December 20X6. Alpha Co is particularly concerned
HB2022
744 Financial Reporting (FR)
(Total = 25 marks)
(b) Jenson Co has entered into the following transactions/agreements in the year to 31 March
20X5.
(1) Jenson Co owns the rights to a fast food franchise. On 1 April 20X4 it sold the right to
open a new outlet to Mr Verstappen. The franchise is for five years. Jenson Co received
an initial fee of $50,000 for the first year and will receive $5,000 per annum thereafter.
Jenson Co has continuing service obligations on its franchise for advertising and product
development that amount to approximately $8,000 per annum for each franchised
outlet. A reasonable profit margin on the provision of the continuing services is deemed
to be 20% of revenues received.
(2) On 1 September 20X4 Jenson Co received subscriptions in advance of $240,000. The
subscriptions are for 24 monthly publications of a magazine produced by Jenson Co. At
the year-end Jenson Co had produced and despatched 6 of the 24 publications.
Required
Describe how Jenson Co should treat each of the above examples in its financial statements
in the year to 31 March 20X5. (13 marks)
(Total = 18 marks)
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 745
Required
(a) Show how each contract would be reflected in the statement of financial position of Trontacc
Co at 30 September 20X7 under IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers.
(b) Show how each contract would be reflected in the statement of profit or loss of Trontacc Co
for the year ended 30 September 20X7 under IFRS 15.
(Total = 10 marks)
$’000 $’000
Revenue 283,460
Inventory 1 October 20X0 12,400
Purchases 147,200
Distribution expenses 22,300
Administration expenses 34,440
Loan note interest paid 300
Interim dividends: ordinary 2,000
preference 480
Investment income 1,500
Building 56,250
Plant and equipment – cost 55,000
Computer system – cost 35,000
Investments at valuation 34,500
Depreciation 1 October 20X0 (note (2))
Building 18,000
Plant and equipment 12,800
Computer system 9,600
Trade accounts receivable 35,700
Bank overdraft 1,680
Trade accounts payable 17,770
Deferred tax (note (3)) 5,200
Ordinary shares of $1 each 20,000
HB2022
746 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Normal sales at a mark-up on cost of 40% 1,400,000
Sales on a sale or return basis at a mark-up on cost of 30% 650,000
Goods received at cost 820,000
All sales and purchases had been correctly recorded in the period in which they occurred.
(2) Telenorth Co has a building depreciated over the useful term of 25 years on a straight line
basis. Depreciation has not yet been calculated for the current year.
Telenorth Co has the following depreciation policies.
Plant and equipment – five years straight line with residual values estimated at $5,000,000
Computer system – 40% per annum reducing balance
Depreciation of the building and plant is treated as cost of sales; depreciation of the
computer system is an administration cost.
(3) An income tax liability of $23.4 million for the year to 30 September 20X1 is required. The
deferred tax liability is to be increased by $2.2 million, of which $1 million is to be charged
direct to the revaluation surplus.
(4) The suspense account contains the proceeds of two share issues.
(i) The exercise of all the outstanding directors’ share options of four million shares on 1
October 20X0 at $2 each
(ii) A fully subscribed rights issue on 1 July 20X1 of 1 for 4 held at a price of $3 each. The
stock market price of Telenorth’s shares immediately before the rights issue was $4.
(iii) The finance charge relating to the preference shares is equal to the dividend payable.
Required
(a) The statement of profit or loss of Telenorth Co for the year to 30 September 20X1. (8 marks)
(b) A statement of financial position as at 30 September 20X1 in accordance with IFRS Standards
as far as the information permits. (12 marks)
(c) Calculate the earnings per share in accordance with IAS 33 for the year to 30 September
20X1 (ignore comparatives). (5 marks)
(Total = 25 marks)
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 747
HB2022
748 Financial Reporting (FR)
$ $
Profit before tax 2,530,000
Less income tax expense (1,127,000)
1,403,000
Transfer to reserves (230,000)
Dividends:
Paid preference interim dividend 138,000
Paid ordinary interim divided 414,000
Declared preference final dividend 138,000
(690,000)
Retained 483,000
On 1 January 20X4 the issued share capital of Pilum Co was 4,600,000 6% preference shares of
$1 each and 4,120,000 ordinary shares of $1 each.
Required
Calculate the earnings per share (on basic and diluted basis) in respect of the year ended 31
December 20X4 for each of the following circumstances (each of the three circumstances (1) to (3)
is to be dealt with separately).
(a) On the basis that there was no change in the issued share capital of the company during the
year ended 31 December 20X4.
(b) On the basis that the company made a rights issue of $1 ordinary shares on 1 October 20X4
in the proportion of 1 for every 5 shares held, at a price of $1.20. The market price for the
shares at close of trade on the last day of quotation cum rights was $1.78 per share.
(c) On the basis that Pilum Co made no new issue of shares during the year ended 31 December
20X4 but on that date it had in issue $1,500,000 10% convertible loan stock 20X8 – 20Y1. This
loan stock will be convertible into ordinary $1 shares as follows.
Note. Assume where appropriate that the income tax rate is 30%.
(Total = 10 marks)
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 749
HB2022
750 Financial Reporting (FR)
Other information
(1) Depreciation charged for the three years in question was:
(2) The other interest bearing borrowings are secured by a floating charge over the assets of
Biggerbuys Co. Their repayment is due on 30 June 20Y9.
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 751
The entity offers extended credit terms for certain products to maintain market share in a highly
competitive environment.
Given the steady increase in the level of bank loans which has taken place in recent years, the
entity has recently written to its bankers to request an increase in the lending facility. The request
was received by the bank on 15 October 20X9, two weeks after the financial statements were
published. The bank is concerned at the steep escalation in the level of the loans and has asked
for a report on the financial performance of Biggerbuys Co for the last three years.
Required
As a consultant management accountant employed by the bankers of Biggerbuys Co, prepare a
report to the bank which analyses the financial performance of the company for the period
covered by the financial statements. Your report may take any form you wish, but you are aware
of the particular concern of the bank regarding the rapidly increasing level of lending. Therefore,
it may be appropriate to include aspects of prior performance that could have contributed to the
increase in the level of bank lending.
(Total = 25 marks)
Cole Co Darwin Co
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Sales revenue (note (1)) 3,000 4,400
Opening inventory 450 720
Purchases (note (2)) 2,030 3,080
2,480 3,800
Closing inventory (540) (850)
(1,940) (2,950)
Gross profit 1,060 1,450
Operating expenses (480) (964)
Profit from operations 580 486
Loan note interest (80) –
Overdraft interest – (10)
HB2022
752 Financial Reporting (FR)
Cole Co Darwin Co
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (notes (3)
and (4) 2,340 3,100
Current assets
Inventories 540 850
Trade receivables 522 750
Cash and cash equivalent 20 –
1,082 1,600
Total assets 3,422 4,700
Equity and liabilities
Equity
Equity shares of $1 each 1,000 500
Reserves
Revaluation surplus – 700
Retained earnings – 1 April 20X8 684 1,912
Profit – year to 31 March 20X9 500 476
2,184 3,588
Non-current liabilities
10% Loan note 800 –
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 438 562
Overdraft – 550
438 1,112
Total equity and liabilities 3,422 4,700
Webster bases its preliminary assessment of target companies on certain key ratios. These are
listed below together with the relevant figures for Cole Co and Darwin Co calculated from the
above financial statements:
Cole Co Darwin Co
Return on capital
employed (500 + 80)/(2,184 + 800) (476/3,588)
× 100 19.4 % × 100 13.3 %
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 753
Capital employed is defined as shareholders’ funds plus non-current debt at the year-end; asset
turnover is sales revenues divided by gross assets less current liabilities.
The following additional information has been obtained.
(1) Cole Co is part of the Velox Group. On 1 March 20X9 it was permitted by its holding company
to sell goods at a price of $500,000 to Brander Co, a fellow subsidiary. The sale gave Cole
Co a gross profit margin of 40% instead of its normal gross margin of only 20% on these
types of goods. In addition Brander Co was instructed to pay for the goods immediately.
Cole Co normally allows three months credit.
(2) On 1 January 20X9 Cole Co purchased $275,000 (cost price to Cole Co) of its materials from
Advent Co, another member of the Velox Group. Advent Co was also instructed by the Velox
Group to depart from its normal trading terms, which would have resulted in a charge of
$300,000 to Cole Co for these goods. The Group’s finance director also authorised a four-
month credit period on this sale. Cole Co normally receives two months credit from its
suppliers. Cole Co had sold all of these goods at the year end.
(3) Non-current assets:
Details relating to the two companies’ non-current assets are:
Carrying
Cost/revaluation Depreciation amount
$’000 $’000 $’000
Cole Co: property 3,000 1,860 1,140
plant 6,000 4,800 1,200
2,340
Darwin Co: property 2,000 100 1,900
plant 3,000 1,800 1,200
3,100
The two companies own very similar properties. Darwin Co’s property was revalued to $2,000,000
at the beginning of the current year (ie 1 April 20X8). On this date Cole Co’s property, which is
carried at cost less depreciation, had a carrying amount of $1,200,000. Its current value (on the
same basis as Darwin Co’s property) was also $2,000,000. On this date (1 April 20X8) both
properties had the same remaining life of 20 years.
(4) Darwin Co purchased new plant costing $600,000 in February 20X9. In line with company
policy a full year’s depreciation at 20% per annum has been charged on all plant owned at
year end. The equipment is still being tested and will not come on-stream until next year. The
purchase of the plant was largely financed by an overdraft facility, which resulted in the
interest cost shown in the statement of profit or loss. Both companies depreciate plant over a
five-year life and treat all depreciation as an operating expense.
HB2022
754 Financial Reporting (FR)
(b) Recalculate the key ratios used by Webster Co and, referring to any other relevant points,
comment on how the revised ratios may affect the assessment of the two companies.
(10 marks)
(Total = 20 marks)
$’000
Revenue 70,000
Cost of sales (45,000)
Gross profit 25,000
Operating costs (7,000)
Directors’ salaries (1,000)
Profit before taxation 17,000
Income tax expense (3,000)
Profit for the year 14,000
$’000 $’000
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 32,400
Current assets
Inventories 7,500
Cash and cash equivalents 100
7,600
Total assets 40,000
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
Equity
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 755
From the above financial statements Xpand Co has calculated for Hydan Co the ratios below for
the year ended 30 September 20X4. It has also obtained the equivalent ratios for the retail sector
average which can be taken to represent Hydan Co’s sector.
HB2022
756 Financial Reporting (FR)
20X7 20X6
$m $m
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 4,200 3,700
Current assets
Inventories 1,500 1,600
Trade receivables 2,200 1,800
3,700 3,400
7,900 7,100
Equity
Share capital 1,200 1,200
Retained earnings 2,200 1,900
3,400 3,100
Non-current liabilities
Deferred tax 1,070 850
Lease liabilities 1,300 1,200
2,370 2,050
Current liabilities
Trade payables 1,250 1,090
Current tax 225 205
Lease liabilities 500 450
Bank overdraft 155 205
2,130 1,950
7,900 7,100
$m
Revenue 4,300
Cost of sales (2,000)
Gross profit 2,300
Operating expenses (1,000)
Finance costs (250)
Profit before tax 1,050
Income tax expense (450)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 600
Dividends paid in the year 300
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 757
20X9 20X8
$m $m
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 327 264
Current assets
Inventories 123 176
Trade receivables 95 87
Short term investments 65 30
Cash at bank and in hand 29 –
312 293
639 557
Equity
Share capital – $1 shares 200 120
Share premium 30 –
Revaluation surplus 66 97
Retained earnings 71 41
367 258
Non-current liabilities
10% Debentures 100 150
Current liabilities 172 149
639 557
HB2022
758 Financial Reporting (FR)
$m
Revenue 473
Cost of sales (229)
Gross profit 244
Distribution costs (76)
Administrative expenses (48)
Finance income 6
Finance costs (17)
Profit before tax 109
Income tax expense (47)
Profit for the year 62
Dividends paid in the period 32
(b) Write a memorandum to a director of Elmgrove Co summarising the major benefits a user
receives from a published statement of cash flows. (5 marks)
(Total = 25 marks)
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 759
(b) Give three disadvantages to the use of historical cost accounting in the financial statements.
(3 marks)
(c) Briefly explain the factors that management must consider when choosing a measurement
basis for the assets and liabilities in the financial statements (3 marks)
(Total = 9 marks)
55 Not-for-profit (9 mins)
A new Academy school, Aspiration High School, has been opened in an area of high social
deprivation, replacing a school which was closed as a result of poor academic performance.
Aspiration High School is funded directly by central government and some critics claim that too
much money has been spent on it.
Required
In what ways would you expect the Department of Education to monitor the performance of this
school?
(Total = 5 marks)
Armstrong Co Miller Co
$000 $000
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 392,000 168,000
Investments 240,000 -
Equity
Share capital – $1 shares 210,000 120,000
Revaluation surplus 82,000 8,000
Retained earnings 249,700 73,000
541,700 201,000
Non-current liabilities
HB2022
760 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 761
HB2022
3 The correct answer is: Dividends paid are deducted from retained earnings
They are a distribution, not an expense. They are not shown on the face of the statement of profit
or loss or deducted from other comprehensive income.
$
Original cost – building 200,000
Depreciation X1 – X6 (200,000 × 5/50) (20,000)
180,000
Revaluation 1.1.X6 100,000
280,000
$’000 $’000
Proceeds 1,500
Less carrying amount of goodwill (76)
Less group share of carrying amount of net assets at date of disposal
Share capital 1,000
Retained earnings 460
1,460
Less NCI (1,460 × 20%) (292) (1,168)
Profit on disposal 256
$
Fair value less disposal cost (800,000 – 20,000) 780,000
Value in use 950,000
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 763
$ $
Consideration – cash 300,000
– shares (40,000 × 2.50) 100,000
400,000
Non-controlling interest (20,000 × 1.75) 35,000
435,000
Fair value of net assets:
Share capital 100,000
Retained earnings 85,000
Revaluation surplus 100,000
Fair value adjustments 60,000
(345,000)
90,000
$
Frog Co 280,000
Tadpole Co (190,000 × 9/12) 142,500
Intragroup (40,000)
382,500
$
Cost of investment 700,000
Share of post-acquisition retained earnings 195,000
Unrealised profit in inventory (200,000 × 25/125 × 50% × 30%) (6,000)
889,000
HB2022
764 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Revenue recognised ($2.5 million × 40%) 1,000,000
Amounts invoiced (300,000)
Contract asset 700,000
$
Depreciation (1.2m / 5) 240,000
Unwinding of discount (1.2m × 1.08) × 8% 103,680
343,680
TERP
4 × 1.8 7.2
1 × 1.2 1.2
8.4 / 5 = 1.68
Shares
200,000 × 1.8/1.68 × 3/12 53,571
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 765
18 The correct answer is: It matches related items in accordance with the accruals concept
Cash flow accounting does not apply the accruals concept. It deals with items at the point when
they are received or paid.
$ $
Consideration received 200,000
Net assets (100,000 + 140,000) 240,000
Goodwill (50,000 × 60%) 30,000
Less NCI (58,000)
(212,000)
Loss on disposal (12,000)
HB2022
766 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Initial measurement of liability 25,274
Interest 6% 1,516
Paid 30 June 20X6 (6,000)
Balance 30 June 20X6 20,790
Interest 6% 1,247
Paid 30 June 20X7 (6,000)
Liability due after one year 16,037
(c) The correct answer is: Recognise proportion relating to right-of-use transferred
(d) The correct answer is: $50,660
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 767
$ $
Original cost 1.1.X0 1,000,000
Depreciation to 31.12.X6 (1,000,000 × 7/50) (140,000)
860,000
Depreciation to 30.6.X7 ((1,000,000/50) × 6/12) (10,000) 10,000
850,000
Revaluation surplus 100,000
950,000
Depreciation to 31.12.X7 (950,000 × 0.5/42.5) (11,176) 11,176
Total depreciation year to 31.12.X7 21,176
(b) The correct answer is: Deferred tax on the surplus of $100,000 should be charged to the
revaluation surplus.
As the revaluation surplus goes directly to equity, the same treatment is applied to the
deferred tax.
(c) The correct answer is: Higher of fair value less costs of disposal and value in use
(d) The correct answer is: $114,000
The goodwill and the damaged machine are written off in full and the balance is allocated
between the building and the rest of the plant and machinery.
(e) The correct answer is: $2,221 gain
HB2022
768 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 769
HB2022
770 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 771
$
Revenue 1,526,750
Cost of sales (W3) (1,048,000)
Gross profit 478,750
Distribution costs (W4) (124,300)
Administrative expenses (W5) (216,200)
Finance costs (W6) (18,400)
Profit before tax 119,850
Income tax expense (40,000)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 79,850
HB2022
772 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (W7) 452,250
Intangible assets 215,500
667,750
Current assets
Inventories (W8) 425,750
Trade receivables (W9) 171,880
Cash and cash equivalents 5,120
602,750
Total assets 1,270,500
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
Equity
Share capital 300,000
Share premium 100,000
Retained earnings (283,500 + 79,850) 363,350
Other equity 50,000
Revaluation surplus 50,000
863,350
Non-current liabilities
10% debentures 100,000
8.4% cumulative redeemable preference shares* 100,000
200,000
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables (W10) 115,900
Short-term borrowings 51,250
Current tax payable 40,000
207,150
Total equity and liabilities 1,270,500
Workings
1 Depreciation
$
Cost of sales: 8% × 150,000 12,000
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 773
2 Depreciation of building
$75,000 × 2% = 1,500
3 Cost of sales
$
Opening inventories (108,400 + 32,750 + 184,500) 325,650
Purchases 750,600
Carriage inwards 10,500
Manufacturing wages 250,000
Manufacturing overheads 125,000
Depreciation of plant (W1) 12,000
Closing inventories (W9) (425,750)
1,048,000
4 Distribution costs
$
Per question 116,800
Depreciation (W1) 7,500
124,300
5 Administrative expenses
$ $
Per question 158,100
Legal expenses 54,100
Less: solicitors’ fees capitalised (5,000)
49,100
Depreciation (W1) 7,500
Depreciation of building (W2) 1,500
216,200
6 Finance costs
$
Interest expense on loan notes ($100,000 × 10%) 10,000
Dividend on redeemable preference shares ($100,000 × 8.4%) 8,400
18,400
HB2022
774 Financial Reporting (FR)
Carrying amount
31 May 20X8 255,000 58,500 69,500 29,250 40,000 452,250
8 Inventories
$
Raw materials 112,600
Work in progress 37,800
Finished goods 275,350
425,750
9 Trade receivables
$
Trade receivables (177,630 – 5,750 irrecoverable debts allowance) 171,880
$
Trade payables 97,500
Loan interest payable 10,000
Preference dividend payable 8,400
115,900
Tutorial note. Redeemable preference shares are presented under IAS 32 Financial Instruments:
Presentation as a loan payable, and dividends on them as interest payable. This point is
covered in Chapter 12.
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 775
Workings
1 Loss on investment property
(160 – 110) = (50)
2 Calculation of profit realised on sale of revalued asset
$
Revaluation recognised in past 50,000
Less: amounts transferred to retained earnings:
(80,000/10 – 30,000/10) × 3 (15,000)
35,000
HB2022
776 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (W1) 187,500
Intangible assets (W2) 6,691,000
$
Depreciation (W1) 12,500
Amortisation (W2) 1,309,000
Staff salaries 400,000
Workings
1 Computer equipment
$
Computer equipment
Cost 200,000
Depreciation (200 × 3/48) (12,500)
Carrying amount 187,500
2 Intangible assets
Development
Patent costs Customer list Total
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Cost 1,500 6,000 500 8,000
Amortisation:
$1.5m × (6/36) (250) – (250)
$5m × (6/36) (1,000) (1,000)
$500,000 × (4/34) – – (59) (59)
1,250 5,000 441 6,691
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 777
Workings
1 First impairment loss
$500,000 relates directly to an engine and its recoverable amount can be assessed directly (ie
zero) and it is no longer part of the cash-generating unit.
IAS 36 then requires goodwill to be written off. Any further impairment must be written off the
remaining assets pro rata, except the engine which must not be reduced below its net selling
price of $500,000.
2 Second impairment loss
The first $100,000 of the impairment loss is applied to the operating licence to write it down to
net selling price.
The remainder is applied pro rata to assets carried at other than their net selling prices, ie
$50,000 to both the property and the rail track and coaches.
STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS AND OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR ENDED
31 DECEMBER 20X2
$m
Revenue 2,648
Cost of sales (W1) (1,765)
Gross profit 883
Distribution costs (W1) (514)
Administrative expenses (W1) (360)
Finance costs (150 × 4%) (6)
Fair value gain on investment properties (588 – 548) 40
Rental income 48
Profit before tax 91
Income tax expense (Note 6) (45 – 17) (28)
PROFIT FOR THE YEAR 63
Other comprehensive income:
Gain on property revaluation (W2) 55
Income tax relating to gain on property revaluation (17)
Other comprehensive income, net of tax 38
TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME FOR THE YEAR 101
HB2022
778 Financial Reporting (FR)
$m
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (W2) 852
Investment properties (Note 9) 588
1,440
Current assets
Inventories (388 – (21 – 14)) 381
Trade receivables 541
Cash and cash equivalents 32
954
2,394
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES
Equity
Share capital 125
Share premium 244
Retained earnings 810
Other components of equity 545
Revaluation surplus ((W2) 55 – 17) 38
1,762
Non-current liabilities
4% loan notes 20X8 150
Deferred tax 17
Current liabilities
Trade payables 434
Income tax payable (Note 6) 28
Interest payable ((4% × 150) – 3) 3
465
2,394
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 779
Other
Share Share Retained comps Reval
capital premium earnings of equity surplus Total
$m $m $m $m $m $m
Balance at 1 January 20X2 100 244 753 570 – 1,667
Changes in equity for 20X2
Issue of share capital (W4) 25 (25) –
Dividends (W5) (6) (6)
Total comprehensive
income
for the year - - 63 - 38 101
Balance at 31 December
20X2 125 244 810 545 38 1,762
Workings
1 Expenses
Plant &
Land Buildings equipment Total
$m $m $m $m
Cost 90 750 258
Accumulated depreciation b/d – (120) (126)
Carrying amount b/d at 1 January 20X2 90 630 132
Disposal of equipment (15 – 3) - - (12)
90 630 120
Depreciation during year
Buildings ($750m / 50 years) (15)
Plant & equipment ($120m × 20%) (24)
HB2022
780 Financial Reporting (FR)
$m
Carrying amount 22
Recoverable amount (Value in use: (3.8m × 3.993) + (4.2m × 0.677)) (18)
(4)
Recoverable amount is the higher of value in use ($18m) and fair value less costs of disposal
($16m).
4 Bonus issue
Dr Other components of equity ($100m /$0.50 × 1/4 = 50m shares × $0.50) $25m
Cr Share capital $25m
5 Dividends (proof)
$m
Interim ($100m /$0.50 = 200m shares × $0.03) 6 per trial balance
The final dividend has not been paid and is not a liability of the company at the year end.
$m
Non-current assets
Property, plant & equipment (2,848 + 354 + (W4) 18) 3,220
Patents 45
Goodwill (W1 26
3,291
Current assets
Inventories (895 + 225) 1,120
Trade and other receivables (1,348 + 251) 1,599
Cash and cash equivalents (212 + 34) 246
2,965
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 781
Workings
1 Goodwill
$m $m
Consideration transferred (250m × 60% × $1.06) 159
Non-controlling interests at fair value 86
Net assets at acquisition as represented by:
Share capital 50
Retained earnings 115
Fair value adjustments (W4) 34
(199)
Goodwill at acquisition 46
Impairment losses to date (20)
Goodwill at year end 26
2 Retained earnings
Barcelona Madrid
$m $m
Per question 2,861 440
Pre-acquisition (115)
Movement on fair value adjustment (W4) (16)
309
Group share of post-acquisition retained earnings:
Madrid Co (309 × 60%) 185
HB2022
782 Financial Reporting (FR)
3 Non-controlling interests
$m
NCI at acquisition (W1 86
NCI share of post-acquisition:
Retained earnings ((W2) 309 × 40%) 124
Goodwill impairment (20 × 40%) (8)
202
*20 / 10 years × 4
$’000
Non-current assets
Land and buildings 3,350
Plant and equipment (1,010 + 2,210) 3,220
Motor vehicles (510 + 345) 855
Goodwill (W1) 826
8,251
Current assets
Inventories (890 + 352 – (W4) 7.2) 1,234.8
Trade receivables (1,372 + 514 – 39 – (W5) 36) 1,811
Cash and cash equivalents (89 + 39 + 51) 179
3,224.8
11,475.8
Equity attributable to owners of the parent
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 783
Workings
1 Goodwill
$’000 $’000
Consideration transferred 2,000
Non-controlling interests (at ‘full’ FV) (125k shares × $4.40) 550
Net assets at acquisition as represented by:
Share capital 500
Retained earnings 1,044
(1,544)
1,006
Impairment losses to date (180)
826
Reprise Co Encore Co
$’000 $’000
Per question 4,225 2,610
PUP (W4) (7.2)
Pre-acquisition retained earnings (1,044)
1,566
Group share of post-acquisition retained earnings:
Encore Co (1,566 × 75%) 1,174.5
Group share of impairment losses (180 × 75%) (135)
5,257.3
HB2022
784 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000
NCI at acquisition (W1) 550
NCI share of post-acquisition retained earnings ((W3) 1,566 × 25%) 391.5
NCI share of impairment losses (180 × 25%) (45)
896.5
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS FOR THE YEAR ENDED 30 JUNE 20X8
$
Revenue (403,400 + 193,000 – 40,000) 556,400
Cost of sales (201,400 + 92,600 – 40,000 + 4,000) (258,000)
Gross profit 298,400
Distribution costs (16,000 + 14,600) (30,600)
Administrative expenses (24,250 + 17,800) (42,050)
Profit before tax 225,750
Income tax expense (61,750 + 22,000) (83,750)
Profit for the year 142,000
Profit attributable to:
Owners of the parent 125,200
Non-controlling interests (W2) 16,800
142,000
Retained
earnings
$
Balance at 1 July 20X7 (W2) 190,000
Dividends (40,000)
Profit for the year 125,200
Balance at 30 June 20X8 (W3) 275,200
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 785
$
Rusholme – profit for the year 46,000
Less PUP (40,000 × ½ × 25/125) 4,000
42,000
Non-controlling interest share 40% 16,800
Fallowfield Co Rusholme Co
$ $
Per question 163,000 61,000
Pre-acquisition retained earnings (16,000)
45,000
Group share of post-acquisition retained earnings:
Rusholme Co (45,000 × 60%) 27,000
190,000
Fallowfield Co Rusholme Co
$ $
Per question 238,000 82,000
PUP – (4,000)
Pre-acquisition retained earnings (16,000)
62,000
Group share of post-acquisition retained earnings:
Rusholme Co (62,000 × 60%) 37,200
275,200
$’000
Revenue (22,800 + (4,300 × 6/12) – (640 × 6/12)) 24,630
Cost of sales (13,600 + (2,600 × 6/12) – (640 × 6/12) + (W2) 10 + (W4) 5) (14,595)
Gross profit 10,035
Distribution costs (2,900 + (500 × 6/12)) (3,150)
Administrative expenses (1,800 + (300 × 6/12)) (1,950)
HB2022
786 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000
Reserves
Balance at 1 January 20X4 (Panther only) 12,750
Dividend paid (900)
Total comprehensive income for the year 4,878
Balance at 31 December 20X4 (W6) 16,728
Workings
1 Non-controlling interests
PFY TCI
$’000 $’000
Profit/TCI for the year (610 × 6/12) / (790 × 6/12) 305 395
Less PUP (W2) (10) (10)
Add back intragroup interest (W3) 20 20
Additional depreciation on fair value adjustment (W4) (5) (5)
310 400
NCI share (× 40%) 124 160
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 787
Sabre
Panther Co Co
$’000 $’000
Reserves per question 16,500 3,270
PUP (W2) (10)
Fair value movement (W) (5)
Pre-acquisition reserves [2,480 + ((610 + 180) × 6/12)] (2,875)
380
Group share of post-acquisition reserves:
Sabre Co (380 × 60%) 228
16,728
$’000
Non-current assets
Property, plant & equipment (370 + 190 + (W6) 45) 605
Goodwill (W1) 8
Investment in associate (W2) 165
778
Current assets
Inventories (160 + 100 – (W5) 1.5) 258.5
Trade receivables (170 + 90) 260
Cash and cash equivalents (50 + 40) 90
608.5
HB2022
788 Financial Reporting (FR)
Workings
1 Goodwill on consolidation – Spiro Co
$’000 $’000
Consideration transferred 128
Non-controlling interests (at ‘full’ fair value) 90
Net assets at acquisition:
Share capital 80
Retained earnings 20
Share premium 80
Fair value adjustments (W6) 30
(210)
Goodwill arising on consolidation 8
2 Investment in associate
$’000
Cost of associate 90
Share of post-acquisition retained reserves (W3) 75
165
3 Retained earnings
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 789
$’000
Spiro Co (195 × 60%) 117
Aldridge Co (250 × 30%) 75
Less group share of impairment losses to date (0)
Less impairment losses on associate to date (0)
758.5
4 Non-controlling interests
$’000
NCI at acquisition (W1) 90
NCI share of post-acquisition ret’d earnings ((W4) 195 × 40%) 78
168
(a) $m $m
(a) (a) (a)
Consideration transferred
(a) (a) (a)
318
(a) (a) (a)
Non-controlling interest 74
(a) (a) (a)
Ordinary shares 80
HB2022
790 Financial Reporting (FR)
(a) $m $m
(a) (a) (a)
Share premium 40
(a) (a) (a)
(296)
(a) (a) (a)
96
(a) (a) (a)
$m
NCI at acquisition (per question) 74
NCI share of post-acquisition retained earnings ((W3) 48 × 25%) 12
NCI share of post-acquisition revaluation surplus ((W3) 4 × 25%) 1
NCI share of goodwill impairment (22 × 25%) (6)
81
Revaluation surplus
$m
Parent’s own revaluation surplus 45
Group share of Samson Co’s post acquisition revaluation ($4m ×
75%) 3
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 791
Highveldt Co Samson Co
$m $m
Per question 350 76
Accrued interest from Samson Co ($60m × 10%) 6 –
Additional contingent consideration (116 – 108) (8) –
Amortisation of brand ($40m / 10 years) – (4)
Write off development expenditure as incurred ($50m –
$18m) – (32)
Write back amortisation of development expenditure – 10
Unrealised profit – (2)
348 48
Group share (75%) 36
Impairment of goodwill in Samson Co – group share
(22 × 75%) (16)
368
Working
Fair value adjustment
$m $m
Fair value adjustment:
Revaluation of land and buildings 20
Recognition of fair value of brands 40
Derecognition of capitalised development expenditure (18)
42
HB2022
792 Financial Reporting (FR)
Cost less
2½% trade discount NRV Valuation
$ $ $
Product Arctic 3,510.00 5,100.00 3,510.00
Product Brassy 2,827.50 2,800.00 2,800.00
Product Chilly 4,095.00 4,100.00 4,095.00
10,405.00
(b) The weighted average method values items withdrawn from inventory at the average price of
all goods held in inventory at the time. Thus, it smooths out any fluctuations due to rising or
falling prices.
The FIFO method of inventory valuation assumes that items sold are the oldest ones received
from suppliers. Thus, any goods held at the year end will be assumed to have been
purchased recently. Thus, changing from weighted average to FIFO (assuming inventory
purchase prices are rising over time) is likely to increase the value of closing inventory (from
historical to current price levels). This would reduce the cost of sales figure in profit or loss and
increase the reported profit figure.
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 793
(d) Consumable biological assets are those that are to be harvested as agricultural produce or
sold as biological assets. Examples include livestock intended for the production of meat,
livestock held for sale, fish in farms, crops such as maize and wheat and trees being grown
for lumber.
Bearer biological assets are those other than consumable biological assets. Examples include
livestock from which milk is produced or livestock held for breeding, vines, fruit trees and trees
from which firewood is harvested without felling.
Plant-based bearer biological assets are accounted for under IAS 16. These are assets which
are not in themselves consumed, but are used solely to grow produce over several periods.
This would apply to grape vines, tea bushes and fruit trees from the list above.
$m
Non-current assets
Quarry structures and access roads at cost
Construction cost 70.000
Provision for dismantling and restoration costs ($20m × 0.377) 7.540
77.540
$m
Provision for dismantling and restoration costs b/d 7.540
HB2022
794 Financial Reporting (FR)
Provision for dismantling and restoration costs c/d at 31 December 20X4 7.917
$m
Depreciation 3.877
Any change in the expected present value of the provision would be made as an adjustment
to the provision and to the asset value (affecting future depreciation charges).
$
Issue costs 120,000
Interest $6,000,000 × 3.5% × 7 1,470,000
Premium on redemption 1,100,000
Total finance cost 2,690,000
(b) The premium on redemption of the loan notes represents a finance cost. The effective rate of
interest must be applied so that the debt is measured at amortised cost (IFRS 9: para. 4.2.1).
At the time of issue, the loan notes are recognised at their net proceeds of $599,800 (600,000
– 200).
The finance cost for the year ended 31 December 20X4 is calculated as follows.
$
1.1.20X3 Proceeds of issue (600,000 – 200) 599,800
Interest at 12% 71,976
Balance 31.12.20X3 671,776
Interest at 12% 80,613
Balance at 31.12.20X4 752,389
$
Present value of principal $500,000 × 0.747 373,500
Present value of interest $25,000 × 4.212 105,300
Liability value 478,800
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 795
Tutorial note. The method to use here is to find the present value of the principal value of
the bond, $500,000 (10,000 × $50) and the interest payments of $25,000 annually (5% ×
$500,000) at the market rate for non-convertible bonds of 6%, using the discount factors.
The difference between this total and the principal amount of $500,000 is the equity
element.
(a) Creative accounting, the manipulation of figures for a desired result, takes many forms. Off-
balance sheet finance is a major type of creative accounting and it probably has the most
serious implications.
It is very rare for a company, its directors or employees to manipulate results for the purpose
of fraud. The major consideration is usually the effect the results will have on the share price
of the company. If the share price falls, the company becomes vulnerable to takeover.
Analysts, brokers and economists, whose opinions affect the stock markets, are often
perceived as having an outlook which is both short-term and superficial. Consequently,
companies will attempt to produce the results the market expects or wants. The companies
will aim for steady progress in a few key numbers and ratios and they will aim to meet the
market’s stated expectation.
The number of methods available for creative accounting and the determination and
imagination of those who wish to perpetrate such acts are endless. It has been seen in the
past that, wherever an accounting standard or law closes a loophole, another one is found.
This has produced a change of approach in regulators and standard setters, towards general
principles rather than detailed rules.
Here are a few examples of creative accounting.
(1) Income recognition and cut-off
Manipulation of cut-off is relatively straightforward. For instance, a company may delay
invoicing in order to move revenue into the following year.
(2) Revaluations
The optional nature of the revaluation of non-current assets leaves such practices open
to manipulation. The choice of whether to revalue can have a significant impact on a
company’s statement of financial position.
(3) Window dressing
This is where transactions are passed through the books at the year end to make figures
look better, but in fact they have not taken place and are often reversed after the year
end. An example is where cheques are written to creditors, entered in the cash book, but
not sent out until well after the year end.
(4) Change of accounting policies
This tends to be a last resort because companies which change accounting policies know
they will not be able to do so again for some time. The effect in the year of change can
be substantial and prime candidates for such treatment are depreciation, inventory
valuation, changes from current cost to historical cost (practised frequently by privatised
public utilities) and foreign currency losses.
HB2022
796 Financial Reporting (FR)
(c) (i) The Finance Director may be right in believing that renewing the non-current assets of
the company will contribute to generating higher earnings and hence improved earnings
per share. However, this will not happen immediately as the assets will need to have been
in operation for at least a year for results to be apparent. Earnings will be higher
because of the loan being at a commercially unrealistic rate, namely 5% instead of 9%.
As regards gearing, the Finance Director may well wish to classify the convertible loan
stock as equity rather than debt; thus gearing will be lower. He may argue that because
the loan is very likely to be converted into shares, the finance should be treated as equity
rather than as debt.
(ii) IAS 33 Earnings per Share requires the calculation of basic earnings per share (para. 9).
The Finance Director believes that the convertible loan he is proposing will not affect EPS
and that an interest cost of 5% will not impact heavily on gearing.
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 797
Tutorial note. Understanding how IFRS Standards are linked to the Conceptual Framework
is an important skill that will be developed further in Strategic Business Reporting.
HB2022
798 Financial Reporting (FR)
Notes.
(1) Contract asset / liability
Treatment of contracts in the statement of profit or loss of Trontacc Co for the year ended
30 September 20X7:
Contract
Aspire Bigga Construct Total
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
(W1) (W2) (W3)
Revenue 600 500 350 1,450
Expenses (500) (500) (320) (1,320)
Gross profit 100 30 130
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 799
Working
Cost of sales
$’000
Opening inventory 12,400
Purchases 147,200
159,600
Closing inventory (W4) (16,680)
142,920
Depreciation of building and plant (W3) 12,250
155,170
(b) TELENORTH CO
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION AS AT 30 SEPTEMBER 20X1
$’000 $’000
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment (W3) 83,440
Investments 34,500
117,940
Current assets
Inventories (W4) 16,680
Trade receivables 35,700
52,380
Total assets 170,320
Equity and liabilities
Equity
Ordinary shares of $1 each (W7) 30,000
HB2022
800 Financial Reporting (FR)
Workings
1 Administrative expenses
$’000
Per question 34,440
Depreciation of computer system (W3) 10,160
44,600
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 801
$’000
Balance as at 4 October 20X1 16,000
Normal sales at cost: $1.4m × 100/140 1,000
Sale or return at cost: 650,000 × 100/130 500
Less goods received at cost (820)
Adjusted inventory value 16,680
4 Current liabilities
$’000
Trade and other payables
Per question 17,770
Interest on loan note 300
18,070
5 Dividend payable
$’000
Preference: ($12m × 8%) – 480 480
Dr Cr
$’000 $’000
Suspense account (per trial balance) 26,000
Directors’ options: share capital (4m at $1) 4,000
share premium (4m at $1) 4,000
Rights issue: share capital
20m + 4m
4 6,000
Share premium 6m × (3 – 1) 12,000
26,000 26,000
$’000
As at 1 October 20X0 14,160
Net profit for the year (Part (a)) 36,730
HB2022
802 Financial Reporting (FR)
8 Income tax
$’000 $’000
Provision for year 23,400
Increase in deferred tax provision 2,200
Less charged to revaluation surplus (1,000)
1,200
24,600
9 Finance costs
$’000
8% Preference shares 960
6% Loan notes 600
1,560
(c) TELENORTH CO
EARNINGS PER SHARE FOR THE YEAR TO 30 SEPTEMBER 20X1
Bonus Weighted
Date Narrative Shares Time fraction average
‘000
1.10.X0 Share b/f 20,000
1.10.X0 Options exercised 4,000
24,000 9/12 4/3.80 (W) 18,947
1.7.X1 Rights issue (1/4) 6,000
30,000 3/12 7,500
26,447
Working
Calculation of theoretical ex rights price
$
4 shares @ $4 16
1 share @ $3 3
19
19
= $3.80
5
Bonus fraction =
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 803
36,730
= $1.39
26,447
Depreciation on the Right of Use asset will be calculated as $54,000 – $4,000/4 years = $12,500
per annum. The depreciation is calculated over 4 years (useful life) not 3 years (lease term)
because the company obtains ownership of the asset at the end of the lease term.
STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION AT 31 DECEMBER (EXTRACTS)
*(24,000 – 8,063)
Working
$
Lease
Original measurement of right-of-use asset 54,000
Deposit (9,000)
Balance 1.1.20X1 (lease liability) 45,000
Interest 25% 11,250
Payment 31.12.20X1 (24,000)
Balance 31.12.20X1 32,250
Interest 25% 8,063
HB2022
804 Financial Reporting (FR)
Workings
1 Carrying amount of right-of-use asset
$
PVFLP 66,404
Non-refundable deposit paid on 1 January 20X3 17,596
84,000
Depreciation of asset: $84,000 / 5 years useful life (16,800)
Carrying amount at year end ($84,000 – $16,800) 67,200
The asset is depreciated over the shorter of its useful life (five years) and lease term (six years).
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 805
$
1.1.X3 PVFLP 66,404
Interest at 12% ($66,404 ×
1.1.X3 – 31.12.X3 12%) 7,968
The interest element ($7,968) of the current liability can also be shown separately as interest
payable.
20X6
$’000
Accelerated tax depreciation (W1) 186
Revaluation (W2)* 252
438
*The deferred tax on the revaluation gain will be charged to the revaluation surplus as IAS 12
requires deferred tax on gains recognised in other comprehensive income to be charged or
credited to other comprehensive income.
Workings
1 Tax depreciation
$’000 $’000
At 30 September 20X6:
Carrying amount 1,185
Tax base:
At 1 October 20X5 405
Expenditure in year 290
695
Less tax depreciation (25%) (174)
(521)
Cumulative temporary difference 664
@ 28% = 186
2 Revaluation surplus
Temporary difference ($1,500,000 – $600,000) @ 28% = $252,000
HB2022
806 Financial Reporting (FR)
$
Profit before tax 2,530,000
Less income tax expense (1,127,000)
Profit for the year 1,403,000
Less preference dividends (276,000)
Earnings 1,127,000
Earnings per share = 1,127,000 / 4,120,000
(b) The first step is to calculate the theoretical ex-rights price. Consider the holder of 5 shares.
No. $
Before rights issue 5 8.90
Rights issue 1 1.20
After rights issue 6 10.10
EPS =
$1,127,000
4,509,929
=$0.25
(c) The maximum number of shares into which the loan stock could be converted is 90% ×
1,500,000 = 1,350,000. The calculation of diluted EPS should be based on the assumption
that such a conversion actually took place on 1 January 20X4. Shares in issue during the
year would then have numbered (4,120,000 + 1,350,000) = 5,470,000 and revised earnings
would be:
$ $
Earnings from (1) above 1,127,000
Interest saved by conversion (1,500,000 × 10%) 150,000
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 807
Introduction
In accordance with your instructions, I set out below a review of the entity’s financial performance
over the last three years.
The main focus of this report is on the reasons for the increase in the level of bank loans.
Appropriate accounting ratios are included in the attached appendix.
Bank lending
The main reason for the steep increase in bank lending is due to the entity not generating
sufficient cash from its operating activities over the past three years.
For the year ended 30 June 20X8, the entity had a net cash deficiency on operating activities of
$18 million.
In addition, for at least the past two years, the cash generated from operating activities has not
been sufficient to cover interest payable. Therefore, those payments, together with tax and
dividends, have had to be covered by borrowings.
As at 30 June 20X9, bank borrowings were $610 million out of a total facility of $630 million.
Payment of the proposed dividends alone would increase the borrowings to the limit.
Operating review
Although revenue has been rising steadily over the period, operating profit has remained almost
static.
Over this period the profit margin has risen, but not as much as would be expected. The cost of
sales have risen in almost the same proportion as sales. This may be due to increased costs of raw
materials, as inventories have risen steeply; but the turnover of inventory has been falling or static
over the same period.
There has also been a large increase in trade receivables. Both the increase in inventories and
trade receivables have had to be financed out of operating activities leading to the present
pressure on borrowings.
Although the number of days sales in trade receivables has fallen steadily over the period, the
trade receivables at the end of June 20X9 still represent nearly a year’s credit sales. This is
excessive and seems to imply a poor credit control policy, even taking into account the extended
credit terms being granted by the company.
Recommendations
The entity needs to undertake an urgent review of its credit terms in order to reduce the levels of
trade receivables.
HB2022
808 Financial Reporting (FR)
120/(382+720) 140/(372+930)
95/(372+520)× ×100 = ×100 =
ROCE 100 = 10.6% 10.9% 10.7%
Interest cover 95/25 = 3.8 120/60 = 2.0 = 1.3
520/892 =
Gearing 58.3% = 65.3% = 71.4%
1,850/892= 2.1 2,200/1,102=
Asset turnover times 2.0 times = 1.9 times
Cole Co Darwin Co
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Revenue (3,000 – 125) (Note 1) 2,875 4,400
Opening inventory 450 720
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 809
Cole Co Darwin Co
$’000 $’000 $’000 $’000
Assets
Non-current assets
Property, plant, equipment (W1) 3,100 2,620
Current assets
Inventories 540 850
Trade receivables (W2) 897 750
Cash and cash equivalents
(W3) – 60
1,437 1,660
4,537 4,280
Equity and liabilities
Equity shares ($1) 1,000 500
Revaluation surplus (800 – 40) 760 700
Retained earnings to 31 March
20X9
(684 + 295 + 40) / (1,912 + 606) 1,019 2,518
2,779 3,718
Non current liabilities
10% loan note 800 –
Current liabilities
Trade payables (W4) 163 562
Overdraft (W3) 795 –
4,537 4,280
HB2022
810 Financial Reporting (FR)
Carrying
Cost/valuation Depreciation amount
$’000 $’000 $’000
Cole Co: property 2,000 100 1,900
plant 6,000 4,800 1,200
3,100
2 Trade receivables
Cole Co: 522 + 375 (note (1)) = 897
3 Cash and cash equivalents
Cole Co Darwin Co
$’000 $’000
As stated 20 (550)
Reversal of sale (Tutorial note (1)) (500)
Payment for purchases (Tutorial note (2)) (300)
Payment for plant (Tutorial note (3)) 600
Payment/saving of interest to statement of financial
position 15 10
(795) 60
4 Trade payables
Cole Co 438 – 275 (note (2)) = 163
(1) Sale to Brander Co is at gross margin 40%, therefore the cost of sale is $500 × 60% =
$300.
Had a normal margin of 20% applied, the cost of this sale would represent 80% of the
selling price. The normal selling price would be $300/0.80 = $375
Sales and receivables would reduce by $125 and the proceeds of $500 would not
have been received.
(2) Purchase of goods from Advent Co on normal terms would have increased purchases
by $25. Using the normal credit period would mean these goods would have been
paid for by the year end, increasing the overdraft and reducing trade payables.
(3) The plant bought in February 20X9 has not yet generated income for Darwin Co, so it
is sensible to ignore it in the acquisition comparison.
The effects are:
- Cost of plant – $600, overdraft affected
- Depreciation reduced $600 × 20% = $120
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 811
Cole Co Darwin Co
$’000 $’000
As stated for property (60)
Depreciation on
revaluation 100
Reduction (above) (120)
40 increase (120) (decrease)
(b) Recalculations
Using the unadjusted figures, Cole Co would be preferred, as its key ratios given are better
than those of Darwin Co. Cole Co achieves better profitability due to greater unit margins.
Both companies have poor asset turnover implying under-utilisation or inefficient methods.
Both companies manage working capital in a similar fashion. Webster Co should examine
liquidity ratios:
Cole Co: 1,082/438 = 2.5
Darwin Co: 1,600/1,112 = 1.4
The acid test ratio of Cole Co is 1.23 whereas Darwin Co’s is 0.67.
Using the adjusted accounts, the above position is reversed showing Darwin Co to be more
profitable and to manage its assets more efficiently. Cole Co’s true liquidity position is not so
healthy – Cole Co controls receivables poorly and appears to pay suppliers earlier.
Darwin Co’s poor liquidity position is probably due to financing non-current assets from its
overdraft. Alternative refinancing would be beneficial.
Cole Co’s parent company has produced an initially favourable set of ratios by creating
favourable payment terms and trading conditions, and Darwin Co’s original ratios were
distorted by revaluations and the timing of new plant purchases.
Other factors to consider include:
(1) The asking price
(2) The future prospects, profits and cash flow forecasts
(3) The state of forward order books
(4) The quality of the management and labour force
(5) Other possible acquisitions
HB2022
812 Financial Reporting (FR)
$’000
Revenue 70,000
Cost of sales (45,000/0.9 (1)) (50,000)
Gross profit 20,000
Operating costs (7,000)
Directors salaries (2) (2,500)
Loan interest (10% × 10,000 (3)) (1,000)
Profit before tax 9,500
Income tax expense (3,000)
Profit for the year 6,500
The adjusted ratios, based on the statement of profit or loss as above, the equity of $30m
and the replacement of the directors’ loan accounts by a commercial loan are as follows:
(b) The ratios based on the original summarised financial statements of Hydan Co show a very
healthy picture, well above the sector average. Hydan Co has high gross and net profit
margins and an impressive net asset turnover, giving a return on equity of more than twice
the sector average. On the face of it, Hydan Co is trading very profitably and efficiently,
keeping costs well under control.
However, when the financial statements are adjusted to show the likely picture post-
acquisition, it becomes clear that Hydan Co has been to quite a large degree cushioned by
the family and by the other family-owned companies. Removing the 10% discount Hydan
enjoys on its purchases reduces the gross profit margin from 35.7% to 28.6%, slightly under
the sector average.
If Xpand Co purchases Hydan Co, it will need to appoint a new board of directors and
replace the directors’ loan accounts with a commercial loan. Both of these expenses have up
to now been subsidised by the family.
Adjusting further for the increased directors’ remuneration and interest on the loan takes the
net profit margin down from 20% to 9.3%, significantly below the sector average of 12%. The
value of equity would not change significantly as a result of the acquisition, as the increase
to $30m is compensated for by the reclassification of the loan as debt. The fall in the return
on equity from 47.1% to 21.7% is therefore driven by the fall in net profit. However, it is worth
noting that 21.7% return on equity is not much below the sector average of 22%.
Xpand Co should take the view that if it acquires Hydan Co it will be acquiring a business
that is performing slightly below the average for its sector. The impressive profitability
pictured in the summarised financial statements is obviously not going to survive the
acquisition. But Hydan Co will still be trading quite profitably and it could be that there are
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 813
Tutorial note. This is a recent question and looks at the financial statements from the
viewpoint of an acquirer. There are 6 marks for the adjustments and ratios and 9 for the
analysis.
$m $m
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before taxation 1,050
Adjustments for:
Depreciation 970
Interest expense 250
2,270
Decrease in inventories (W4) 100
Increase in trade receivables (W4) (400)
Increase in trade payables (W4) 160
Cash generated from operations 2,130
Interest paid (250)
Income taxes paid (W3) (210)
Net cash from operating activities 1,670
Cash flow from investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment (W1) (870)
Cash flows from financing activities
Payment of lease liabilities (W3) (450)
Dividends paid (300)
Net cash used in financing activities (750)
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 50
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year (205)
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year (155)
Workings
1 Assets – Property, plant and equipment
$’000
B/d 3,700
Depreciation (970)
Right-of-use assets 600
Acquired for cash (β) 870
HB2022
814 Financial Reporting (FR)
2 Equity
3 Liabilities
Lease Taxation
$m $m
B/d – (1,200 + 450) / (850 + 205) 1,650 1,055
Addition 600
Charge for year 450
Cash paid (β) (450) (210)
C/d – (500 + 1,300) / (225 + 1,070) 1,800 1,295
$m
$m
Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before taxation 109
Adjustments for
Loss on disposal 6
Depreciation 43
Interest income (6)
Interest expense 17
169
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 815
Workings
1 Assets – Property, plant and equipment
$m
B/d 264
Depreciation (43)
Disposal (28)
Revaluation surplus (31)
Cash additions (β) 165
C/d 327
2 Equity
HB2022
816 Financial Reporting (FR)
IAS 7 requires that investing and financing activities that do not require the use of cash,
such as converting debt to equity, should be excluded from the statement of cash flows.
3 Liabilities
(b) REPORT
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 817
55 Not-for-profit (9 mins)
There are two main areas in which the Department would be expected to monitor the performance
of the school.
Although the school is a not-for-profit organisation, it still has to account for the funding it
receives. It is spending taxpayers money so the government has a duty to ensure that it is
delivering value for money. This is particularly important in the light of the criticisms that have
been made.
The accounts kept by the school should be regularly audited to ensure that no financial
mismanagement has occurred and it will be expected to prepare and implement budgets. The
school should be expected to show some excess of income over expenditure, which will give it a
surplus for emergencies, even if this will be lower than in a profit-making entity, and a number of
accounting ratios can be used to monitor its performance.
Investor ratios such as ROCE will not be particularly appropriate but working capital ratios, such
as payables days, will be important, as will liquidity ratios. The school may not be expected to
HB2022
818 Financial Reporting (FR)
Equity
Share capital – $1 shares 210,000
Revaluation surplus Only Armstrong Co 82,000
Retained earnings (W4) 251,114
Non-controlling interest (W3) 31,000
Non-current liabilities 574,114
Deferred consideration (40,000 × 0.890) + (35,600 × 6%) 37,736
Current liabilities 229,600
267,336
Total equity and liabilities 841,450
Workings
1 Goodwill computation
$’000
Cash Per question 200,000
Deferred consideration (discounted) 40,000 × 0.890 35,500
HB2022
24: FQP Chapter 819
2 Net assets
3 Non-controlling interest
$’000
NCI at acquisition Per question 30,000
NCI % of Miller Co post-acquisition 5,000 (W2) × 20% 1,000
31,000
4 Retained earnings
$’000
Armstrong Co retained earnings 249,700
Armstrong Co’s % of Miller Co post-acquisition
profit (5,000 (W1) × 80%) 4,000
Unwinding of discount for deferred consideration (35,600 × 6%) (2,136)
Unrealised profit on the I/G inventory (450)
251,114
$’000
Armstrong Co sold widgets to Miller Co Per question 7,500
Profit margin on the widgets sold to Miller Co is
20%, therefore:
Cost of inventory sold 7,500 × 80% 6,000
Profit on the sale 1,500
30% of items still in inventory at year end 1,500 × 30% 450
Unrealised profit on the inventory held 450
HB2022
820 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
HB2022
822 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
Glossary 823
HB2022
824 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
Glossary 825
HB2022
826 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
Glossary 827
HB2022
828 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
Glossary 829
HB2022
830 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
Glossary 831
HB2022
HB2022
Index 835
HB2022
836 Financial Reporting (FR)
IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Leases of assets with a low underlying value,
Customers, 325 324
IFRS 15 – Five steps to recognise and measure Legal and constructive obligations, 345
revenue, 115 Legal obligation, 347
IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Let out clause, 354
Customers, 347 Liability, 8
IFRS 3 Business Combinations, 156, 590, 176 Limitations of eps, 473
HB2022
Index 837
O R
Objective of general purpose financial Ratio analysis, 484
reporting, 5 Receivables collection period, 491
Objectives of the IASB, 26 Recognition, 9
Obligating event, 345 Recognition criteria, 68
Obsolescence, 650 Recognition of an intangible asset, 576
Onerous contracts, 349 Recognition of impairment losses, 88
Operating activities, 532 Recoverable amount, 85, 429
Operating cycle, 403 Regulatory framework, 25
Options, warrants and their equivalents, 465 Related party (IAS 24), 518
Ordinary shares, 465 Relevance, 5
Owner-occupied property, 49 Reliable estimate, 345
Repayment of grants, 130
P
Replacements and Overhauls, 48
Parent, 152
Reporting dates, 591
Payables payment period, 492
Research, 69
Performance measurement, 716
Research and development costs, 576
Performance obligation, 114
Residual value, 39, 572
Performance obligation is satisfied, 115
Restructuring, 350
Performance obligations satisfied over time, 119
Restructuring and future operating losses, 183,
Potential ordinary share, 465, 470
596
Power, 152
Retirements and disposals, 568
HB2022
838 Financial Reporting (FR)
T
Tax base, 379
Tax expense (tax income), 379
Taxable profit (tax loss), 379
Taxable temporary differences, 379
Temporary difference, 379
The Conceptual Framework for General
Purpose Financial Reporting by Public Sector
Entities, 715
The existence of a significant financing
component, 117
The IFRS Foundation and the International
Accounting Standards Board (IASB), 25
The International Federation of Accountants
(IFAC), 557
The Three Es, 558
Theoretical ex-rights price (TERP), 469
HB2022
Index 839
HB2022
HB2022
Bibliography 843
HB2022
844 Financial Reporting (FR)
HB2022
Bibliography 845